JP2017131591A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of creating successive balls intentionally.SOLUTION: By allowing balls to repeatedly enter a top opening 8512 during a designated reduced period, a first period until game balls entering at a first point in time are discharged from a long hole 8544c becomes equal to or longer than a second period until game balls entering at a second point in time later than the first point in time are discharged from the long hole 8544c, thus reducing an interval between the early game balls and the later game balls within an internal flow path INR8. In this case, a state in which a plurality of game balls range can be intentionally and easily formed during the designated reduced period, thus improving profit that a player can obtain in a game machine having a possibility of increasing the profit obtained by the player when a plurality of balls are discharged from the long hole 8544c by pressing entry of balls into the top opening 8512 during the designated reduced period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 157

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a entrance where a gaming ball is guided to an advantageous route with a high profit that may be given to the player when the gaming balls enter in succession ( Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-161397 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the incoming game balls are generated when the balls that have been bounced down by the nail and gathered by chance (completely incidental), so that There was a problem that it was difficult to make.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of intentionally making a continuous ball.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a gaming area in which a gaming ball can flow down, a winning opening that is arranged in the gaming area and allows a gaming ball to win, In a gaming machine comprising a ball flow-down means arranged upstream and capable of guiding a game ball to the winning opening, the ball flow-down means receives a game ball from the game area, and enters the reception port. A discharge port for discharging the game ball toward the winning port, and a connection channel for connecting the reception port and the discharge port so that the game ball can flow down, and the ball entered the reception port at a first time point The first period required for the ball to be discharged from the outlet is required until the ball that has entered the receiving port at the second time after the first time is discharged from the outlet. A designated shortening period, which is a period equal to or longer than the second period, is formed.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the connection flow path is configured such that a gaming ball that has entered the receiving port at the second time point enters the receiving port at the first time point. It is formed in such a manner that it is arranged on the upstream side of the ball that has been balled.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein at the same time, the connection channel is connected to the outlet of the gaming ball that has entered the receiving port at the first time point. The directed velocity component is formed in such a manner that it is equal to or less than the velocity component directed to the discharge port of the game ball that has entered the receiving port at the second time point.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to form a period in which the interval between the game balls can be shortened, and it is possible to intentionally create a continuous ball.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the subsequent game ball does not overtake the previous game ball, so it is possible to easily make a continuous ball.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, it is possible to make a continuous ball without stopping the gaming ball.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the 1st flow down device. It is a front view of the 1st flow down device. It is a side view of the 1st flow down device in the arrow VII direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the 1st flow down device in the arrow VIII direction view of FIG. It is a partial back perspective view of the 1st flow down device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution body. (A) to (c) is a front view of the allocating body. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow down apparatus. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow down device. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow down apparatus. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow down device. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow down apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow down apparatus. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow down device. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow down apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow down apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow down apparatus. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow down device. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd flow down device. It is a front view of the 2nd flow down device. It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow down device in the range XXV of FIG. (A) to (c) is a partial front view of the second flow down device in the range XXV of FIG. (A) is a partial top view of the second falling device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIIa in FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the second flowing device along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27 (a). . It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. (A) is the partial front view of the 2nd falling device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is the partial top view of the 2nd falling device in the arrow XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29 (a). (A) is the partial front view of the 2nd falling device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is the partial top view of the 2nd flowing down device in the arrow XXXb direction view of Fig.30 (a). (A) And (b) is the partial front view of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the range XXVIII of FIG. (A) is the partial front view of the 2nd falling device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is the partial top view of the 2nd falling device in the arrow XXXIIb direction view of FIG. 32 (a). (A) is the partial front view of the 2nd falling device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is the partial top view of the 2nd flowing down device in the arrow XXXIIIb direction view of FIG. 33 (a). (A) is the partial front view of the 2nd falling device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is the partial top view of the 2nd flowing down device in the arrow XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 34 (a). It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. (A) is the partial front view of the 2nd falling device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is the partial top view of the 2nd falling device in the arrow XXXVIb direction view of FIG. 36 (a). (A) is the partial front view of the 2nd falling device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, (b) is the partial top view of the 2nd falling device in the arrow XXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 37 (a). It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow down device. It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow down device. (A) is a front view of the 2nd falling device in a 2nd embodiment, and (b) and (c) are sectional views of the 2nd flowing down device in the XLb-XLb line of Drawing 40 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of a 2nd flow down device. It is a front view of the 2nd flow down device. It is a front view of the 1st flow down device in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 44 is a side view of the first flow down device when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIV in FIG. 43. FIG. 45 is a top view of the first flow down device when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLV in FIG. 44. (A) And (b) is the partial front view of an introduction channel | path. (A) is the fragmentary sectional view of the 1st falling device in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the 1st flowing down device in the XLVIIb-XLVIIb line of FIG. 47 (a). . It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st flow down device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line of Drawing 47 (b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the route distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the route distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the route distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the route distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow down apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st flow down apparatus. It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow down device in a 5th embodiment in the range corresponding to range XXV of Drawing 24. (A) to (c) is a partial front view of the second flow down device in a range corresponding to the range XXV in FIG. It is a front view of the 2nd flow down device in a 6th embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flowing-down apparatus in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flowing-down apparatus in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LX-LX line | wire of Fig.59 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXI-LXI line of Fig.59 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flowing down apparatus in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flowing down apparatus in the LXIIb-LXIIb line of FIG. 62 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXIII-LXIII line | wire of Fig.62 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flowing down apparatus in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flowing down apparatus in the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXV-LXV line | wire of Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXVI-LXVI line | wire of Fig.64 (a). 67 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device taken along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXVIII-LXVIII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXIX-LXIX line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXVIII-LXVIII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXIX-LXIX line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXVIII-LXVIII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXIX-LXIX line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LIXa-LIXa line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXXV-LXXV line | wire of FIG. FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXXV-LXXV line | wire of FIG. FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LXXV-LXXV line | wire of FIG. FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LIXa-LIXa line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the LIXa-LIXa line | wire of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd flow down device in a 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a rolling bed apparatus. (A) is a front view of a 2nd flow down device, (b) is a sectional view of the 1st annular member in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line of Drawing 85 (a), (c) is Drawing 85 ( It is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line | wire of a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line | wire of Fig.85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line | wire of Fig.85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st annular member in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line | wire of Fig.85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line | wire of Fig.85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st annular member in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line | wire of Fig.85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85, (c) is the 2nd annular member in the arrow XCIc direction view of FIG. 91 (a). It is a partial inner surface figure. FIG. 89 is a partial top view of the second flow down device when viewed in the direction of the arrow IX in FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st annular member in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line | wire of Fig.85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line | wire of Fig.85 (a). FIG. 89 is a partial top view of the second flow down device when viewed in the direction of the arrow XCII in FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st annular member in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line | wire of Fig.85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line | wire of Fig.85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st annular member in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line | wire of Fig.85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line | wire of Fig.85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st annular member in the LXXXVb-LXXXVb line | wire of Fig.85 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow down apparatus in the CIa-CIa line | wire of FIG.85 (b). It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a small hit determination in the first random number counter and the first special symbol in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence with a value, (c) typically showed the correspondence between the 1st random number counter in a 1st control example, and the small hit determination value in a 2nd special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second random number counter in the first control example and a hit in a normal symbol. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. It is a game flow figure which shows the flow of the game by the pachinko machine of this embodiment as an example. It is a time chart explaining the flow from winning to the left start winning opening or the right starting winning opening in the first control example until the occurrence of a jackpot game. It is a time chart explaining the flow from winning a middle start winning opening to occurrence of a jackpot game in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hits start setting process performed in the special symbol fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the wing entrance passage process performed in the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot hour article device operation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot hour article apparatus release process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the abnormal process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed in the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp edit process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board in an 8th embodiment. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is a partial front exploded perspective view of a game board. (A) is a rear view of a front side apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the front side apparatus in the CXXXIb-CXXXXIb line | wire of Fig.134 (a). (A) is a rear view of the main body plate portion, (b) is a side view of the main body plate portion as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXVb in FIG. 135 (a), and (c) is a side view of FIG. 135 (a). It is a fragmentary sectional view of the main-body board part in the CXXXVc-CXXXVc line, (d) is a fragmentary sectional view of the main-body board part in the CXXXVd-CXXXVd line | wire of FIG.135 (c). (A) is a top view of the in / out member, (b) is a side view of the in / out member in the direction of arrow CXXXVIb in FIG. 136 (a), and (c) is an arrow CXXXVIc in FIG. 136 (a). It is a front view of the retractable member in the direction view. (A) is a top view of the transmission rod, (b) is a side view of the transmission rod in the direction of arrow CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137 (a), and (c) is an arrow CXXXVIIc in FIG. 137 (a). It is a front view of the transmission rod in the direction view. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the front side apparatus in the CXXXIb-CXXXIb line | wire of Fig.134 (a). (A) is a front view of a back side apparatus and a transmission apparatus, (b) is a side view of a back side apparatus and a transmission apparatus. It is a rear view of a back side apparatus. It is a rear view of a main-body board part. (A) is a top view of a 2nd transmission rod, (b) is a side view of the 2nd transmission rod in the arrow CXLIIb direction view of FIG. 142 (a), (c) is FIG. 142 (b). It is a front view of the 2nd transmission rod in the arrow CXLIIc direction view of). It is a front perspective view of a transmission device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission device. (A) is a front view of a 1st transmission member, (b) is a side view of the 1st transmission member in the arrow CXLVb direction view of FIG. 145 (a). (A) is a front view of a 2nd transmission member, (b) is a side view of the 2nd transmission member in the arrow CXLVIb direction view of FIG. 146 (a). (A) to (f) is a front view of the transmission device and the second transmission rod for explaining the operation of the transmission device in time series. FIG. 132 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device along the line CXLVIII-CXLVIII in FIG. 131. FIG. 132 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device along the line CXLVIII-CXLVIII in FIG. 131. FIG. 132 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device along the line CXLVIII-CXLVIII in FIG. 131. FIG. 132 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device along the line CXLVIII-CXLVIII in FIG. 131. FIG. 147 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device along the CLII-CLII line of FIG. FIG. 147 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device along the CLII-CLII line of FIG. FIG. 147 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device along the CLII-CLII line of FIG. FIG. 147 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device along the line CLV-CLV in FIG. 148. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the time change of the intruding member in a 1st action | operation pattern. (A) to (g) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an internal channel and a sphere passing through the internal channel. It is the figure which showed the relationship between the ball entry timing to the internal flow path in the 1st operation pattern, and the length of time required to pass through an internal flow path. (A) to (g) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an internal channel and a sphere passing through the internal channel. (A) to (g) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an internal channel and a sphere passing through the internal channel. (A) to (g) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an internal channel and a sphere passing through the internal channel. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the time change of the intruding member in a 4th action | operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the relationship between the ball entry timing to the internal flow path in the 4th operation pattern, and the length of time required to pass through an internal flow path. It is a time chart explaining the flow from the winning to the left start winning opening or the right starting winning opening in the first control example until the end of the small hit game. It is a time chart explaining the flow from winning a middle start winning opening in the first control example to the end of the small hit game. (A) is a front view of the 2nd transmission member in 9th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd transmission member in the CLXVIb-CLXVIb line | wire of Fig.166 (a). (A) to (f) is a front view of the transmission device and the second transmission rod for explaining the operation of the transmission device in time series. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the rotation direction of the 1st transmission member in a 5th operation pattern, (b) to (d) shows the time change of the intrusion member in a 5th operation pattern. It is a figure. It is the figure which showed the relationship between the ball entry timing to the internal flow path in the 5th operation pattern, and the length of time required to pass through the internal flow path. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of an operation pattern and each parameter in continuous ball formation. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the down-flow apparatus before a prize in a line corresponding to a CLII-CLII line of Drawing 148 in a 10th embodiment. FIG. 147 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device along a line corresponding to the CLII-CLII line in FIG. 148; FIG. 173 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device along the line CLXXIII-CLXXIII in FIG. 172. (A) is a time chart explaining the flow of the state change of the removal apparatus in a 6th operation pattern, (b) is a time chart explaining the flow of the state change of the removal apparatus in a 7th operation pattern. is there.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 26, 27, 28, 63 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device (not shown) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. .

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, A general winning opening 63, a relatively large movable winning combination device 190, a left starting winning opening 26 disposed at a lower left position of the movable incident winning combination device 190, and a middle starting winning combination disposed at a central position. The opening 28 is provided with a right start winning opening 27 disposed at a lower right position, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

  The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

  The general winning port 63, the left starting winning port 26, the right starting winning port 27, the middle starting winning port 28, and the movable winning ball accessory 190 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is fixed from the front side of the panel 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The game balls thrown into the game area randomly enter the normal winning opening 63, or enter the left starting winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28 or the right starting winning opening 27 in the process of flowing down. Or entering the movable entrance ball accessory device 190 during operation (when opened).

  The game balls that have entered the winning holes are collected to the back side of the game board 13 through through holes formed in the game board 13.

  On the other hand, the game balls that have flowed into the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 are discharged after being distributed through the flow, rolling, and rising processes in the interior, and are collected to the back side of the game board 13. The Note that the sorting operation in the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  The movable ball accessory device 190 is used when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the left start winning port 26, the middle start winning port 28, or the right start winning port 27, The special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit) and allows the inflow of game balls. That is, the movable ball accessory device 190 has a movable piece 190a (a so-called blade member) provided at an upper position of the game area. The movable piece 190a is, for example, a large opening solenoid 209a (see FIG. 4). Due to the action of the link mechanism using, it reciprocates by a predetermined angle along the board surface.

  As shown in the figure, the movable piece 190a is in a state of being substantially upright, and the big prize opening switch 190b is closed, so that the inflow of the game ball to the movable winning combination device 190 is always impossible. When the movable ball accessory device 190 is actuated, the movable piece 190a is displaced so as to fall in the left-right direction within the game area with the base end portion as the center, and the big winning opening switch 190b is opened, thereby moving the movable ball combination role. The inflow of the game ball to the physical device 190 (the game ball entering to the big prize opening switch 190b) is enabled. Since the movable piece 190a and the big prize opening switch 190b are close to the upper position in the game area, particularly the position where the game ball is first shot, it was driven into the game area when the movable ball accessory device 190 was operated. The game ball is guided to the upper position nail and easily reaches the movable piece 190a, and is guided to the movable piece 190a as it is and flows into the big prize opening switch 190b.

  In addition, the movable ball accessory device 190 operates even when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a game ball passes through any specific area provided inside the movable ball accessory device 190). , It is possible to enter the winning prize switch 190b. In addition, the specific area | region in the movable entrance ball apparatus 190 is further mentioned later.

  In the movable entrance ball accessory device 190, a first flow-down device 300 for flowing down the game ball that has flowed into the above-mentioned big winning opening switch 190b, and a game that has passed through a fixed area disposed in the first flow-down device 300. A second flow-down device 400 that distributes which specific area is allowed to flow through the sphere is disposed.

  All the game balls that have flowed into the movable entrance ball device 190 through the big prize opening switch 190b are guided into the inside of the movable entrance ball device 190 through the introduction passage 310 of the first flow down device 300. All the game balls that have flowed into the movable ball accessory device 190 are detected by the big prize opening switch 190b.

  In addition, a route sorting unit 320 is disposed in the movable entrance ball apparatus 190 following the introduction passage 310. The route sorting unit 320 performs a sorting operation for guiding the game ball to the normal route or the special route. If the game ball is guided to the normal route, the probability of a big hit after that is low, but if the game ball is guided to the special route, it will be a big hit after that compared to the case where the game ball is guided to the normal route. The probability of becoming higher. Details of the route distribution unit 320 will be described later.

  In addition, in the movable incoming ball accessory 190, a distribution tilting unit 350 is disposed following the route distribution unit 320. The distribution inclination unit 350 passes the game ball that has entered the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball game apparatus 190 through the fixed region that is determined to be guided to the specific region, or passes through the fixed region. Sort whether to discharge without any problems.

  Here, since the “determined area” is an area that must pass before the game ball passes through the specific area, if the game ball passes through the fixed area, the game ball will eventually pass through the specific area. Will do. However, since the game ball has not yet passed through the specific area when the game ball has passed through the fixed area, it is not a big hit in the strict sense, but from the viewpoint of the player, the game ball may pass through the fixed area. It ’s a decent jackpot.

  In any case, the distribution tilting part 350 distributes whether the game ball passes through the fixed area or is discharged without passing through the fixed area. The details of the distribution inclined portion 350 will be described later.

  In addition, a second flow down device 400 is disposed downstream of the first distribution inclined portion 350. The second flow-down device 400 performs the sorting in which the game balls that have passed through the fixed area are discharged after passing through any one of the plurality of specific areas.

  In other words, in the above-mentioned distribution tilting part 350, the sorting such as whether or not to pass the determined area is performed, but in this second flow down device 400, the game ball that has passed the determined area and the actual jackpot has been determined. On the other hand, distribution of what kind of profit is given is performed. Details of the second flow down device 400 will be described later.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the left and right start winning ports 26 and 27 or the middle start winning port 28. . Specifically, when the ball has won the left and right start winning ports 26 and 27, the first symbol display device 37A is operated, while when the ball has won the middle start winning port 28, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate by LED whether the pachinko machine 10 is short-running or normal, by a lighting state, whether it is changing, by a lighting state, Whether the symbol corresponds to a small hit is indicated by a lighting state, the number of held balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds or a big hit is displayed by a 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball flowing down the movable ball-carrying accessory device 190 passes through a specific area) is performed when a prize is received at the big prize opening switch 190b. . In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. The jackpot types determined here are 16R jackpot, 7R jackpot, and 3R jackpot. In the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, in the case of a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, “16R jackpot” means a jackpot of 16 rounds, “7R jackpot” means a jackpot of seven rounds, and “3R jackpot” The maximum number of rounds is a big hit of 3 rounds.

  One round is a unit for dividing the number of winning balls. In the present embodiment, during one round, the movable piece 190a is tilted and the big winning opening switch 190b is opened, and the game ends when 30 seconds elapse or when ten game balls pass the ten big winning opening switch 190b. Since one game ball passes through the big prize opening switch 190b, there are ten prize balls, so that about 100 prize balls can be obtained for each round.

  In the present embodiment, the first round ends when the game ball passes through the fixed area hole 340 (the fixed area switch 340a in the back, see FIG. 5). No. In other words, a maximum of about 200 prize balls can be obtained for 3R jackpots, a maximum of about 600 prize balls for 7R jackpots, and a maximum of about 1500 prize balls for 16R jackpots.

  The short-time state (short-to-medium time) refers to a game state in which it is easy to win a ball to the middle start winning opening 28 with the jackpot probability as it is and only the second pattern hit probability is increased. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, the game is not in a short time (a state in which the probability of winning the second symbol is not increased).

  In the present embodiment, a short time switch 190d (a front side of the discharge detection switch 190c) through which the game ball passes through the specific area hole 440 is disposed, and the short time state is obtained by the game ball passing through the short time switch 190d. Migrate to

  During the time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. . When the electric accessory 28a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the middle start winning opening 28 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 28a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the middle start winning opening 28, and the large winning opening switch 190b can be easily opened.

  Note that the time reduction switch 190d is arranged in such a manner that only a game ball that has passed through the third specific area hole 443 (see FIG. 23) arranged at the left end among the plurality of specific area holes 440 passes. As will be described later, the third specific area hole 443 is provided with a third specific area switch 443a (see FIG. 23) in which the player acquires the jackpot (three round jackpot) having the smallest profit among the specific area holes 440. It is a hole.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, even when the game ball flowing down the second flow down device 400 has the smallest jackpot (three round jackpot), it is possible to give the player a supplementary benefit by giving a shorter time. Can be granted. On the other hand, when the jackpot has a profit larger than the three-round jackpot, it is possible to prevent the profit to be given to the player from becoming excessively large by not giving a short time.

  It should be noted that, in the short time period, the opening time of the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 28a is per one time. It is good also as what changes the frequency | count to open | release more than usual. In addition, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time when the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 28a is released per hit is at least. One may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is released and the number of times the electric accessory 28a is released per time are not changed, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed. May be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a movable ball accessory device 190 is disposed at the center of the game area. In the movable pitching accessory 190, the winnings (start winnings) at the left and right starting winning ports 26 and 27 and the middle starting winning port 28 are used as a trigger while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A movable piece 190a that opens and closes and a second symbol display device (not shown) configured by LEDs that display the second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball of the through gate 67 are provided. In addition, a center frame 86 is disposed on the movable ball accessory device 190 so as to surround the outer periphery.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 28 a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is set for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the shorter time than in the normal gaming state. As a result, during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal time. Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 28a of the middle start winning opening 28. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the middle start winning opening 28 during the time.

  It is to be noted that the ball is likely to win the middle start winning opening 28 during the time shortening also by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the time shortening and increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 28a per hit. In this case, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set to be shorter than normal during the time reduction, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of times of opening the object 28a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left and right sides of the movable ball accessory device 190, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. There are four second symbol holding lamps corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and they are symmetrically arranged below the movable entrance ball accessory device 190.

  In addition, the variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the movable input. A part of the ball accessory device 190 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the movable ball accessory device 190. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Moreover, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the movable ball accessory device 190, and may be, for example, above the movable ball player device 190. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Left and right starting winning ports 26 and 27 through which a ball can win are arranged below the left and right sides of the movable ball accessory device 190. When a ball wins the left and right start winning ports 26 and 27, the left start winning port switch 210a and the right start winning port switch 210b provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on, and the left start winning port switch 210a and the right start winning port are turned on. A lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) due to the mouth switch 210b being turned on. A display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed by the first symbol display device 37A, and the movable piece 190a is displayed a predetermined number of times. It is opened once in the embodiment, and is closed after a predetermined period (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment).

  On the other hand, a middle start winning opening 28 through which a ball can win is disposed on the center side of the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 as viewed from the front. When the ball wins the middle start winning port 28, the middle start winning port switch 210c provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 (FIG. 4) is caused by turning on the start winning port switch 210c. The display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B, and the movable piece 190a repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times (twice in the present embodiment) (period of opening). Is 0.5 seconds, and the interval between the first and second times is 2 seconds).

  Each start winning opening 26, 27, 28 is drawn in a lottery so that the winning prize is 1/1. Therefore, in this embodiment, there is no jackpot lottery due to the game balls passing through the start winning ports 26, 27, 28. After the lottery, after a randomly selected opening period (1 to 5 seconds), the movable piece 190a repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times.

  Each of the left and right start winning ports 26 and 27 and the middle start winning port 28 is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the left and right starting winning holes 26 and 27 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is won at the middle starting winning hole 28 are the same. However, the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is won at the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 and the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is won at the middle start winning opening 28 are different, for example, left and right start winning prizes. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the mouths 26 and 27 may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the middle start winning prize port 28 may be five.

  The middle start winning opening 28 is accompanied by an electric accessory 28a. The electric accessory 28a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 28a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the middle start winning opening 28. On the other hand, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 28a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the middle start winning opening 28.

  As described above, during the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is also short. Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 28a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 28a is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the middle start winning opening 28 in the shorter time than in the normal time.

  The probability of winning a 16R jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a big win is set higher when the ball wins the middle start winning opening 28 than when the ball wins the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27. (A plurality of game balls can be easily entered into the movable entrance ball apparatus 190). On the other hand, the left and right start winning ports 26 and 27 do not have the electric combination as in the middle start winning port 28, and the ball can always win.

  A large winning opening switch 190b is disposed on the upper part of the movable ball accessory device 190. In the pachinko machine 10, the game ball that has entered the movable ball accessory device 190 has passed through the specific area hole 440 after winning the left and right start winning holes 26 and 27 or the middle start winning hole 28. When the jackpot is reached, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is movably entered. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by displaying on a part of the ball accessory device 190. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (a jackpot or jackpot game) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the movable piece 190a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have won).

  The special prize opening switch 190b is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the special prize opening switch 190b is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the special prize opening switch 190b can be repeated up to 15 times (16 rounds excluding the first round), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the big prize opening switch 190b, and the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the big prize opening switch 190b is opened for a predetermined time. The large opening provided separately from the large winning opening switch 190b is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the large winning opening switch 190b while the large winning opening switch 190b is opened. The gaming state may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the number of the big winning opening switch 190b is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is limited to the upper side of the movable pitching accessory device 190. For example, it may be below the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 26, 27, 28, 63 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). In addition, all game balls that have been driven into the game area, including game balls that have entered the movable ball accessory device 190, are collected to the back side of the game board 13. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  An example of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. The purpose of the game of the present embodiment is to pass the game ball through the specific area hole 440 and shift the game state to the special game state to obtain a prize ball. For this purpose, the player fires the game ball by adjusting the strength of the game ball so that the game ball slides down the upper surface of the center frame 86. As a result, when the game ball hits each start winning opening 26, 27, 28 while hitting a large number of nails, the movable piece 190a is opened. At this time, if the game ball can be entered into the movable entrance ball accessory device 190 in a timely manner, the game ball passes through the specific area hole 440 depending on the subsequent flow of the game ball, so that the player can play the game ball. You can enjoy watching the actual movement of the game ball to see if you can get a big hit or lose.

  That is, the first condition for obtaining a big hit is to open the movable piece 190a, and the second condition is to allow the game ball to enter the movable ball-indicating accessory device 190 when the movable piece 190b is opened.

  Therefore, in order to obtain a big hit in this embodiment, a hitting method in which the game ball cannot reach the center frame 86 (so-called “choking”) or a hitting method in which the game ball reaches the return rubber 69 (so-called “right hit”). Is disadvantageous.

  As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a structure in which a big hit is easily obtained when two game balls are simultaneously entered in the movable ball accessory device 190 is employed. Therefore, the player aims at the upper end of the center frame 86 (the apex portion pointed in a triangle) and launches it to disperse the game ball to the left and right, and from the left and right when the movable piece 190b is opened. Aiming at entering two balls one by one, it is possible to play a game so that it is easy to get a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 119), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 118) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 117) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of the movable piece 190a of the big prize opening switch 190b. A large-open-port solenoid 209a for opening / closing rotation to the left and right about the axis, an electric accessory solenoid 209b for driving the electric accessory 28a, or various solenoids / motors 209 including a motor are connected to the MPU 201. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the input / output port 205.

  Various types of direct switches 210 that are different from the various types of switches 208 and are directly related to the benefits given to the player are directly connected to the MPU 201 without going through the input / output port 205.

  The various solenoid motors 209 are for opening / closing and rotating the large opening opening solenoid 209a for driving the opening / closing rotation to the left and right about at least the lower side of the movable piece 190a of the large winning opening switch 190b, and for driving the opening / closing rotation of the electric accessory 28a. An electric accessory solenoid 209b, a staying solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) for driving the flow-down prevention plate 412 and a drive motor 421b (see FIG. 23) for driving the movable plate 421a are provided.

  The various direct switches 210 include a left start winning port switch 210a (see FIG. 2), a right start winning port switch 210b (see FIG. 2), a middle start winning port switch 210c (see FIG. 2), and a first specific area switch. 441a (see FIG. 23), a second specific area switch 442a (see FIG. 23), and a third specific area switch 443a (see FIG. 23).

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). The display mode setting of the 7-segment display performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and the notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as various solenoids and motors 209, 12 volts for driving motors and the like. Voltage, 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages. Supply.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  5 to 9 are diagrams showing details of the configuration of the first flow down device 300, FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the first flow down device 300, and FIG. 6 is a front view of the first flow down device 300. FIG. 7 is a side view of the first flow down device 300 in the direction of arrow VII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 8 is a top view of the first flow down device 300 in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. FIG. 9 is a partial rear perspective view of the first flow down device 300.

  5 and 6, the illustration of the front side wall of the introduction passage 310 and the front side wall of the route distribution unit 320 is omitted for easy understanding (that is, the game ball is located inside the introduction passage 310). In addition, the game ball flows down the inside of the route distribution unit 320, and the game ball is not dropped toward the front side (front side in FIG. 5).

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 9, the first flow down device 300 includes a pair of introduction passages 310 through which the game balls that have passed through the big prize opening switch 190 b (see FIG. 2) are guided, and the end positions of the introduction passages 310. A route distribution unit 320 that is connected to the introduction passage 310 at the center position in the left-right direction and from which the game ball flows down, a distribution inclination unit 330 that flows down the game ball sent from the route distribution unit 320, and A fixed region hole 340 that is a hole that is large enough to allow one game ball to be placed on the front side of the distributed inclined portion 330 at the center in the left-right direction of the distributed inclined portion 330, and the fixed region hole 340 And a detachment hole 350 that is larger than the fixed region hole 340 at a position shifted to the right and left from the center.

  The introduction passage 310 is a passage formed symmetrically with an inner diameter through which a game ball can pass, and is inclined downward toward the route distribution unit 320 disposed at the center, and its end position (route distribution). 1st protrusion part 311 and the 2nd protrusion part 312 are provided in the part (connection part with the part 320).

  The first protrusion 311 is a protrusion that protrudes upward in the front-rear width direction of the introduction passage 310. The game ball decelerates by coming into contact with the first protrusion 311.

  The second projecting portion 312 is an inclined surface portion that limits the flow-down direction of the game ball sent from the introduction passage 310 toward the route distribution portion 320 and is connected to the bottom surface of the outlet of the introduction passage 310 and descends in the left-right direction. It extends in an inclined manner.

  The route distribution unit 320 performs a distribution operation of distributing the incoming game balls to a normal flow path (normal route) or a special flow path (special route). In addition, the route distribution unit 320 includes a route distribution unit guiding path 321, a distribution body 322 that rotates when the game ball comes into contact, and a pair of special routes that are opened in the left-right direction of the distribution body 322. Hole 323 for normal route, a hole 324 for a normal route that opens rearward below the allocating body 322, and a special route guide path 325 that causes the game balls that have passed through the special route hole 323 to flow down toward the distribution inclined portion 350 And a normal route guiding path 326 that mainly causes the game balls that have passed through the normal route hole 324 to flow down toward the distribution inclined portion 350.

  The route distribution part guiding path 321 is a path extending vertically downward for guiding the game ball from the introduction path 310 to the distribution body 322, and is formed with a width that allows two game balls to be arranged side by side. .

  The distributing body 322 is a member that is rotatably supported, and has a fan-shaped section 322a having a cross-sectional fan shape that is disposed below the rotating shaft in an equilibrium state (see FIG. 6), and a middle portion in the circumferential direction of the fan-shaped section 322a. It mainly includes a plate-like portion 322b that extends from the position in a direction passing through the rotation axis (upward in FIG. 5) and is formed integrally with the fan-like portion 322a.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the fan-shaped portion 322a is configured from a shape that guides (inflows) the game ball to the special route hole 323 in a balanced state (a shape in which the left and right plane portions extend toward the special route hole 323). Is done.

  The plate-like portion 322b has a first shape when the distributing body 322 is in a state between a first angle state (see FIG. 11B) and a second angle state (see FIG. 11C), which will be described later. The distance between the two protruding portions 312 is extended to a length that is at least equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball.

  The special route hole 323 is a through-hole formed in the side wall of the route distribution unit 320 and is arranged as a pair of through-holes opened in the left-right direction of the distribution body 322. The special route hole 323 guides the game ball that has entered the special route hole 323 to the special route guide path 325. The special route guide path 325 is provided with special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, and the game balls that have entered the special route hole 323 are detected by the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1.

  The normal route hole 324 is a through hole formed in the back wall portion in the vicinity of the bottom wall portion of the route distribution portion 320. In addition, the normal route hole 324 is formed with a raised portion 324a at the center thereof that reduces the opening height. Since the height of the central portion of the normal route hole 324 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball by the raised portion 324a, the game ball avoids the central portion of the normal route hole 324 and the right and left sides of the normal route hole 324 Pass through the end.

  The special route guiding path 325 includes a left guiding path 325a and a right guiding path 325b respectively extending from the pair of special route holes 323, and they are formed symmetrically in the left-right direction and asymmetric in the front-rear direction.

  That is, the left guide path 325a includes a left detection switch 325a1 that detects the passage of a game ball inside thereof, and extends toward the front side and then extends vertically downward, while the right guide path 325b includes the left detection switch 325a. A right detection switch 325b1 for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the inside, and extends vertically downward without extending to the front side. By differently arranging the front and rear in this way, when the game balls pass through the pair of special route holes 323 at the same time, it is possible to prevent the game balls landing on the distribution inclined portion 330 from colliding in the left-right direction. Can do. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the special route guide path 325 can easily pass through the fixed region.

  The special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 are sensors that detect the passage of a game ball. By confirming the detection signals of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, it is possible to determine how many game balls have passed through the special route.

  Note that the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 may be used as triggers for the performance. For example, when a game ball passes through both of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds in the present embodiment), a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed region hole 340, and the more advantageous side Since it is likely to be a big hit, if it is detected that the game ball has passed through both of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, it is possible to enhance the player's interest by performing a sharp attack (violent light emission, sound effect) .

  On the other hand, when a game ball is detected only in one of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 due to an irregular flow of the game ball, even if the game ball passes through the fixed area hole 340, which jackpot Since it is unknown (whether it will be a big hit on the side with a lot of prize balls), it is possible to slightly enhance the player's interest by carrying out modest swearing (modest light emission, sound effect).

  In addition, for example, when it is repeatedly detected that a game ball enters one of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 (for example, continuously detected three times), an illegal act of fixing the sorting body 322 by some method. It is possible to suppress the player's fraud by judging that it is going and giving an error.

  Since the exit of the special route guiding path 325 is disposed in the vicinity of the front end portion of the distribution inclined portion 330, the game ball discharged from the special route guiding path 325 hits the protruding portion 331 of the distributing inclined portion 330. It flows down toward the front center without touching.

  The normal route guiding path 326 extends rearward from the left and right end portions of the normal route hole 324 while inclining outward in the left-right direction, and extends vertically downward at the rear end portion. Since the exit of the normal route guiding path 326 is arranged in the vicinity of the rear end portion of the distribution inclined portion 330, the game ball discharged from the normal route guiding path 326 hits the projection 331 of the distribution inclined portion 330. Flow down toward the front while touching.

  The distribution inclined portion 330 is an inclined surface portion formed from a curved shape in which a cross section in a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction is sunk in the center portion, and a plurality of protrusions 331 are scattered and protruded from the middle portion.

  A plurality of the protrusions 331 are inclined in the direction toward the left and right ends toward the front side, and have a gap about the diameter of the game ball in the middle portion. Therefore, most of the game balls discharged from the normal route guiding path 326 are caused to flow toward the left and right ends by the protrusions 331, while some of the game balls pass through the gap toward the fixed region hole 340.

  The protrusion 331 is arranged behind the position where the game ball discharged from the special route guiding path 325 contacts the distribution inclined portion 330 (upstream of the distribution inclined portion 330). Therefore, the game ball discharged from the special route guiding path 325 can flow down to the front side while moving toward the center along the curved shape of the distribution inclined portion 330 without colliding with the protruding portion 331, and is confirmed. It becomes easy to pass through the region hole 340.

  On the other hand, the game ball discharged from the normal route guiding path 326 flows down the distribution inclined portion 330 while colliding with the protrusion 331, so whether or not it passes through the fixed region hole 340 is a random flow of the game ball. Entrusted to sex. In the present embodiment, the detachment holes 350 arranged on the left and right of the fixed region hole 340 are opened larger than the fixed region hole 340, so that the game balls discharged from the normal route guide path 326 can easily pass through the detachable hole 350. Become.

  That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make the game ball passing through the special route guide route 325 easier to pass through the fixed region hole 340 than the game ball passing through the normal route guide route 326. .

  The game ball that has entered the fixed area hole 340 will subsequently pass through the fixed area, and the game ball that has entered the off hole 350 will be discharged without passing through the specific area thereafter. Become.

  Here, a fixed area switch 340a (see FIG. 5) is provided in the fixed area, and a game ball passing through the fixed area is detected by the fixed area switch 340a. In addition, an out passage (not shown) is formed at the lower edge of the movable ball accessory device 190 (see FIG. 2). For this reason, the game ball that has entered the detachment hole 350 without entering the fixed region hole 340 is guided to the out path, and is discharged from the movable ball accessory device 190 without passing through the fixed region or the specific region. The Then, the game balls flowing down the out passage are configured to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c, and the game balls passing through the out passage are detected by the discharge detection switch 190c. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the fixed region hole 340 also joins the out passage and passes through the discharge detection switch 190c.

  The discharge detection switch 190c detects a difference in the number of detected balls from the game ball that has entered the special winning opening switch 190b, and the difference disappears within a predetermined period (for example, within 15 seconds), so that the game can be performed stably. It is a switch for confirming that For example, when a game ball accumulates on the protrusion 331 of the distribution inclined portion 330 and the discharge of the game ball is delayed, it can be determined that a game ball discharge error has occurred and an alarm can be given.

  The allocating body 322 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the allocating body 322, and FIGS. 11A to 11C are front views of the allocating body 322. 10 and 11A show the equilibrium state of the allocating body 322, and in FIG. 11B, the first state in which the allocating body 322 rotates clockwise from the equilibrium state by the first angle θ1. The angle state is illustrated, and FIG. 11C illustrates the second angle state in which the sorting body 322 is rotated clockwise from the first angle state by the second angle θ2. Further, in FIGS. 11A to 11C, a partial cross-sectional view at an intermediate position in the axial direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 11) of the distributing body 322 is enlarged.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the distributing body 322 includes the above-described fan-shaped portion 322a, plate-shaped portion 322b, and a pair of annular connection rings that connect the fan-shaped portion 322a and the plate-shaped portion 322b at the front and rear end portions. The portion 322c has an inner periphery that is a surface position and an inner periphery of the connecting ring portion 322c, and extends between the pair of connecting ring portions 322c in the front-rear direction (the axial direction of the distributing body 322). The cross section perpendicular to the extending direction is connected in the phase range where the resistance extending portion 322d is not formed between the resistance extending portion 322d formed of a split ring shape in which the ring is divided in half and the pair of connecting ring portions 322c. A separation center portion 322e that is recessed radially outward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring portion 322c, and a rod-like member that communicates with the pair of connection ring portions 322c, A fixed shaft support bar 322f, Provided.

  The shaft support bar 322f is a member that is bonded and fixed to the rear side wall of the route distribution part 320 and extends to the vicinity of the front side wall (not shown), and is configured from a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the coupling ring part 322c. And a connecting rod portion 322f2 that is a rod-like member that connects the pivoting column portion 322f1 and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the sectional shape of the pivoting column portion 322f1.

  The pair of axial support columnar portions 322f1 are arranged coaxially, and the interval in the axial direction is the same as the interval between the connecting ring portions 322c. Thereby, since a pair of connection ring part 322c can be supported by a pair of axial support column part 322f1, an axial support state can be stabilized and the rotation state of fan-like part 322a and plate-like part 322b is stabilized. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod portion 322f2 has a lower substantially half-circumferential portion that is an outer periphery and a surface position of the shaft-supporting columnar portion 322f1, and an upper substantially half-circular portion that is recessed inward in the radial direction. The purpose will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b), the distribution body 322 is in a state between an equilibrium state (see FIG. 11 (a)) and a first angle state (see FIG. 11 (b)). In this case, since the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d are separated from each other, a frictional resistance is generated between the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d even when the distributing body 322 starts to rotate. Absent. Therefore, in the state between the equilibrium state and the first angle state, the distributing body 322 can be configured to rotate easily (rotational resistance can be suppressed).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C, the distributing body 322 is in the first angle state (see FIG. 11B) and the second angle state (see FIG. 11C). Between the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d, the area of contact between the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d increases toward the second angle state. The resulting frictional resistance can be increased. Therefore, compared with the state between the equilibrium state and the first angle state, the distributing body 322 can be made difficult to rotate (rotational resistance can be increased).

  Therefore, when the game ball comes into contact with the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 can be quickly rotated at the start of contact, and the distribution body 322 can be rotated in such a manner that the momentum of rotation gradually decreases.

  With reference to FIGS. 12 to 22, the distribution operation of the route distribution unit 320 will be described. First, the case where one game ball A1 flows into the route distribution unit 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12A, 12B, and 13 are partial front views of the first flow down device 300. FIG. 12A shows the equilibrium state of the allocating body 322, FIG. 12B shows the first angle state of the allocating body 322, and FIG. 13 shows the second angle state of the allocating body 322. In addition, the flow of the game ball A1 is illustrated in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), the game ball A1 that has flowed down the introduction passage 310 moves over the first protrusion 311 while the speed in the left-right direction is decelerated by coming into contact with the first protrusion 311 and the second protrusion It flows downward along the inclined surface of the portion 312 (toward the shaft support bar 322f). Therefore, the game ball A1 is vigorously sent to the left from the introduction passage 310 and is prevented from getting over the sorting body 322, and landed on the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). Is prevented.

  When the game ball A1 rolls down on the upper surface of the second protrusion 312a from the state shown in FIG. 12A, the game ball A1 flows down along the arrow A1x shown in FIG. It rolls along the inclination of the fan-shaped portion 322a and reaches the position shown in FIG. 12B (position close to the special route hole 323).

  Here, since the allocating body 322 has a reduced rotational resistance from the equilibrium state shown in FIG. 12A to the first angle state shown in FIG. 12B, the game ball A1 becomes the allocating body 322. By landing, the distribution body 322 rotates by the weight of the game ball A1. Therefore, the game ball A <b> 1 is restrained (absorbed) from the allocating body 322 and flows down in a manner in which the allocating body 322 is pushed.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (b), the game ball A1 rolls on the upper surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a until the distributing body 322 is in the first angle state (in this embodiment, about 0.5 second). Then, it flows downward to the right and reaches the front side (left side in FIG. 12B) of the special route hole 323. In this state, since the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (the surface on which the game ball A1 is riding) sinks below the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323, the game ball A1 passes through the special route hole 323. To be prevented.

  Thereafter, the allocating body 322 is further rotated by the load applied from the game ball A1, and enters the second angle state shown in FIG. 13 (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), whereby the game sphere A1 is removed from the allocating body 322. Drops downward and heads toward the normal route hole 324.

  That is, when one game ball A1 flows into the route distribution unit 320, the game ball A1 passes through the normal route hole 324.

  Next, a case where two game balls A2 and A3 flow into the route distribution unit 320 from the left and right simultaneously will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 (a), 14 (b), and 15 are partial front views of the first flow down device 300. FIG. 14 (a), 14 (b), and 15 illustrate the equilibrium state of the allocating body 322, and the flow of the game balls A2 and A3 is illustrated in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a), the game balls A2 and A3 flowing down the introduction passage 310 abut on the first protrusion 311 to overcome the first protrusion 311 while the speed in the left-right direction is reduced. 2 Flows downward along the inclined surface of the protruding portion 312 (toward the shaft support bar 322f).

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls A2 and A3 from being vigorously sent in the left and right directions from the introduction passage 310 and get over the sorting body 322, and the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). Landing on is prevented.

  When the game balls A2 and A3 roll down on the upper surface of the second protrusion 312a from the state shown in FIG. 14A, the game balls A2 and A3 are moved to the arrows A1x and A2x shown in FIG. After flowing down, it lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a. Note that the arrow A2x is an arrow in a direction obtained by horizontally inverting the arrow A1x.

  Here, since the load in the rotation direction centered on the shaft support bar 322f applied to the distribution body 322 is balanced, the rotation of the distribution body 322 is suppressed, and the distribution body 322 maintains an equilibrium state. Even while the game balls A2 and A3 flow down to the left and right along the inclination of the upper surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a, the distribution balls 322 are maintained in an equilibrium state by the game balls A2 and A3 having the same flow mode. Therefore, the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (the surface on which the game balls A2 and A3 are riding) is suppressed from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without a step), and the game ball A2 and A3 flow into the special route hole 323.

  That is, when two game balls A2 and A3 simultaneously flow into the route distribution unit 320, the game balls A2 and A3 pass through the special route hole 323.

  Next, a case where two game balls A4 and A5 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a timing slightly deviated from the left and right (for example, timing deviated by 0.5 seconds) will be described with reference to FIGS. To do. FIGS. 16A, 16B, 17A, 17B, and 18 are partial front views of the first flow down device 300. FIG. 16A shows the equilibrium state of the allocating body 322, FIG. 16B shows the first angular state of the allocating body 322, and FIG. 17A shows that the allocating body 322 is the first state. As a state between the angle state and the second angle state, in FIG. 17B, the distribution body 322 is a state between the first angle state and the equilibrium state, and in FIG. 18, the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322. Are shown, and the flow of the game balls A4 and A5 is shown in time series.

  In this embodiment, since the opening period of the movable piece 190b is 0.5 seconds, a game ball that enters with one opening does not cause a time delay of 0.5 seconds or more. Is an example in which the game ball is displaced with the maximum displacement width (for example, one game ball A4 enters immediately after the opening of the movable piece 190b and the other game ball A5 enters immediately before the movable piece 190b is closed. Example).

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the game balls A4 and A5 flowing down the introduction passage 310 abut on the first protrusion 311 and get over the first protrusion 311 while the speed in the left-right direction is reduced. 2 Flows downward along the inclined surface of the protruding portion 312 (toward the shaft support bar 322f).

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls A4 and A5 from being vigorously sent in the left and right directions from the introduction passage 310 and overcoming the sorting body 322, and at the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). Landing on is prevented.

  In the state shown in FIG. 16A, when the previous game ball A4 rolls down and flows down the upper surface of the second protrusion 312a, it flows down along the arrow A1x and then lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a. Thus, the allocating body 322 rotates clockwise, and the first angle state shown in FIG.

  From the state shown in FIG. 16B until the game ball A5 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 further rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game ball A4. In the state shown in a) (between the first angle state and the second angle state), the rotational resistance of the distributing body 322 increases and the rotational speed decreases, so that the distributing body 322 becomes the second angular state. Can be lengthened. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball A4 from dropping from the distribution body 322 because the distribution body 322 is in the second angle state before the subsequent game ball A5 lands on the distribution body 322.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, when the game ball A5 lands on the fan-shaped portion 322b, loads are applied to the distribution body 322 from both directions of rotation, and the loads in the rotation direction balance (cancel). As shown in FIG. 17B, the allocating body 322 approaches the equilibrium state. Further, since the load applied to the distribution body 322 from the game balls A4 and A5 balances, the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state as shown in FIG. 18, so that the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (game ball) The surface on which A2 and A3 are riding) is prevented from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without any step), and the game balls A4 and A5 are flown into the special route hole 323. The

  That is, when the two game balls A4 and A5 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a slightly shifted timing, the game balls A4 and A5 pass through the special route hole 323. As described above, the distributing body 322 in the phon embodiment absorbs the deviation even when a plurality of game balls arrive with a time delay of 0.5 seconds, which is the opening period of the movable piece 190a, and absorbs the deviation. The game ball can be sent to H.323.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, a case where two game balls A6 and A7 flow into the route distribution unit 320 from one side will be described. FIGS. 19A, 19B, 20A, and 20B are partial front views of the first flow down device 300. FIG. 19A shows the equilibrium state of the allocating body 322, FIG. 19B shows the first angular state of the allocating body 322, and FIG. 20A shows that the allocating body 322 is the first state. As a state between the angle state and the second angle state, in FIG. 20B, the distributing body 322 is illustrated as a state between the first angle state and the equilibrium state, respectively, and a game ball A6, The flow of A7 is illustrated in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the game balls A6 and A7 flowing down the introduction passage 310 abut on the first protrusion 311 and get over the first protrusion 311 while the speed in the left-right direction is reduced. 2 Flows downward along the inclined surface of the protruding portion 312 (toward the shaft support bar 322f).

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls A6 and A7 from being vigorously sent in the left and right directions from the introduction passage 310 and overcoming the sorting body 322, and the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). Landing on is prevented.

  Further, when the game balls A6 and A7 are connected and flow down the introduction passage 310, the game ball A6 comes into contact with the first protrusion 311 and is decelerated, and the rear of the game ball A6 (right side in FIG. 19 (a)). The game ball A7 is decelerated while coming into contact with the game ball A6, and after the game ball A6 gets over the first protrusion 311 and flows down, the game ball A7 comes into contact with the first protrusion 311 and decelerates again. As a result, the space between the previous game ball A6 and the subsequent game ball A7 is increased (about 1 second in the present embodiment).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19B, after the game ball A6 flows down along the arrow A1x, after landing on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a and rotating the distributing body 322 to the first angle state, In addition, it is set as the state in the middle of getting over the 1st protrusion part 311.

  From the state shown in FIG. 19B until the game ball A7 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 further rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game ball A6. In the state shown in a) (between the first angle state and the second angle state), the rotational resistance of the distributing body 322 increases and the rotational speed decreases, so that the distributing body 322 becomes the second angular state. Can be lengthened. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball A6 from dropping from the sorting body 322 because the sorting body 322 is in the second angle state before the subsequent game ball A7 lands on the sorting body 322.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 20A, the distribution body 322 is further rotated clockwise by the load of the game ball A6, so that the tip of the plate-like portion 322b comes close to the second protruding portion 312 on the right side. . In this state, the game ball A7 rolls on the upper surface of the plate-like portion 322b while rolling along the arrow A1x while rolling on the inclined surface of the second projecting portion 312. Land on the left side. That is, the game balls A6 and A7 can be distributed to the left and right of the allocating body 322 by the plate-like portion 322b.

  In the present embodiment, since the game ball A7 flows down at the speed toward the rotation center of the allocating body 311 by the second projecting portion 312, the rotation angle of the plate-like portion 322b is insufficient (for example, FIG. 19 ( Even if the game ball A7 flows down from the second projecting portion 312 in the state shown in b), the game ball A7 is supported by the tip portion of the plate-like portion 322b (between the second projecting portion 312). The game ball A7 can be reliably made to flow down to the left of the sorting body 322 by further rotating the sorting body 322 clockwise therefrom.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, when the game ball A7 lands on the left side of the fan-shaped portion 322b, loads are applied to the distributing body 322 from both directions of rotation, and the loads in the rotation direction balance (cancel). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20B, the distributing body 322 approaches the equilibrium state. Furthermore, since the load applied to the distribution body 322 from the game balls A6 and A57 balances, the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state, so that the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (the game balls A6 and A7 are on it). ) Is prevented from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without a step), and the game balls A6 and A7 flow into the special route hole 323.

  That is, when two game balls A6 and A7 flow into the route distribution unit 320 from one side, the game balls A6 and A7 pass through the special route hole 323.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, a description will be given of a case where two game balls A8 and A9 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a timing significantly shifted (about 2 seconds in this embodiment). In such a state, for example, the movable piece 190a (see FIG. 2) is opened twice by one operation trigger, and each game ball is opened one time, and the big winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2). ).

  FIGS. 21A, 21B, and 22 are partial front views of the first flow down device 300. FIG. 21A shows the second angle state of the allocating body 322, and FIG. 21B shows the state of the allocating body 322 between the first angle state and the second angle state. Then, the equilibrium state of the allocating body 322 is illustrated, and the flow of the game balls A8 and A9 is illustrated in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the distribution body 322 is in the second angle state due to the load of the game ball A8, and after the game ball A8 is dropped, the distribution body 322 starts to rotate toward the equilibrium state. However, since the rotational resistance is increased between the second angle state and the first angle state, the allocating body 322 rotates slowly.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21B, the game ball A9 lands on the distribution body 322 in a state between the first angle state and the second angle state. Here, since the rotating resistance of the allocating body 322 is large, the game ball A9 does not cause an operation of pushing the allocating body 322 as when landing on the balanced allocating body 322. Bounces on the inclined surface of the allocating body 322, and an operation of a mode in which the angular state of the allocating body 322 is maintained between the first angle state and the second angle state occurs.

  Therefore, as soon as the game ball A9 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 passes through the equilibrium state, and the distribution body 322 does not move toward the left and right sides, and the distribution body 322 rotates slowly. Therefore, after arranging the game ball A9 along the inclination of the fan-shaped portion 322b on the side close to the special route hole 323 (the left and right end sides of the fan-shaped portion 322a), the distributing body 322 is allowed to reach an equilibrium state. Can do. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22B, the game ball A9 can flow into the special route hole 323 at the same time as the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state.

  That is, when the two game balls A8 and A9 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a timing greatly shifted (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), the previous game ball A8 passes through the normal route hole 324. The later game ball A9 passes through the special route hole 323.

  In order to achieve this, in this embodiment, the game ball abuts on the distributing body 322 and changes the state of the distributing body 322 from the equilibrium state to the second angle state, and then returns to the first angle state. The period (about 4 seconds) is set to an interval from closing to opening (2 seconds in this embodiment) when the movable piece 190a (see FIG. 2) opens twice.

  In the present embodiment, the period of time required for the game ball that has passed through the normal route hole 324 to pass through the normal route guide path 326 and the distribution inclined portion 330 and reach the confirmed region hole 340 is from 4 seconds to 5 seconds. Designed to fit in seconds. In addition, the period of time required for the game ball that has passed through the special route hole 323 to reach the fixed region hole 340 through the special route guide path 325 and the distribution inclined portion 330 is set to be 2 seconds to 3 seconds. Designed.

  That is, for example, in FIG. 21 (a), when both the game balls A8 and A9 reach the fixed region hole 340, the game ball A8 moves from the state of FIG. After reaching the hole 340, the game ball A9 is about 2 seconds to 3 seconds after the state shown in FIG. 21B, which is about 0.5 seconds after the state shown in FIG. From the state of 21 (a), the fixed region hole 340 is reached (after 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds) (becomes an equilibrium state in about 1 second, and then is confirmed in 1.5 to 2.5 seconds) Reach the area hole 340). Accordingly, the game balls A8 and A9 reach the fixed region hole 340 with a maximum displacement of 2.5 seconds.

  As described above, when two game balls enter the movable ball accessory device 190 by one small hitting lottery, the maximum deviation interval when the game balls reach the fixed region hole 340 is as follows. It is set to about 2.5 seconds. Based on this, the extension period of the staying solenoid 413 of the second flow down device 400 described later is set to 5 seconds. Thereby, it is possible to reliably carry out the plurality of game balls to stay in the flow-inhibiting plate 412 and then flow down again.

  Next, the second flow down device 400 in which the game ball that has passed through the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 5) of the first flow down device 300 flows down will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the second flow-down device 400, and FIG. 24 is a front view of the second flow-down device 400. As shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the second flow down device 400 is a device that is composed of a plurality of branched flow paths and flows down the game ball that has passed through the defined region hole 340 (see FIG. 5). A first branch region 410 that branches into two, and a region where a game ball that has flowed down the second branch induction channel R2 that is the upper channel branched in the first branch region 410 reaches, and the channel is A game ball that has flowed down through the second branch region 420 that branches into two and the third branch guide channel R3 that is the lower channel branched in the first branch region 410 reaches the second branch channel 420. A third branch region 430 in which the game ball that has flowed down the special induction flow channel R4, which is a flow channel on the near side branched at divergence, and the flow channel branches into two, and a plurality of game balls are discharged Specific basin hole 440, and each branch region 410-430 has Induction passage R1~R6 to induce trick ball is connected.

  The first branch induction flow path R1 is a flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 5) is guided, and extends to the lower right and then slightly deviates from the vertical direction to the right ( It is a flow path that extends in the downward slope toward the lower right) and is connected to the first branch region 410 from above. In other words, the game ball flows into the first branch area 410 along a direction (diagonally lower right direction) that slightly deviates to the right from the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the first branch induction flow path R1 is configured to discharge the inflowing game ball to the first branch region 410 in a maximum of 3 seconds.

  The second branch guiding channel R2 is an upper channel branched from the first branch region 410, and extends to the lower left and is connected to the second branch region 420 from the right side.

  The third branch guide flow path R3 is a lower flow path branched from the first branch region 410, and extends in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side, and then in a downwardly inclined direction to the left. After extending further vertically downward, the third branch region 430 is connected from above.

  The special induction flow path R4 is a flow path on the near side branched from the second branch region 420, and extends vertically downward, and then merges from above into a portion extending in the vertical direction of the third branch induction flow path R3. To do. After the game ball flows into the special guide channel R4, it takes 1 second to reach the sorting protrusion 431 and flow into the left or right channel.

  The first delay guide channel R5 is a right channel that branches off from the third branch region 430, extends downward to the right, and is provided with a second specific region hole 442 at the lower end.

  The second delay guide flow path R6 is a flow path on the back side branched from the second branch area 420, extends to the lower left, and is provided with a third specific area hole 443 at the left end.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the third branch guide flow path R3 has a longer path than the second branch guide flow path R2, while the inclination angle is increased. Therefore, the flow position (left and right position) of the game balls flowing down the respective guide flow paths R2 and R3 can be made uniform. In the present embodiment, two game balls sent simultaneously from the first branch region 410 to the second branch guide channel R2 and the third branch guide channel R3 are stopped in the second branch guide channel R2. Instead, the shape of the flow path is designed so as to make contact in the vertical direction at the merging position when the ball enters the special guide flow path R4.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the first delay guide channel R5 has a larger inclination angle and a shorter extension length than the second delay guide channel R6. That is, compared to the case where the game ball passes through the first delay guide flow path R5 (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), the case where the game ball passes through the second delay guide flow path R6 (about in the present embodiment). 5 seconds), the game ball stays longer. Note that a plurality of deceleration protrusions for decelerating the game ball are disposed on the bottom surfaces of the induction flow paths R5 and R6.

  The specific area hole 440 includes a first specific area hole 441 disposed in the left flow path branched from the third branch area 430 and a second specific area disposed in the lower end portion of the first delay guide flow path R5. An area hole 442 and a third specific area hole 443 disposed at the left end of the second delay guide flow path R6 are mainly provided.

  The first specific area hole 441 is a hole for guiding a game ball to the first specific area for 16 round big hits, and a first specific area switch 441a is disposed directly below the hole. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first specific area through the first specific area hole 441 is detected by the first specific area switch 441a.

  The second specific area hole 442 is a hole for guiding a game ball to the second specific area for 7 rounds big hit, and a second specific area switch 442a is disposed directly below the second specific area hole 442. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second specific area through the second specific area hole 442 is detected by the second specific area switch 442a.

  The third specific area hole 443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for the big hit of 3 rounds, and the third specific area switch 443a is disposed directly below the third specific area hole 443. Thereby, the game ball passing through the third specific area through the third specific area hole 443 is detected by the third specific area switch 443a.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, for example, even if the game ball passes through the first specific area while the game ball passes through the third specific area and the effect of three rounds of big hit is being performed, The game ball becomes invalid (since 3R jackpot processing is already running, it is not interrupted), and the 16-round jackpot effect is not executed. Therefore, it was a cause of dissatisfaction with the player. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the game ball can pass through a plurality of specific areas, the game ball is configured to pass through the specific area having the larger benefit to the player first. The Details thereof will be described later.

  With reference to FIG. 25, the configuration of the first branch region 410 will be described. FIG. 25 is a partial front view of the second flow down device 400 in the range XXV of FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, the first branch region 410 abuts from the right side of the game ball that has flowed down the first branch induction flow path R1, and reflects the game ball toward the second branch flow path R2. And a flow-inhibiting structure configured to be able to appear and retract in a manner that switches between an overhanging state projecting inward of the second branch guiding channel R2 and the third branch guiding channel R3 and a retracted state sunk outward. And a staying solenoid 413 that drives the flow-inhibiting plate 412 and is disposed on the back side of the second branch guide passage R2.

  The contact wall 411 is a side wall that extends vertically upward with a length equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the distribution of the game balls can be changed between the case where there is one game ball toward the contact wall 411 and the case where there are two or more game balls. The manner in which the contact wall 411 distributes the game balls will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the overhanging state, the flow-off prevention plate 412 narrows the size of the opening inside the second branch guide channel R2 and the third branch guide channel R3 to be equal to or smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and stops the game ball. On the other hand, in the retracted state, the flow-inhibiting blocking plate 412 is sunk outward from the second branch induction flow path R2 and the third branch induction flow path R3, so that the stop of the game ball is released.

  That is, by setting the flow-inhibiting plate 412 in an overhanging state, it is possible to temporarily stop the game ball that has flowed down the first branch induction flow path R1 and reached the left side of the contact wall 411. By switching the drive state of the staying solenoid 413 to bring the flow-in prevention plate 412 into the retracted state, the game ball can be sent to the left. Therefore, the timing at which the game ball is sent downward from the vicinity of the contact wall 411 can be arbitrarily defined depending on the control of the staying solenoid 413.

  FIG. 26A to FIG. 26C are partial front views of the second flow down device 400 in the range XXV of FIG. 26 (a) to 26 (c) show a time series of two game balls B1 and B2 flowing into the first specific area 410. In FIG. 26 (a), FIG. 26 (b) shows a state immediately before the entered game ball B1 comes into contact with the contact wall 411. In FIG. 26 (b), the game ball B2 entered later comes into contact with the game ball B1 and is pushed to the right. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 26C, the game balls B1 and B2 are separated, the game ball B1 flows into the second branch induction flow path R2, and the game ball B2 flows into the third branch induction flow path R3. Is illustrated. Also, in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the flow prevention plate 412 is illustrated in an overhanging state.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the previous game ball B1 flows down the first branch induction flow path R1 in the extending direction toward the lower right, and collides with the contact wall 411 on the right side surface. At the same time, after landing on the bottom plate of the second branch guide channel R2, the second branch guide channel R2 flows down to the left.

  At this time, the game ball B1 starts to flow down to the second branch guide flow path R2 from the state where the speed in the left-right direction is suppressed (landed state) to the left. Then, at the position bounced leftward from the abutting wall 411 (see FIG. 26B), the flow-off prevention plate 412 is prevented from flowing down and stays for a while.

  Since the subsequent game ball B2 flows into the first branch area 410 while the game ball B1 stays, the game ball B2 comes into contact with the game ball B1 before contacting the contact wall 411. At the time of this contact, the game ball B1 is disposed at a position slightly shifted to the left from the position of contact with the contact wall 411, and the game ball B2 hits the game ball B1 from above on the right side of the center of the game ball B1. Touch. Therefore, a load in the right direction is applied from the game ball B1 to the game ball B2 by the contact.

  Further, since the game ball B2 has a velocity component in the lower right direction along the extending direction of the first branch guide flow path R1, the game ball B2 moves to the right after coming into contact with the game ball B1. Here, since the extending height of the contact wall 411 is shorter than the diameter of the game balls B1 and B2, the game ball B2 can be moved to the right in a state where the contact wall 411 is overcome. As a result, the game ball B2 flows down the third branch guide flow path R3, is prevented from flowing down by the flow-down prevention plate 412 below the game ball B1, and stays for a while.

  The staying solenoid 413 has a period of time necessary for the game ball B2 to reach the flow-inhibiting plate 412 of the third branch induction flow path R3 after the game balls B1 and B2 flow into the first branch induction flow path R1. In the embodiment, when a period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) sufficiently longer than 3 seconds elapses, the driving state is switched to enter the retracted state. Therefore, even when the intervals at which the two game balls B1 and B2 flow into the first branch induction flow path R1 are different, the flow start timing when the game balls B1 and B2 stop once and start to flow again In addition, the flow start position can be fixed.

  When two game balls B1 and B2 enter the first branch region 410 together, the subsequent game ball B2 enters the third branch guide channel R3, which is more advantageous than the second branch guide channel R2. be able to. On the other hand, when the game balls enter the first branch area 410 one by one, the contact ball 411 prevents the game balls from entering the third branch guide flow path R3, regardless of how many times they enter the game. Inflow is prevented.

  Therefore, the way of branching of the game balls can be changed depending on the number of game balls entering the first branch area 410 together, and when two game balls enter the first branch area 410 together. Both of them can be prevented from flowing into the second branch induction flow path R2.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIGS. 12 to 20, when two game balls enter the first flow down device 300 as two stages before the game balls flow into the first branch area 410, two game balls Are sent to the special route hole 323 at almost the same timing and flow down to the fixed area hole 340 (see FIG. 5), so that the situation where two game balls enter the first branch area 410 together is If two game balls enter a single flow-down device 300, the situation occurs with a high probability.

  FIG. 27A is a partial top view of the second flowing-down device 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIIa in FIG. 24, and FIG. 27B is a second flowing-down device 400 along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. FIG. In FIG. 27A and FIG. 27B, a region corresponding to the second branch region 420 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b), the second branch region 420 is disposed at a position where the game ball that has passed through the second branch guide flow path R2 contacts, and performs a constant reciprocating swinging motion. The distribution operation device 421, the special area hole 422 through which the game balls distributed to the front side (lower side in FIG. 27A) by the distribution operation device 421 pass, and the rear side (see FIG. 27 (a) upper) the first delay preparation hole 423 through which the game ball is passed, and the prevention wall portion 424 that prevents the game ball distributed by the sorting operation device 421 from going to the opposite side. Prepare mainly.

  The distribution operation device 421 generates a movable plate 421a that is rotatably supported in the vicinity of the exit position of the first branch guide flow path R2, and a driving force that drives the movable plate 421a to generate a flange of the second flow down device 400. And a drive motor 421b fixed to a portion (not shown).

  The movable plate 421a is provided with a rotation shaft that is in contact with the right side of the prevention wall portion 424 and extends in the vertical direction at a position that is within the tolerance of the central axis of the second branch guide flow path R2, and the extending direction of the movable plate 421a is the second branch guide. A mode in which the head is swung by a predetermined angle (45 ° in the present embodiment) forward and backward (up and down in FIG. 27A) with reference to the state along the central axis of the flow path R2 (the state shown by the solid line in FIG. 27A). To reciprocate. The rotating operation is continued from the time when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (other than when the power is turned off, etc.) to the time when the power is turned off. (About 1 second).

  In the present embodiment, the movable plate 421a is disposed between the pair of reference straight lines L1 with a pair of reference straight lines L1 as a boundary between the rotation axis of the movable plate 421a and the front and rear side wall ends of the second branch guide flow path R2. The state in which the movable plate 421a is staying is referred to as the staying state of the movable plate 421a. This is referred to as a passage allowable state of the movable plate 421a.

  The special area hole 422 guides the passed game ball to the special guide channel R4. Therefore, the game ball whose direction is changed to the front side (the lower side in FIG. 27A) by the movable plate 421a falls vertically downward while flowing from the special induction channel R4 to the third branch induction channel R3, It flows into the third branch region 430.

  On the other hand, the special area hole 423 guides the passed game ball to the second delay guide flow path R6. Therefore, the game ball whose direction is changed to the back side (upper side in FIG. 27A) by the movable plate 421a passes through the third specific area hole 443 through the second delay guide flow path R6.

  FIG. 28 is a partial front view of the second flow down device 400 in the range XXVIII in FIG. 24. In FIG. 28, an area corresponding to the third branch area 430 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 28, the third branch region 430 is a region where a game ball that has passed through the third branch guide channel R3 enters from above, and is third from the exit position of the third branch guide channel R3. In the position which extended the central axis of branch induction | guidance | derivation flow path R3, the distribution protrusion 431 protruded toward the perpendicular upper direction is provided.

  The distribution protrusion 431 is formed in a mountain shape that is symmetrical with respect to a line extending from the central axis of the third branch guide flow path R3. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the third branch guide flow path R3 has a center vertically above the center of the sorting protrusion 431 at the start of contact with the sorting protrusion 431. Therefore, the probability of distributing the game balls to the left and right is halved (50% each).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 39, several modes in which the game balls B1 and B2 pass through the second branch area 420 and the third branch area 430 will be described in different cases. First, the case where the game ball B1a flows down without passing through the second branch area 420 and passes through the special area hole 422 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 29A is a partial front view of the second flow down device 400 in the range XXVIII in FIG. 24, and FIG. 29B is a portion of the second flow down device 400 in the direction of arrow XXIXb in FIG. 30 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow down device 400 in the range XXVIII in FIG. 24, and FIG. 30 (b) is a second view in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 30 (a). FIG. 31A is a partial top view of the flow-down device 400, and FIGS. 31A and 31B are partial front views of the second flow-down device 400 in a range XXVIII in FIG. 29 (a), 29 (b), 30 (a), 30 (b), 31 (a), and 31 (b), two pieces are packed together in the first branch region 410. A state in which the game balls B1a and B2a having flowed down are shown in a series of diagrams.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b), when the movable plate 421a is allowed to pass through the special area hole 422 side when the game ball B1a reaches the second branch area 420, The game ball B1a reaches the special area hole 422 and falls into the special area hole 422 as shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b) without particularly decelerating.

  Here, the flow of the game balls B1a and B2a to the left from the first branch region 410 is caused by the speed in the left direction starting from the first branch region 410. By setting the extended length and inclination angle) and the third branch guide flow path R3 (extended length and inclination angle), it is possible to aim at the positions of the game balls B1a and B2a flowing down.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31A, when the game ball B1a falls in the special area hole 422 without being decelerated by the movable plate 421a in the second branch area 420, the third branch induction flow path R3 is set. The flow path shape is designed so as to fall on the upper surface of the passed game ball B2a.

  For example, the game ball completely flows down from the second branch induction flow path R2 to the special area hole 422 in 2 seconds and falls from the special induction flow path R4 to the third branch area 430 in 1 second, while the third branch induction flow The game ball is configured to run down the road R3 in about 2.5 seconds.

  Here, when the game ball B2a moves from the state shown in FIG. 30 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 31 (a), the game ball B2a collides with the left side wall of the third branch guide flow path R3 to the left. Will be killed and fall free vertically. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (a), the game ball B2a is greatly reduced in the horizontal speed and the vertical speed. The game ball B1a and the game ball B2a can be stably brought into contact with each other by dropping the game ball B1a toward a position where the speed is greatly reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (a), after the game balls B1a and B2a are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, the game balls B1a and B2a continue to fall vertically downward, and then the lower game ball B2a is separated. Collide with 431. In this case, the proportion of the game balls B2a distributed to the distribution protrusions 431 is half left and right (50%). However, when the game balls B2a are distributed to either the left or right, they collide with the game balls B1a above them. By doing so, the game balls B1a are easily distributed to the left and right sides of the game balls B2a. Therefore, the two game balls B1a and B2a can be easily made to flow down one by one in both directions of the sorting protrusion 431.

  In the present embodiment, after the game balls B1a and B2a are distributed by the sorting protrusions 431, the second specific area switch 442a is compared with the period required for the game balls to pass through the first specific area switch 441a. The time taken for a game ball to pass through is greatly increased.

  Accordingly, by causing the two game balls B1a and B2a to flow down one by one in both directions of the sorting protrusion 431, the game balls B1a and B2a before the game balls B1a and B2a pass through the second specific area switch 442a. B2a can be passed through the first specific area switch 441a. Thereby, compared with the case where one game ball flows into the 3rd branch area | region 430, the probability that a player will win 16 round big hits (big hit with a profit larger than 7 round big hits) can be improved.

  The case where the game ball B1b temporarily stays in the second branch area 420 and passes through the special area hole 422 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  32 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow down device 400 in the range XXVIII in FIG. 24, and FIG. 32 (b) is a portion of the second flow down device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32 (a). FIG. 33A is a partial front view of the second flow down device 400 in the range XXVIII in FIG. 24, and FIG. 33B is a second view in the direction of the arrow XXXIIIb in FIG. 33A. FIG. 34A is a partial top view of the flow-down device 400, FIG. 34A is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII in FIG. 24, and FIG. 34B is an arrow XXXIVb in FIG. FIG. 35 is a partial top view of the second flow down device 400 in a direction view, and FIG. 35 is a partial front view of the second flow down device 400 in a range XXVIII in FIG.

  In FIGS. 32A, 32B, 33A, 33B, 34A, 34B, and 35, the first branch region 410 is gathered. A state in which two game balls B1b and B2b that have entered the ball flow down are illustrated in a series of diagrams.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), when the game ball B1b reaches the second branch region 420, the movable plate 421a stays in the middle of rotating toward the first delay preparation hole 423. In this case, the game ball B1b is prevented from advancing at the tip of the movable plate 421a, and temporarily (about 1 second) at the position shown in FIG. 32B (the exit position of the second branch guide flow path R2). After the stay, the movable plate 421a further flows and flows down toward the special region hole 422 as the passage is allowed (see FIG. 33B). Here, since the game ball B2b continues to flow while the game ball B1b stays, the game ball B1b reaches the special area hole 422 with a deviation from the timing at which the game balls B1b and B2b abut.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), at the timing when the game ball B1b starts to flow into the special induction channel R4, the game ball B2b has already reached the sorting protrusion 431, and sorting in the third branch region 430 has been executed. Yes.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 35, the game ball B1b reaches the sorting protrusion 431. Here, when the game balls B1b and B2b are distributed by the distribution protrusion 431, the game balls B1b and B2b do not interfere with each other, so the distribution ratio for each of the game balls B1b and B2b is half (50%). .

  In other words, since the player can get two chances to flow the game balls B1b and B2b into the first special area hole 441, when only one game ball enters the second flow down device 400, In comparison, it is possible to easily improve the profits obtained by the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 35, the first delay flow path R5 is disposed between the distribution protrusion 431 and the second specific region hole 442, so that the game ball B2b that has reached the distribution protrusion 431 first. Is distributed to the second specific area hole 442 side, while the game ball B2b flows down the first delay guide flow path R5 (about 2 seconds), the subsequent game ball B1b remains in the first specific area. Passes through the hole 441 (after 1 second from the state shown in FIG. 34A, that is, while the game ball B2b flows down the first delay guide flow path R5), the first specific area switch 441a A state of being detected (a state in which the player has won 16 rounds of jackpot) can be configured. Thereby, the profit which a player can obtain can be made easy to improve.

  With reference to FIGS. 36 to 39, a case where the game ball B1c does not stay in the second branch area 420 and passes through the first delay preparation hole 423 will be described.

  36 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow down device 400 in the range XXVIII in FIG. 24, and FIG. 36 (b) is a portion of the second flow down device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36 (a). FIG. 37A is a top view, FIG. 37A is a partial front view of the second flow down device 400 in the range XXVIII in FIG. 24, and FIG. 37B is a second view in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 38 and FIG. 39 are partial front views of the second falling device 400. FIG.

  36 (a), FIG. 36 (b), FIG. 37 (a), FIG. 37 (b), FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, two game balls B1c, which are packed together in the first branch region 410, The state in which B2c flows down is illustrated in a series of diagrams.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b), when the game ball B1c reaches the second branch region 420, the movable plate 421a is allowed to pass through the first delay preparation hole 423 side. In this case, the game ball B1c reaches the first delay preparation hole 423 and falls into the first delay preparation hole 423 as shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b) without particularly decelerating.

  The game ball B1c that has fallen into the first delay preparation hole 423 flows down the second delay guide flow path R6 toward the third specific region hole 441. Here, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the game balls B2c that have flowed down the third branch induction flow path R3 are distributed to the left and right by the distribution protrusions 431, but the first distance to the specific area is the longer side. The period during which the game ball B2c flows down through the delay guide flow path R5 (about 2 seconds) is shorter than the period during which the game ball B1c flows down through the second delay guide flow path R6 (about 5 seconds). .

  That is, before the game ball B1c flows down the second delay guide flow path R6 and passes through the third specific area switch 443a, regardless of whether the game ball B2c is distributed to the left or right by the distribution protrusion 431, The game ball B2c can flow into the first specific area switch 441a or the second specific area switch 442a. Thereby, the profit which a player can obtain can be made easy to improve.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the route distribution unit 320 and the distribution that can easily enter the game ball into the fixed region hole 340 by entering two game balls into the first flow down device 300 together. The inclined portion 330 is provided, and the player can easily obtain the profit by performing a game in which two game balls are put together in the movable ball-and-ball accessory device 190.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 and they enter the fixed area hole 340, one subsequent second flow down device 400 is provided. Compared to the case where the game ball of the game flows down, the structure is such that it is easy to obtain a big hit with a large profit. Thereby, the interest of a player can be improved.

  Next, a second flow down device 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the second delay induction flow path R6 is configured as a long and gentle flow path to increase the period until the game ball passes through the third specific area switch 443a. In the second embodiment, the second flow-down device 2400 projects for a predetermined period of time when a game ball enters each start winning opening 26 to 28 (see FIG. 2), and causes the game ball to fall into the specific area hole 2440. A time blocking plate 2411 for blocking is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  40 (a) is a front view of the second flow down device 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (c) are the second flow down along the XLb-XLb line of FIG. 40 (a). 4 is a cross-sectional view of device 2400. FIG. 40A, the illustration of the lid member disposed on the front side is omitted, and the inner surface of the specific area hole 2440 is illustrated, which is the same as in FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. 40B shows a state in which the time limit blocking plate 2411 is extended, and FIG. 40C shows a state in which the time limit stop plate 2411 is retracted.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the second flow down device 2400 includes a first branch guide channel R1, a timed branch region 2410 connected to the first branch guide channel R1, and a time limit of the timed branch region 2410. And an electromagnetic solenoid 2420 that changes the state of the blocking plate 2411.

  The timed branch region 2410 is a region where the game ball that has flowed down the first branch guide flow path R1 is sent to any specific region, and the specific region hole 2440 that is an entrance into which the game ball flows into the specific region is played. A time-blocking plate 2411 that prevents a ball from passing through in a timely manner and several (three in this embodiment) specific area holes 2440 through which game balls are sent are provided.

  The time limit blocking plate 2411 projects to the inside of the specific area hole 2440 (extends downward in FIG. 40 (b)) and sinks to the outside of the specific area hole (FIG. 40 (b) sinks upward). The immersion state can be configured by the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 2420, and the upper surface of the plate in the overhanging state is disposed at a position where it sinks downward from the entrance (upper surface) of each specific area hole 2440 by the radius of the game ball. .

  The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is energized and constitutes an extended state when the game ball passes through the fixed region switch 340a (see FIG. 5). The overhanging state is longer than the period (a maximum of 10 seconds in the present embodiment) required for the game ball to pass through the first branch induction flow path R1 and be placed inside each specific area hole 2440. It is maintained for a sufficiently long period (12 seconds). Thereby, the fall timing of the game ball falling from each specific area hole 2440 can be aligned.

  Each specific area hole 2440 is a hole having a size that allows one game ball to pass therethrough, and the first specific area hole 2441 in which the game ball that has flowed down to the first branch induction flow path R1 falls with equal probability. The second specific area hole 2442 and the third specific area hole 2443 are mainly provided.

  The first specific area hole 2441 is a hole for guiding a game ball to the first specific area for 16 round big hits, and a first specific area switch 2441a is disposed directly below. Thereby, a game ball passing through the first specific area through the first specific area hole 2441 is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

  The second specific area hole 2442 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the second specific area for 7 round big hits, and a second specific area switch 2442a is disposed directly below the second specific area hole 2442. Thereby, a game ball passing through the second specific area hole 2442 and passing through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a.

  The third specific area hole 2443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for three round big hits, and a third specific area switch 2443a is disposed directly below the third specific area hole 2443. Thereby, the game ball passing through the third specific area through the third specific area hole 2443 is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 40A, the distances H1 to H3 from the specific area holes 2441 to 2443 to the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 2442 to the second specific area switch 2442a is made longer than the distance (distance H1) from the first specific area hole 2441 to the first specific area switch 2441a. The distance (distance H3) from the third specific area hole 2443 to the third specific area switch 2443a is made longer than the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 2442 to the second specific area switch 2442a (distance) H1 <distance H2 <distance H3). Since the flow resistance of each specific area hole 2441 to 2443 is configured to be equal, a profit that a player can obtain when a plurality of game balls fall into each specific area hole 2441 to 2443 in a manner in which the fall timing is aligned Can be a maximum benefit in the specific area holes 2441 to 2443 through which the game ball passes. In the present embodiment, the flow resistance is equalized, but the present effect may be achieved by changing the flow resistance and equalizing the distances H1 to H3.

  With reference to FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, an example of the flow-down mode of the game balls B10, B11 when two game balls B10, B11 enter the second flow-down device 2400 together will be described.

  41 (a), 41 (b), and 42 are front views of the second flow down device 2400. FIG. 41 (a), 41 (b), and 42, the manner in which the two game balls B10 and B11 that have entered the third flow-down device 2400 flow down is shown in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (a), when the previous game ball B10 enters the third specific area hole 2443 with an equal probability, the game ball B10 becomes a lid, and the subsequent game ball B11 is in the third specific area. It is impossible to enter the hole 2443. This prevents two game balls from entering the same specific area hole 2440 (for example, the third specific area hole 2443) when two game balls enter the second flow down device 2440. Can do.

  As shown in FIG. 41B, the subsequent game ball B11 enters the second specific area hole 2442 or the first specific area hole 2441 with equal probability. In FIG. 41B, a case where the game ball B11 enters the first specific area hole 2441 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is de-energized and the time limit blocking plate 2411 is placed in the immersive state, the game balls B10 and B11 fall simultaneously. At this time, since the distance H1 is shorter than the distance H3, the game ball B10 passes through the third specific area switch 2443a after the game ball B11 is detected through the first specific area switch 2441a. Therefore, it is invalid that the game ball B10 has passed the third specific area switch 2443a, and the player can win 16 rounds of jackpot.

  Thereby, in this embodiment, when two game balls B10 and B11 are entered into the second flow down device 2440, both can be prevented from entering the same specific area holes 2441 to 2443, A game ball that has entered the specific area holes 2441 to 2443 that are more advantageous to the player can be effectively detected by the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a. Thereby, compared with the case where one game ball flows into the 2nd flow-down apparatus 2400, a player can acquire a jackpot with a higher profit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43 to FIG. 52, the first flow down device 3300 in the third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path of the game ball changes due to the game ball coming into contact with the sorting body 322 has been described, but the route distribution unit 3320 of the first flow down device 3300 in the third embodiment The game ball is configured to change the flow path of the game balls by causing the game balls to collide with each other. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  43 is a front view of the first flow down device 3300 in the third embodiment, FIG. 44 is a side view of the first flow down device 3300 in the direction of the arrow XLIV in FIG. 43, and FIG. It is a top view of the 1st flow down device 3300 in the arrow XLV direction view. In FIG. 43, the front side wall of the introduction passage 3310 and the front side wall of the route distribution unit 3320 are omitted for easy understanding (that is, the game ball is placed inside the introduction passage 3310 and the route distribution portion). The game ball flows down the inside of the dividing portion 3320, and the game ball is not dropped toward the front side (front side in FIG. 43).

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the first flow down device 3300 includes an introduction passage 3310 for guiding a game ball that has entered the big prize opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) to the route distribution unit 3320, and the introduction passage. It mainly includes a route distribution portion 3320 into which a game ball that has passed 3310 enters, a distribution inclined portion 330 having a protrusion 331, a fixed region hole 340, and a disengagement hole 350.

  The introduction passage 3310 is a passage region 3311 disposed in the center portion in a front view and a flow path that is formed to be inclined downward toward the branch region 3311 and flows down the game ball, and is connected to the branch region 3311. The upper channel 3312 is a channel that is formed so as to descend downward from the branch region 3311 in both the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and that allows the game ball to flow down. The lower channel is connected to the connection channels 3314 and 3315 at the left and right ends. A side channel 3313, a right connection channel 3314 extending from the right end of the lower channel 3313 to the back side without any left-right component, and a left side end of the lower channel 3313 Left side connecting flow path 3315 extending in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side from the left and right direction components, and upward on the left and right inner positions of the lower bottom plates of the respective connecting flow paths 3314 and 3315 A set is the protrusion 3316, mainly comprising.

  The branch region 3311 includes a partition wall portion 3311a that is a wall portion that allows a game ball sent from the upper flow path 3312 to flow into the lower flow path 3313 on the same left and right sides in a state where no game ball is accommodated.

  The partition wall portion 3311a is a position separated from the position where the bottom plate of the upper flow path 3312 is interrupted by one game ball (one game ball in the left-right direction), and extends the bottom plate of the lower flow path 3313 in the left-right direction. It is a wall part extended in the height below the diameter of a game ball toward the upper direction from the provided position.

  The function of the partition wall portion 3311a will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a) and 46 (b) are partial front views of the introduction passage 3310. FIG. 46 (a) and 46 (b), the flow of the game balls B20 and B21 when the game balls B20 and B21 enter together from one entrance of the introduction passage 3310 is illustrated in time series. Is done.

  When a game ball enters the introduction passage 3310 from the right side, it falls in the vertical direction by entering the branch region 3311 from the upper flow path 3312 and is restricted from moving leftward by the partition wall portion 3311a. Enter the road 3313.

  In other words, if one or two game balls flow down the introduction passage 3310, one game ball is divided into the left and right sides, the game ball flowing down the upper flow path 3312 from one of the left and right sides is branched region 3311. The ball is entered into the lower flow path 3313 in such a manner that it bounces back to the same side. The introduction passage 3310 has a symmetrical shape, which is the same even if a game ball enters from the left side.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46A, when two game balls B20 and B21 are gathered from the right side and flow down the introduction passage 3310, the previous game ball B20 enters the branch region 3311 from the upper flow path 3312. In the state of falling in the vertical direction, the subsequent game ball B21 can get over the previous game ball B20 before changing the direction left and right. Since the protrusion 3316 has a height equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball B21 gets over the protrusion 3316 and enters the lower flow path 3313 on the left side of the protrusion 3316.

  Therefore, when two game balls enter the introduction passage 3310, whether to enter the introduction passage 3310 one by one from the left and right sides, or two from the left and right sides, enter the introduction passage 3310 from the introduction passage 3310. A game ball can be entered into the route distribution unit 3320 in a manner of one each on the left and right.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. The game ball that has passed through the lower flow path 3313 falls downward along the extending direction of the connection flow paths 3314 and 3315 (the direction without the horizontal component). Each of the connecting flow paths 3314 and 3315 is configured such that the lower bottom plate (the lower plate in FIG. 43) is inclined downward toward the center. Therefore, the game balls sent from the lower flow path 3313 to the respective connection flow paths 3314 and 3315 are in a state where there is almost no speed in the left-right direction at the time of landing on the lower bottom plate of each connection flow path 3314 and 3315. Rolls to the left and right center according to the inclination.

  Thereafter, the game ball abuts on the protruding portion 3316 and decelerates, and then flows into the route distribution portion 3320. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball entering the route distribution unit 3320 from jumping out in the left-right direction, and to roll the game ball along the shape of the inner surface of the route distribution unit 3320. In addition, since the extending direction of each connection flow path 3314 and 3315 is different in the front-rear direction, the front-rear position of the game ball entering the route distribution unit 3320 is slightly shifted.

  Next, the route distribution unit 3320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. In the description of the route distribution unit 3320, FIGS. 43 to 45 are referred to as appropriate. 47A is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow down device 3300 along the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line in FIG. 43, and FIG. 47B shows the first flow down device 3300 along the XLVIIb-XLVIIb line in FIG. 47A. FIG. 48 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow down device 3300 along the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 47 (b).

  The route distribution unit 3320 includes a pair of guide rails 3321 for guiding the rolling of game balls that have entered from the introduction passage 3310, and a region in which the game balls can move at the left and right center positions of the guide rails 3321 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 47 (a) up and down direction), a special route hole 3323 configured as a hole through which a game ball can fall at the center position in the front-rear direction of the enlarged region 3322, and a terminal portion of each guide rail 3321 The normal route hole 3324 configured as a hole through which the game ball can fall and the normal ball hole 3324 that has passed through the normal route hole 3324 flow downward and fall to the rear end of the distribution inclined portion 330 A route guidance path 3326.

  The guide rail 3321 supports the game ball with two rails arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction and curves downward in a convex shape in a front view that regulates the flow path. Note that the pair of guide rails 3321 are rotationally symmetric with respect to the center point in the left-right direction when viewed from above, so that the guide rails 3321 for guiding the game balls flowing in from the left side will be described, and the opposite guide rails 3321 will be described. Is omitted.

  The guide rail 3321 includes a central rail portion 3321a extending along the curved shape of the bottom plate (the lower plate in FIG. 43) of the route distribution portion 3320 in the vicinity of the center position in the front-rear direction of the route distribution portion 3320, and the center thereof. And an auxiliary rail portion 3321b provided in parallel with the rail portion 3321a.

  The central rail portion 3321a and the auxiliary rail portion 3321b have the same protruding height in the cross-sectional shape (the protruding height toward the curved center side). The formation of the central rail portion 3321a is omitted at the central portion in the left-right direction corresponding to the special route hole 3323. In addition, the auxiliary rail portion 3321b is omitted from the position shifted from the left and right outwards from the portion where the central rail portion 3321a is omitted to the central portion, and the end position of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b (route distribution portion 3320). The normal route hole 3324 is drilled downward at a position where the left and right speeds of the game balls that have entered the ball and did not collide with other game balls are substantially eliminated. The central rail portion 3321a is also used in the pair of guide rails 3321.

  The enlarged region 3322 includes a special route hole 3323 in the lower portion (FIG. 47 (a), the rear side portion in the vertical direction in the drawing) of the center position in the front-rear direction (FIG. 47 (a) vertical direction). An inclined surface 3322a disposed at the front and rear positions of the hole 3323, and a curved receiving wall 3322b disposed as a wall curved in a convex shape toward the front and rear direction of the inclined surface 3322a.

  The inclined surface 3322a is connected to an end portion on the center side of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b (an end portion in a portion where the formation is omitted) and has a curved shape convex downward with the end portion of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b as an end point (see FIG. 48), and a curved side wall 3322a1. The inclined surface 3322a is configured in such a manner that it gradually rises and inclines from the curved side wall 3322a1 toward the curved receiving wall 3322b.

  The special route hole 3323 is a hole through which a game ball is dropped near the center position of the front end portion of the distribution inclined portion 330 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the probability that the game ball that has dropped through the special route hole 3323 enters the determined area hole 340 is higher than the game ball that has dropped through the normal route hole 3324.

  The normal route hole 3324 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the normal route guide path 3326 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the game ball that has fallen through the normal route hole 3324 passes through the normal route guide path 3326 and falls near the rear end of the distribution inclined portion 330 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the probability that the game ball that has fallen through the normal route hole 3324 will enter the determined region hole 340 is lower than the game ball that has fallen through the special route hole 3323.

  With reference to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the flow-down mode of the game ball B22 when one game ball B22 flows into the route distribution unit 3320 will be described. 49 (a), FIG. 49 (b), FIG. 50 (a), and FIG. 50 (b) are cross-sectional views of the route distribution unit 3320 along the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line in FIG. 49 (a), 49 (b), 50 (a), and 50 (b), the manner in which the game ball B22 flows down the route distribution unit 3320 is illustrated in time series. The

  As shown in FIG. 49 (a), the game ball B22 decelerated by flowing down the left connection channel 3315 and contacting the protrusion 3316 is supported by the guide rail 3321 and rolls in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (b), when the game ball B22 reaches the enlarged region 3322, the state shifts from a state in which the game ball B22 is supported by the auxiliary rail portion 3321b to a state in which the curved side wall 3322a1 is supported.

  In this state, the curved side wall 3322a1 sinks downward relative to the central rail portion 3321a, so that the center of gravity of the game ball B22 moves toward the inclined surface 3322a (the game ball B22 leans against the inclined surface 3322a).

  As shown in FIG. 50A, the game ball B22 passes over the special route hole 3323 while leaning against the inclined surface 3322a. In this state, the speed of the game ball B22 in the left-right direction is large, so it is unlikely that the game ball B22 will fall into the special route hole 3323. It is possible to prevent the game ball B22 from colliding with the opening end of the special route hole 3323 and decelerating.

  As shown in FIG. 50B, the game ball B22 that has passed over the special route hole 3323 reaches the rightmost normal route hole 3323 and falls. Therefore, when one game ball B22 enters the route distribution unit 3320, the game ball B22 is preferentially entered into the normal route hole 3324. Therefore, whether or not the game ball B22 passes through the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 45) is left to randomness when it collides with the protrusion 331 of the distribution inclined portion 330 and randomly changes its direction and flows down. It is done.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, the flow-down mode of the game balls B23, B24 when the two game balls B23, B24 flow into the route distribution unit 3320 will be described. 51 (a), 51 (b), 52 (a), and 52 (b) are cross-sectional views of the route distribution unit 3320 along the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 51 (a), FIG.51 (b), FIG.52 (a), and FIG.52 (b), the flow aspect of the game balls B23 and B24 which flow down the route distribution part 3320 is along a time series. Illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, the game balls B23 and B24, which are decelerated by flowing down the right connection channel 3314 and the left connection channel 3315 and coming into contact with the protrusion 3316, are supported by the guide rail 3321 and left and right. Roll in the direction.

  Here, since the pair of guide rails 3321 also serves as the central rail portion 3321a (shared), as shown in FIG. 51B, when the game balls B23 and B24 flow into the enlarged region 3322, the game balls B23 and B24 Collide.

  Since the game balls B23, B24 are displaced in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 51A) and flow down, a speed in the front-rear direction is generated by the collision. That is, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the game balls B23 and B24 flow down in the direction approaching the curved side wall 3322a1 and collide with the curved side wall 3322a1.

  Since the curved side wall 3322a1 is formed in a curved shape that is convex in the front-rear direction, a load is applied to the game balls B23, B24 in a direction that pushes them back in the left-right direction. be killed.

  Therefore, neither of the game balls B23 and B24 can reach the normal route hole 3324. As shown in FIG. 52 (b), the game balls B23 and B24 roll around the enlarged region 3322 and become special after the speed is reduced. Drops into the route hole 3323.

  Therefore, when two game balls B23 and B24 enter the route distribution unit 3320, the game balls B23 and B24 are preferentially inserted into the special route hole 3323. Therefore, the probability that both of the game balls B23 and B24 pass through the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 45) is greatly improved.

  That is, when two game balls B23 and B24 enter the route distribution unit 3320, the game ball is compared to when one game ball B22 enters the route distribution unit 3320. The probability of passing through the fixed region hole 340 can be drastically improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter, the game balls collide with each other in the route distribution unit 3320 of the first flow down device 3300, so that the game balls become the special route holes 3323. The probability of flowing into can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53 to FIG. 55, the first flow down device 4300 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the game ball abuts on the sorting body 322 and the flow path of the game ball changes depending on whether or not the sorting body 322 is balanced depending on the weight of the game ball. The route distribution unit 4320 of the first flow down device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is configured in such a manner that the route after the game ball is injected is changed depending on how many game balls stay on the left side of the injection solenoid 4323. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 53A and 53B are partial front views of the first flow down device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 53A shows a state in which the injection solenoid 4323 is retracted, and FIG. 53B shows a state in which the injection solenoid 4323 is energized and overhangs.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), the first flow-down device 4300 receives an introduction passage 310 (the first projecting portion 311 is omitted) and a game ball sent from the introduction passage 310. The route distribution part 4320 to distribute, the distribution inclination part 330, the fixed area | region hole 340, and the slipping hole 350 (refer FIG. 5) are mainly provided.

  The route distribution unit 4320 has a route distribution unit guide path 4321 that causes the game ball that has entered to flow down and guides it to the drop hole 4321a, and a stay that extends in a direction that is inclined downward to the right below the drop hole 4321a. A flow path 4322 and an injection solenoid 4323 fixed to the first flow down device 4300 so that the movable part can be pulled inward of the stay flow path 4322 along the extending direction of the stay flow path 4322. The special route hole 4324 for flowing the game ball down to the special route guide path 325 (left side guide path 325a) of the first embodiment and the normal route hole for flowing down the game ball to the normal route guide path 326 (see FIG. 5). 4325.

  The stay channel 4322 is formed such that the distance from the position where the game ball falling through the drop hole 4321a lands to the injection solenoid 4323 in the retracted state is longer than one game ball. As a result, when two game balls B31 and B32 (see FIG. 55A) enter the first flow-down device 4300, the retention flow path 4322 on the left side of the injection solenoid 4323 has its retention flow path. Two game balls B31 and B32 can be arranged along the extending direction of 4322.

  The injection solenoid 4323 operates when the game ball passes through the start winning ports 26, 27, and 28 (see FIG. 2). In other words, the game ball that has entered the large winning port switch 190b (see FIG. 2) that is opened when the game ball has passed through the start winning ports 26, 27, and 28 reaches the stay channel 4322. The retracted state is maintained for a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds according to the present embodiment), and then the state is vigorously changed so that the projecting state is obtained (the movable part is projected). As a result, the game ball is ejected toward the left of the stay channel 4322.

  54A and 54B are partial front views of the first flow down device 4300. FIG. 54A shows a state in which the game ball B30 has reached the stay channel 4322 with the injection solenoid 4323 retracted, and in FIG. 54B, the injection solenoid 4323 is energized to move the movable part. A state in which the overhangs is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when one game ball B30 enters the first flow down device 4300, one game ball B30 reaches the left of the injection solenoid 4323 (injection solenoid). One game ball B30 leans on 4323).

  When the injection solenoid 4323 changes to the overhanging state in this state, the game ball B30 jumps out toward the normal route hole 4325, and the game ball B30 falls into the normal route hole 4325 (to the game ball B30 for the normal route). The injection solenoid 4323 is projected so as to adjust the initial speed to reach the hole 4325).

  Since the game ball that has fallen into the normal route hole 4325 is guided to the normal route guide path 326 (see FIG. 5), when one game ball B30 enters the first flow down device 4300, as described above. In addition, whether or not the game ball B30 enters the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 5) is left to randomness when the game ball B30 flows down the sorting inclined portion 330 (see FIG. 5). On the other hand, when two game balls enter the first flow down device 4300, the situation changes.

  FIGS. 55A and 55B are partial front views of the first flow down device 4300. FIG. FIG. 55A shows a state in which two game balls B31 and B32 have reached the stay channel 4322 with the injection solenoid 4323 retracted, and FIG. 55B shows an injection solenoid 4323. A state in which the movable portion is energized and the movable portion protrudes is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when two game balls B31 and B32 are inserted into the first flow down device 4300, the left side of the injection solenoid 4323 in the retracted state is the position of the injection solenoid 4323. Two game balls B31 and B32 are arranged along the extending direction (along the extending direction of the stay channel 4322).

  When the injection solenoid 4323 is in an overhanging state with two game balls B31 and B32 arranged side by side as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the target to be pushed out is a game as compared to the case where there is one game ball. Since the two balls are heavy, the game balls B31 and B32 do not reach the normal route hole 4325, and the two game balls B31 and B32 fall into the special route hole 4324 in front thereof.

  Since the game ball that has fallen into the special route hole 4324 is guided to the special route guide path 325, when two game balls B31 and B32 enter the first flow down device 4300, the determination is made as described above. A situation is formed in which the game balls B31 and B32 can easily enter the area hole 340 (see FIG. 5).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the number of game balls entering the first flow-down device 4300 is different, the distance by which the electrically operated device (injection solenoid 4323) that operates in a manner that moves the game ball moves the game ball. By changing the (flying distance), it is possible to change the subsequent flow paths of the game balls.

  According to this, as in the case where two game balls are brought into contact with the movable member (for example, the distributing body 322 (see FIG. 5) in the second embodiment) from both sides in the moving direction to bring the movable member into a balanced state. Since it is not necessary to divide the two game balls into the left and right sides of the allocating body 322, the structure of the route allocating portion guiding path 4321 is simplified (a hole structure having a size through which only one game sphere passes). Can do.

  Further, since the operation and accuracy of the operation of the injection solenoid 4323 are high, an operation failure such as entering the special route hole 4324 even though only one game ball enters the stay channel 4322 occurs. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, the second flow down device 5400 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the abutting wall 411 is configured as a fixed portion, and when two game balls enter the first branch region 410, one game ball enters the third branch guide flow path R3. As described above, the first branch region 5410 of the second flow down device 5400 according to the fifth embodiment includes the operation wall 5411 that continuously operates at a predetermined interval from the time of turning on the power. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 56 is a partial front view of the second flow down device 5400 in the fifth embodiment in the range corresponding to the range XXV in FIG. 24. As shown in FIG. 56, the first branch region 5410 of the second flow down device 5400 has a rotary shaft at the bottom plate portion of the second branch guide flow path R2, and rotates and reciprocates at predetermined intervals from the time of turning on the power. A character-shaped operation wall 5411 is provided.

  The operation wall 5411 is in an inclined state (shown by a solid line in FIG. 56) for guiding a game ball reached from above to the right by an electric operation of a drive motor (not shown), and a contact wall 411 in the first embodiment. It reciprocates at a predetermined interval between a vertical state (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 56) in which the wall portion extends vertically upward at a position similar to (see FIG. 24).

  Therefore, the flow-down mode of the game balls when two game balls enter the first branch region 5410 in the vertical state is the same as that described above in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is possible to configure a case where two game balls enter the first branch area 5410 in the inclined state. Hereinafter, the flow-down mode will be described.

  FIG. 57A to FIG. 57C are partial front views of the second flow down device 5400 in a range corresponding to the range XXV in FIG. 57 (a) to 57 (c), the inclined state of the operation wall 5411 is illustrated, and the flow-down modes of the two game balls B40, B41 flowing into the first branch region 5410 are illustrated in time series. The

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a) to FIG. 57 (c), when the operation wall 5411 is in an inclined state, the gap between the extended tip and the second branch guide flow path R2 is less than the diameter of the game ball. The position and cross-sectional shape of the rotation axis are determined. Therefore, in the inclined state, the two game balls B40 and B41 are both guided to the third branch guide flow path R3.

  Accordingly, the two game balls B40 and B41 can be reliably guided to the third branch area 430 (see FIG. 31), and the two game balls B40 and B41 are distributed one by one to the left and right by the sorting protrusion 431. Therefore, the game ball B40 or the game ball B41 can be easily dropped into the first specific area hole 441. This makes it easier for the player to obtain the 16 round jackpot obtained by passing the game ball through the first specific area switch 441a (see FIG. 31). When the game balls B40 and B41 enter the first branch area, the player can watch the flow of the game balls with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when two game balls enter the first branch region 5410 when the operation wall 5411 is in the vertical state, the game balls are moved one by one to the second branch induction channel as described above in the first embodiment. The flow direction is divided into R2 and the third branch induction flow path R3 (see FIG. 26), and the flow direction is slightly disadvantageous compared to when the operation wall 5411 is in an inclined state. The game ball flowing down R2 is not stopped on the movable plate 421a (see FIG. 27), and the game ball flowing down the second branch induction flow path R2 passes through the special induction flow path R4. It merges into the third branch guide channel R3 (see FIGS. 29 to 31). That is, two game balls B40, B41 are moved left and right by the distribution protrusion 431 in the same manner as when two game balls B40, B41 enter the first branch area 5410 when the operation wall 5411 is inclined. Since it can be easily distributed one by one, the game ball B40 or the game ball B41 can be easily dropped into the first specific area hole 441. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to obtain a 16 round jackpot obtained by passing the game ball through the first specific area switch 441a (see FIG. 31).

  As a result, depending on the state of the motion member (the motion wall 5411, the movable plate 421a (see FIG. 27)), the locations where the flow-down mode of the game ball varies are the first branch region 5410 and the second branch region 420 (see FIG. 24). It can be configured in multiple places. When two game balls enter the first branch area 5410 when the movable wall 5411 is in an inclined state, the player can watch the subsequent flow of the game balls with peace of mind. On the other hand, when two game balls enter the first branch area 5410 when the movable wall 5411 is in the vertical state, the player pays attention to the subsequent flow of the game balls in the second branch area 420. It will be.

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the game balls that flow down, increase the variations in the flow of game balls, and provide fresh games.

  In the present embodiment, the period during which the operation wall 5411 maintains the inclined state is configured to be shorter than the period during which the operation wall 5411 maintains the vertical state, thereby preventing the player from becoming too advantageous to the player. Yes. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation wall 5411 maintains the vertical state for the first period (for example, 4 seconds), then maintains the inclined state for the second period (for example, 1 second), and then the vertical state is maintained. The state change is repeated from the time of power-on in such a manner that only the first period is maintained. That is, when a game ball enters the first branch area, the probability that the motion wall 5411 is inclined can be set to a predetermined ratio (20%), and two game balls B40 and B41 can be divided into two. The probability of occurrence of a situation where both are guided to the third branch guide flow path R3 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 82, the second flow down device 6400 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, when a plurality of game balls flow into the timed branch area 2410 and fall into the specific area hole 2440, there is a difference between the profit that can be expected from the game ball that falls first and the profit that can be expected from the game ball that falls later. In the sixth embodiment, the second flow down device 6400 includes the profit increasing device 6450 that makes the profit expected from the game ball falling later more than the profit expected from the game ball falling earlier. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  58 is a front view of the second flow down device 6400 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 59 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device 6400 along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, and FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view of the second falling device 6400 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. In FIG. 58, the lid member disposed on the front side is not shown, and the inner surface of the specific region hole 6440 is partially shown.

  As shown in FIG. 58, FIG. 59 (a) and FIG. 59 (b), the second flow down device 6400 includes a first branch guide channel R1 and a timed branch region connected to the first branch guide channel R1. 6410, a specific area hole 6440 in which a game ball flowing down the timed branch area 6410 falls, a profit increasing device 6450 operated by a game ball that has fallen into the specific area hole 6440 (falling and bounced), and a game It mainly includes a slide delay device 6460 that is operated by a game ball in the process of the ball falling into the specific area hole 6440 and a restriction device 6470 that partitions the inside of the timed branch region 6410 by the operation and restricts the flow path of the game ball.

  The timed branch region 6410 is a region where the game ball that has flowed down the first branch guide channel R1 is sent to any specific region, and the game ball flows down toward the specific region hole 6440 by rolling on the upper surface. A plate-shaped rolling plate 6412 that can be configured, a time blocking plate 2411 that prevents the game ball from passing through a specific area hole 6440 that is an inlet through which the game ball flows into the specific area, and a time limit thereof And an electromagnetic solenoid 2420 that changes the state of the blocking plate 2411. Unlike the second embodiment, the time limit blocking plate 2411 is disposed obliquely according to the shape of the specific area hole 6440.

  The rolling plate 6412 includes a recessed portion 6412a that is recessed toward the rear in a shape that includes the movement locus of the moving blocking surface 6451d of the profit increasing device 6450 when viewed from above, and is on the front side (front side in FIG. 58). And a plurality of protrusions are disposed on the upper surface thereof and are assembled so as to cover a slide delay device 6460 disposed below the protrusions.

  The specific area hole 6440 mainly includes a plurality of (three in this embodiment) specific area holes, that is, a first specific area hole 6441, a second specific area hole 6442, and a third specific area hole 6443, and each specific area hole 6440 The region holes 6441 to 6443 are formed in a shape that operably accommodates the profit increasing device 6450 at the inlet opening 6440i that receives the game ball.

  In the present embodiment, the profit increasing device 6450 is configured as a device that rotates around a rotation axis extending to the left and right, so that it does not interfere with the profit increasing device 6450 when the profit increasing device 6450 rotates. The wall part which comprises the specific area | region hole 6440 is arrange | positioned in the direction.

  The specific area hole 6440 is a hole that is large enough to allow one game ball to pass through. When a single game ball flows down to the first branch guide flow path R1, the game ball has an equal probability. The first specific area hole 6441 that falls, the second specific area hole 6442, and the third specific area hole 6443 are mainly provided.

  The first specific area hole 6441 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the first specific area for 16 round big hits, the upper and lower flow paths extending in the vertical direction from the entrance opening, and the game ball at the lower end of the flow path. And a first specific area switch 2441a is disposed inside the oblique flow path. Thereby, a game ball passing through the first specific area through the first specific area hole 6441 is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

  It should be noted that the time limit blocking plate 2411 projects in an overhanging state above the first specific area switch 2441a (see FIG. 60), and prevents the game ball from flowing down the first specific area hole 6441 in the overhanging state. .

  The second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443 have the same internal shape as the first specific area hole 6441, and the second specific area hole 6442 has a game ball in the second specific area for 7 round big hits. The third specific area hole 6443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for 3 round big hits.

  That is, the second specific area switch 2442a is disposed inside the oblique flow path of the second specific area hole 6442, and the third specific area switch 2443a is disposed inside the oblique flow path of the third specific area hole 6443. .

  Thereby, a game ball passing through the second specific area through the second specific area hole 6442 is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a and passes through the third specific area through the third specific area hole 6443. The game ball to be detected is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 60, distances H1 to H3 from the specific area holes 6441 to 6443 to the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, compared to the distance (distance H1) from the inlet of the oblique flow path of the first specific area hole 6441 to the first specific area switch 2441a, the second specific area switch from the entrance of the oblique flow path of the second specific area hole 6442 The distance (distance H2) to 2442a is increased, and the diagonal of the third specific area hole 6443 is compared with the distance (distance H2) from the inlet of the oblique flow path of the second specific area hole 6442 to the second specific area switch 2442a. The distance (distance H3) from the inlet of the flow path to the third specific area switch 2443a is increased (distance H1 <distance H2 <distance H3).

  Thereby, when the game balls fall from the entrances of the oblique flow paths of the specific area holes 6441 to 6443 at the same timing, the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a having the shorter distances H1 to H3 are effectively detected. The player can win a jackpot with a larger number of rounds.

  The slide delay device 6460 is a member that is operatively disposed below the rolling plate 6412 and projects to the inside of the second specific region hole 6442 and the inside of the third special region hole 6443, and below the rolling plate 6412. A long plate-shaped rotating plate 6461 that rotates about a fixed axis in FIG. 6 and is connected at one end of the rotating plate 6461 in the longitudinal direction (to the right in FIG. 59A) and slides in the front-rear direction. A right slide plate 6462R that is operably supported, a left slide plate 6462L that is connected to the other end in the longitudinal direction of the rotating plate 6461 and is slidably supported in the front-rear direction, and each of the slide plates 6462R, Urging springs 6463R and 6463L for urging 6462L forward are mainly provided.

  In the state shown in FIG. 59A (a state in which no load is generated by an external force), the slide delay device 6460 is in a balanced state. In this balanced state, the inward allowances of the specific area holes 6442 and 6443 of the right slide plate 6462R and the left slide plate 6462L are substantially the same.

  When the game ball starts to fall into the specific area holes 6442 and 6443 from this balanced state, a load is applied from the game ball to the right slide plate 6462R or the left slide plate 6462L, and the slide plates 6462R and 6462L slide and move in the front-rear direction. To do. At this time, since the slide plates 6462R and 6462L are connected to both ends of the rotating plate 6461, the slide plates 6462R and 6462L operate in the reverse direction. That is, when one slide plate (for example, the right slide plate 6462R) slides backward, the other slide plate (for example, the left slide plate 6462L) slides forward.

  The slide plates 6462R and 6462L are formed to have the same length in the longitudinal direction, but have different tip shapes. That is, the right slide plate 6462R is formed in a shape that slopes downward as the front end moves toward the front side, and the left slide plate 6462L is formed in a shape that has a flat front end (extends horizontally).

  Therefore, for example, when a game ball flows into the second specific region hole 6442 and the third specific region hole 6443 at the same time, the left slide plate 6462L preferentially slides backward (the right slide plate 6462R projects forward). Therefore, the fall of the game ball to the third specific area hole 6443 is delayed. In addition, the effect in that case is later mentioned in FIGS. 70-72.

  Each biasing spring 6463R, 6463L is formed of the same spring member, and has a natural length in a balanced state. In the present embodiment, an elastic spring (loose spring) in which each slide plate 6462R, 6462L has a period of 1 second or longer from the retracted state to the balanced state due to the action of the game ball is an urging spring 6463R. , 6463L.

  The profit increasing device 6450 mainly includes a first rotating member 6451 disposed inward of the first specific region hole 6441 and a second rotating member 6452 disposed inward of the second specific region hole 6442. . Next, a detailed configuration of the profit increasing device 6450 will be described.

  FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device 6400 along the line LX-LX in FIG. As shown in FIG. 60, the first rotating member 6451 is composed of a main body member 6451a having a width dimension in the axial direction (perpendicular to FIG. 60) substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball and formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. A recessed portion 6451b that is recessed in a substantially fan shape at a substantially 1/4 circumferential portion of the member 6451a, a transmission portion 6451c that is formed to protrude along the circumferential surface at an obliquely upper front portion of the main body member 6451a, and its transmission portion 6045c, and a movable blocking surface 6451d formed in a planar shape extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the main body member 6451a on the left side of FIG. By being accommodated in the part 6451b, it is configured in a mode (center of gravity balance) that rotates backward to the transmission state (see FIG. 65) depending on the weight of the game ball.

  The main body member 6451a is formed so that the center of the circle forming the outer periphery coincides with the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G1 of the first rotation member 6451 is provided in the lower part on the front side of the rotation axis in the standby state illustrated in FIG. Thereby, in the standby state, when the main body member 6451a leans forward, the posture is stabilized in the standby state shown in FIG. 60 by being supported by the lid member disposed on the front side.

  The recessed portion 6451b includes an upper and lower side surface VS1 extending along the vertical direction (vertical direction) and a front and rear side surface HS1 extending along the front and rear direction (horizontal direction) in the standby state shown in FIG.

  The upper and lower side surfaces VS1 are disposed above the rotation axis of the first rotating member 6451, and the distance V1 between the third specific region hole 6443 and the side surface on the back side is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball. Is done.

  Thereby, when the game ball starts to fall into the third specific area hole 6443, the right slide plate 6462R can be loaded through the game ball using the weight of the game ball. In addition, after the game ball is accommodated in the recessed portion 6451b and the first rotating member 6451 starts to rotate backward, the distance between the upper and lower side surfaces VS1 and the back side surface of the third specific region hole 6443 is a distance. By narrowing from V1 (that is, smaller than the diameter of the game ball), another game ball falls into the third specific area hole 6443, or the game ball already accommodated in the recessed portion 6451b jumps back. Can be prevented.

  The transmission portion 6451c includes an arc side surface RS that is recessed in the shape of a circular arc in the vicinity of the rear end portion and extends in the left-right direction, and the transmission state is increased as the arc side surface RS moves to the left (backward direction in FIG. 60). In this manner, it is formed so as to be inclined downward.

  The radius of curvature of the arc side surface RS1 is equivalent to the radius of curvature of the game ball. Thereby, when a game ball is arranged on the arc side surface RS1, the game ball can be supported at multiple points, and the effect of the arc side surface RS1 guiding the game ball can be improved.

  The movement blocking surface 6451d is formed below a straight line extending along the surface (the side surface at the upper end in FIG. 66) on which the arc side surface RS1 is formed. Thereby, in the transmission state (see FIG. 65), the moving blocking surface 6451d is disposed below the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412 on which the game ball rolls, so that the gaming ball and the moving blocking surface 6451d are in the transmission state. The contact can be prevented.

  In addition, the movement blocking surface 6451d is configured in such a manner that when the restriction device 6470 is in the post-operation state in the standby state of the first rotating member 6451, the gap with the restriction device 6470 is equal to or less than the size of the game ball. Composed.

  In the standby state, the movement blocking surface 6451d is in contact with the rear side surface of the transmission portion 6452c of the second rotating member 6452 in the standby state (see FIG. 59B).

  FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device 6400 along the line LXI-LXI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 61, the second rotating member 6452 has the same cross-sectional shape as the first rotating member 6451 except that there is no portion corresponding to the moving blocking surface 6451d. That is, the second rotating member 6452 has a main body member 6452a having a substantially cylindrical shape in which the width dimension in the axial direction (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 61) is substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, and substantially 1 of the main body member 6452a. 61 mainly includes a recessed portion 6452b that is recessed in a substantially fan shape at the circumferential portion, and a transmission portion 6452c that is formed to project along the circumferential surface at an obliquely front upper portion of the main body member 6452a. When the game ball is accommodated in the recessed portion 6452b in the standby state shown, the game ball is configured in a mode (center of gravity balance) that rotates backward to the transmission state (see FIG. 66) due to the weight of the game ball.

  Similar to the main body member 6451a of the first rotating member 6451, the main body member 6452a is formed such that the center of the circle forming the outer periphery coincides with the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G2 of the second rotating member 6452 is illustrated in FIG. In the standby state, it is provided at the lower part on the front side of the rotating shaft. In the standby state, when the main body member 6452a leans forward, the posture is stabilized in the standby state shown in FIG. 61 by being supported by the lid member disposed on the front side.

  The recessed portion 6452b includes an upper and lower side surface VS2 and a front and rear side surface HS2, similarly to the recessed portion 6451b of the first rotating member 6451.

  The upper and lower side surfaces VS2 are arranged above the rotation axis of the second rotation member 6442, and the distance V2 between the second specific region hole 6442 and the side surface on the back side is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball. Is done.

  As a result, when the game ball starts to fall into the second specific area hole 6442, a load can be applied to the left slide plate 6462L through the game ball using the weight of the game ball. In addition, after the game ball is accommodated in the recessed portion 6452b and the second rotation member 6452 starts to rotate backward, the distance between the upper and lower side surfaces VS and the rear side surface of the second specific area hole 6442 is a distance. By narrowing from V2 (that is, smaller than the diameter of the game ball), another game ball falls into the second specific area hole 6442, or the game ball already accommodated in the recessed portion 6452b jumps back. Can be prevented.

  Similar to the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451, the transmission portion 6452c includes an arc side surface RS2 that is recessed in a circular arc shape in the vicinity of the rear end portion and extends in the left-right direction, and the arc side surface RS2 is on the left side. As it goes to (the depth direction in FIG. 61), it is formed so as to incline in a manner of inclining downward in the transmission state.

  Further, the transmission unit 6452c is configured in such a manner that the right end thereof interferes with the movement blocking surface 6451d in the movement locus (see FIG. 59B). For this reason, when the second rotating member 6452 rotates backward, the transmission portion 6452c pushes the movable blocking surface 6451d, and the first rotating member 6452 also rotates backward (FIGS. 64A and 64). (See (b)).

  The radius of curvature of the arc side surface RS2 is equal to the radius of curvature of the game ball. Thereby, when a game ball is arranged on the arc side surface RS2, the game ball can be supported at multiple points, and the effect of the arc side surface RS2 guiding the game ball can be improved.

  Next, the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 (a), 62 (b), and 63. FIG. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the second flowing-down device 6400 along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, and FIG. 62B is a drawing of the second flowing-down device 6400 along the line LXIIb-LXIIb in FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device 6400 along the line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 62 (a), 62 (b) and 63, the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 is illustrated, and in FIG. 63, the game ball accommodated in the recessed portion 6451b is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 (a), 62 (b), and 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 after the first rotating member 6451 rotates backward with the weight of the game ball, the transmitting portion 6451c The rear end is brought into contact with the rear side surface of the inlet opening 6440i to stop the rotation in the backward rotation direction (the rear side surface of the inlet opening 6440i functions as a detent). Also, as shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state, the game ball remains on the upper surface of the time limit blocking plate 2411. In this state, the game ball and the front and rear side surfaces HS1 are in contact with each other in the rotation direction of the first rotation member 6451. Therefore, the first rotating member 6451 is prevented from moving forward. Thereby, the attitude | position of the 1st rotation member 6451 is stabilized in a transmission state.

  Note that the game ball riding on the time blocking plate 2411 is maintained on the time blocking plate 2411 until the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is actuated and the game ball is dropped. Therefore, depending on the operation control of the electromagnetic solenoid 2420, The maintenance period can be controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451, the inlet opening 6440i of the third specific area hole 6443 is blocked by the transmission part 6451c, and other game balls are in the third specific area hole 6443. Can be prevented from falling.

  Since the transmission portion 6451c is disposed below the front side end portion (left end portion in FIG. 63) of the rolling plate 6412 in the transmission state, the rolling portion 6412 rolls to form the third specific region hole 6443. The game ball reaching the entrance opening 6440i can be smoothly placed on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6451c.

  As described above, the transmission unit 6451c is configured in such a manner that it descends downward toward the left side (the rear side in FIG. 63) in the transmission state, so that the game ball riding on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6451c flows down to the left. be able to. For example, when the game ball rides on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6451c in the state of FIG. 62A, the game ball is directed toward the second specific area hole 6442 along the inclination of the transmission portion 6451c (FIG. 62A). (To the left) can be rolled.

  Therefore, the transmission part 6451c can prevent the plurality of game balls from flowing down to the third specific area hole 6443 and the flow direction of the game balls flowing down toward the third specific area hole 6443 Can be switched in the flow-down direction toward the second specific region hole 6442 (or the first specific region hole 6441), which has a higher expected profit than the third specific region hole 6443.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451, the moving blocking surface 6451d sinks below the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412, so that the game ball does not come into contact with the moving blocking surface 6451d. The game ball can freely move in the left-right direction above the recessed portion 6412a.

  From the state shown in FIG. 63, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is activated and the time limit blocking plate 2411 is in an immersive state (a state in which the third specific basin hole 6443 is drawn outward), the game ball falls and the first rotating member 6451 Since the load for stopping the forward rotation operation is released, the first rotating member 6451 performs the forward rotation operation and returns to the standby state (see FIG. 60).

  Next, the transmission state of the second rotating member 6451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64A is a cross-sectional view of the second flowing-down device 6400 along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, and FIG. 64B is a drawing of the second flowing-down device 6400 along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device 6400 taken along line LXV-LXV in FIG. 64A, and FIG. 66 is a second flow down device taken along line LXVI-LXVI in FIG. FIG. FIGS. 64 to 66 show the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 and the second rotating member 6452, and FIG. 65 shows the game ball accommodated in the recessed portion 6452b.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, in the transmission state after the second rotation member 6452 is rotated backward by the weight of the game ball, the rear end portion of the transmission portion 6452c hits the side surface on the back side of the inlet opening 6440i. The contact prevents rotation in the backward direction (the side surface on the back side of the inlet opening 6440i functions as a detent). In addition, as shown in FIG. 65, in the transmission state, the game ball remains on the upper surface of the time limit blocking plate 2411. In this state, the game ball and the front and rear side surface HS2 are in contact with each other in the rotation direction of the second rotation member 6452. Therefore, the second rotating member 6452 is prevented from moving forward. Accordingly, the posture of the second rotating member 6452 is stabilized in the transmission state.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the first rotating member 6451 also rotates backward based on the backward rotation of the second rotating member 6452. Here, the game ball is not accommodated in the recessed portion 6451b of the first rotating member 6451, but the rear end portion of the transmitting portion 6452c of the second rotating member 6451 is on the front side of the moving blocking surface 6451d of the first rotating member 6451. (See FIG. 64 (b)), the first rotating member 6451 also rotates backward based on the backward rotation operation of the second rotating member 6452, and the forward rotation operation of the first rotating member 6451 is prevented. The Accordingly, based on the fact that the second rotating member 6452 is in the transmitting state, the first rotating member 6451 is also in the transmitting state.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the transmission state of the second rotating member 6452, the inlet opening 6440i of the second specific region hole 6442 is blocked by the transmission portion 6452c, and other game balls are second specified. It is possible to prevent falling into the region hole 6442. In addition, since the first rotating member 6451 is also in the transmission state, the inlet opening 6440i of the third specific region hole 6443 is blocked by the transmission unit 6451c, and other game balls fall into the third specific region hole 6443. Can be prevented.

  Since the transmission portion 6452c is disposed below the front side end portion (left end portion in FIG. 65) of the rolling plate 6412 in the transmission state of the second rotating member 6452, the transmission portion 6452c rolls on the rolling plate 6412 and is 2 The game ball reaching the inlet opening 6440i of the specific area hole 6442 can be smoothly put on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6452c.

  As described above, the transmission unit 6452c is configured so as to be inclined downward toward the left (in the rear direction of FIG. 65) in the transmission state, so that the game ball riding on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6452c flows down to the left. be able to. For example, when a game ball rides on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6452c in the state of FIG. 65, the game ball is directed toward the first specific area hole 6441 along the inclination of the transmission portion 6452c (left side of FIG. 64 (a)). Can be rolled.

  Therefore, the transmission portion 6452c can prevent a plurality of game balls from flowing down to the second specific area hole 6442, and the flow direction of the game balls flowing down toward the second specific area hole 6442 Can be switched to the flow-down direction toward the first specific region hole 6441, which has a higher profit than can be expected from the second specific region hole 6442.

  Furthermore, since the 1st rotation member 6451 will also be in a transmission state when the 2nd rotation member 6452 is a transmission state, the transmission part 6452c has flowed down toward the 3rd specific area | region hole 6443 where the profit which can be anticipated is the smallest. There is an effect that the flow direction of the game ball can be switched to the flow direction toward the first specific region hole 6441 having the largest expected profit. Thereby, the player can experience the effect of the large reversal, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  When the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is activated and the time limit blocking plate 2411 is in an immersive state (a state in which the second specific basin hole 6442 is drawn outward) from the state shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the game ball falls and the second rotation Since the load for stopping the forward rotation operation of the member 6452 is released, the second rotation member 6452 performs the forward rotation operation, and accordingly, the first rotation member 6451 also performs the forward rotation operation and returns to the standby state (see FIG. 60).

  Next, the operation in the second flow down device 6400 when two game balls arrive at the timed branch area 6410 and go to the second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443, respectively, will be described. .

  67 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device 6400 along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device 6400 in the line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 67, and FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second falling device 6400 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 67.

  70 and 72 are cross-sectional views of the second flow down device 6400 along the line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 67, and FIGS. 71 and 73 are cross sections of the second flow down device 6400 along the line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. FIG. 67 to 69, two game balls B61 and B62 that flow down the timed branch region 6410 and reach the specific region hole 6440 on the front side with a time difference t1 (t1 = 1 second) are shown in FIG. 71 and FIG. 71 illustrate a state in which the game ball B61 has pushed the left slide plate 6462L, and FIGS. 72 and 73 illustrate a transmission state between the first rotating member 6451 and the second rotating member 6452 of the profit increasing device 6450. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, after the game ball B61 starts to contact the left slide plate 6462L (see FIG. 68), 0.1 second elapses from when the left slide plate 6462L is fully pushed, and from there, the second rotating member 6452 Is configured in such a manner that 0.4 seconds elapse until it becomes a transmission state. That is, with reference to FIG. 67 to FIG. 69 (elapsed time t = 0), FIG. 70 and FIG. 71 show the state of timing of t = 0.1 seconds, and FIG. 72 and FIG. , T = 0.5 seconds timing is illustrated.

  68 and 69 show a state in which the game ball B62 flows down the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412 and the game ball B61 starts to come into contact with the tip of the left slide plate 6462L.

  When the game ball B61 starts to fall into the second specific area hole 6442 from this state, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the left slide plate 6462L is pushed out of the second specific area hole 6442 by the game ball B61. Based on this, the right slide plate 6462R protrudes inward of the third specific region hole 6443.

  In this case, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific area hole 6443 is narrowed, so that the game ball B62 stays outside the entrance opening 6440i (above the right slide plate 6462R). In the present embodiment, since each slide plate 6462R, 6462L moves and is configured in such a manner that one second elapses from when the load is released until it returns to the balanced state, the game ball B61 is shown in FIG. Even after further falling from the state shown, the right slide plate 6462R maintains the overhanging state.

  When the game ball B61 further falls from the state shown in FIG. 70 and time elapses, the second rotating member 6452 rotates backward and enters a transmission state (see FIG. 72). The state shown in FIG. 72 is a state where the elapsed time t = 0.5 seconds, and in this state, the right slide plate 6462R is kept in a protruding state, so that the game ball B62 still remains in the entrance opening 6440i. Arranged outward.

  Then, in the process of the reverse rotation operation until the second rotation member 6452 (and the first rotation member 6451) is in the transmission state, the game ball B62 is pushed up by being brought into contact with the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotation member 6451. The game ball B62 is disposed on the upper surface of the transmission portion 64514c.

  Thereafter, the game ball B62 flows down toward the first specific region hole 6441 along the inclination of the upper surface of the rolling portions 6451c and 6252c. In other words, according to the present embodiment, the action of the game ball B61 causes the game ball B62 to flow down the flow path of the game ball B62 that has flowed down to the third specific area hole 6443 (the hole with the smallest expected profit) until just before. , It is possible to switch to the flow path toward the first specific region hole 6441 (the hole having the largest expected profit). Thereby, the player can obtain a sense of great reversal, and the player's interest can be improved.

  74 to 80, a case will be described in which two game balls B63 and B64 start to fall simultaneously into the second specific area hole 6462 and the third specific area hole 6463. FIG.

  74 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device 6400 along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow down device 6400 along the line LXXV-LXXV in FIG. FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of second flow down device 6400 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 74.

  77 and 79 are sectional views of the second falling device 6400 along the line LXXV-LXXV in FIG. 74, and FIGS. 78 and 80 are sectional views of the second flowing down device 6400 along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. FIG.

  74 to 76 show two game balls B63 and B64 that flow down the timed branch region 6410 and reach the specific region hole 6440 on the front side with a time difference t1 (t1 = 0 seconds, that is, simultaneously). 77 and 78, the state in which the game ball B63 has pushed the left slide plate 6462L is illustrated, and in FIGS. 79 and 80, the first rotation member 6451 and the second rotation member 6452 of the profit increasing device 6450 are illustrated. The transmission state is illustrated.

  74 to 76 (elapsed time t = 0), FIG. 77 and FIG. 78 show the state of timing at t = 0.1 second, and FIG. 79 and FIG. , T = 0.5 seconds timing is illustrated.

  FIG. 75 shows a state in which the game ball B63 is starting to contact the tip of the left slide plate 6462L. Because of the difference in the tip shapes of the slide plates 6462L and 6462R, the game ball B64 disposed at the same height as the game ball B63 in this state (the elapsed time t = 0) is the right slide plate 6462R. There is no contact (see FIG. 76).

  As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, when the game ball B63 further falls from the state shown in FIG. 74, the left slide plate 6462L is pushed out of the second specific area hole 6442, and the right slide plate 6462R. Projecting inward of the third specific region hole 6443.

  In this case, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific region hole 6443 is narrowed, so that the game ball B64 stays outside the entrance opening 6440i (above the right slide plate 6462R). In the present embodiment, since each slide plate 6462R, 6462L moves and is configured in such a manner that one second elapses from when the load is released until it returns to the balanced state, the game ball B63 is shown in FIG. Even after further falling from the state shown, the right slide plate 6462R maintains the overhanging state.

  Here, in the process of the fall of the game ball B64, the game ball B64 also comes into contact with the tip of the right slide plate 6462R, but when the left slide plate 6462L and the game ball B63 come into contact with each other first and begin to slide, the right slide Since the front end of the board 6462R sinks below the game ball B64, the load component applied from the game ball B64 to the right slide board 6462R is larger in the direction perpendicular to the slide movement direction than in the slide movement direction. Become. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B64 from interfering with the operation of the right slide plate 6462R protruding.

  When the game ball B63 further falls from the state shown in FIG. 77 and time elapses, the second rotating member 6452 rotates backward and enters a transmission state (see FIG. 79). The state shown in FIG. 79 is a state where the elapsed time t = 0.5 seconds, and in this state, the right slide plate 6462R is kept in a protruding state, so that the game ball B64 still remains in the entrance opening 6440i. Arranged outward. Then, when the second rotating member 6452 (and the first rotating member 6451) is in the transmission state, the game ball B64 comes into contact with the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotation member 6451 in the process of the reverse rotation operation until the transmission state is reached. When pushed up, the game ball B64 is arranged on the upper surface of the transmission portion 64514c.

  Thereafter, the game ball B64 flows down toward the first specific area hole 6441 along the inclination of the upper surface of the rolling portions 6451c and 6252c. That is, according to this embodiment, when two game balls B63 and B64 reach the second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443 at the same time, the third specific area hole 6443 (expected benefits) The flow path of the game ball B64 that has flowed down along the path that is likely to flow into the smallest hole) is changed to the flow path toward the first specific region hole 6441 (the hole that has the largest expected profit) by the action of the game ball B63. Can be switched. Thereby, it is possible to create an opportunity for the game balls flowing down the route that has not been noticed in the past to be noticed, and to effectively utilize the corresponding space of the pachinko machine 10 as a production space. Can get a sense of great reversal, so the player's interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the tip of the right slide plate 6462R is formed with an inclined surface, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the tip of the left slide plate 6462R may be formed with an inclined surface, and the tip of the right slide plate 6462L may be formed in a rectangular shape.

  In this case, when the game balls B63 and B64 are simultaneously dropped into the second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443, the game ball B63 that is about to fall into the second specific area hole 6442 is transmitted to the second rotation member 6442. The game ball B63 is pushed toward the upper surface of the portion 6452c, and moves toward the first specific area hole 6441. In this case, since the distance of rolling on the upper surface of the game ball B63 transmission portion 6452c can be shortened compared to the present embodiment, the game ball B63 can reach the first specific area hole 6441 at an early stage, and the jackpot Can be shortened.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the tip of the right slide plate 6463R is intentionally inclined in order to make the game ball B64 directed toward the third specific area hole 6443 be directed toward the first specific area hole 6441. ing. With the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to change from a situation where only the lowest profit can be obtained from the game ball B64 to a situation where the maximum profit can be obtained by the flow of the game ball B64. Thereby, it is possible to instill a sense that the game ball B64 toward the third specific area 6443 cannot be ignored, and to improve the attention of the path toward the third specific area 6443, which is usually apt to be neglected. Therefore, the entire time branch region 6410 of the second flow down device 6400 can be noted.

  That is, in the case of forming the tip of either the right slide plate 6462R or the left slide plate 6462L with an inclined surface, if two game balls flow into the timed branch region 6410 at short intervals, at least one game ball However, it passes through the first special area switch 2441a having the largest profit given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the profit finally given to the maximum profit while maintaining the action that the profit given to the player becomes larger in the later game ball, so that the interest of the player is improved. Both the effect (the effect that does not get bored, the resentment) and the effect that maximizes the substantial profit (number of balls to be played) can be achieved.

  81 and 82 are cross-sectional views of the second flow down device 6400 along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 81 and 82, the two game balls B65 and B66 flowing down in the second flowing-down device 6400 are illustrated along the time series, and the state after the operation of the limiting device 6470 is illustrated. .

  As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the restriction device 6470 has a rotation shaft at the rear end of the timed branch region 6410, and directs the game balls B65 and B66 toward the third specific region hole 6443 in a state after the operation. A partition bar 6471 is provided.

  The partition bar 6471 is disposed in such a manner as to contact the game ball at the height of the center position of the games B65 and B66 that roll on the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls B65 and B66 coming into contact with the partition bar 6471 from moving over the partition bar 6471 to the left.

  The manner in which the game balls B65 and B66 flow down in the second flow down device 6400 in the state after the operation of the restriction device 6470 will be described.

  In FIG. 81, the first rotating member 6451 is in a standby state. In this case, as described above, the size of the gap between the partition bar 6471 of the limiting device 6470 and the moving blocking surface 6451d of the first rotating member 6451 is set to be equal to or smaller than the size of the game ball. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the game ball B65 does not go to the left of the partition bar 6471 but is held on the right side of the partition bar 6471 and flows down toward the third specific region hole 6443.

  Therefore, in a state after the restricting device 6470 is operated, when a single game ball flows down to the second flow-down device 6400, it is possible to form a state where it always falls into the third specific region hole 6443. Accordingly, for example, in a big hit state where a single game ball enters the second flow down device 6400 while improving the probability of entering the movable ball accessory device 190 (see FIG. 2) by a short-time game, It is easy to continue the short-time game by unifying the outgoing ball into the outgoing ball (the lowest outgoing ball) obtained by dropping the game ball into the third specific area hole 6443, but one big hit ball is A suppressed gaming machine can be configured. Thereby, although there may not be so many balls, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in line with the player's intention to continue playing for a long time after the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball that has fallen through the third specific area hole 6443 passes through the hour / short switch 190d, winning the jackpot during the hour / short game promises another time / short game. It becomes. Thereby, the player can continuously enjoy the jackpot game and the short-time game while suppressing the consumption of the game ball.

  On the other hand, when two or more game balls flow down to the second flow-down device 6400 in the state after the operation of the restriction device 6470, as shown in FIG. 82, the first game ball B65 rotates the first rotation member 6451. By doing so, the second game ball B66 rolls toward the second specific area hole 6442 or the first specific area hole 6441 on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451. That is, in the state after the restriction device 6470 is operated, by allowing the second flow down device 6400 to enter a plurality of game balls, it becomes possible to acquire many balls in the big hit game, so the second flow down device 6400 There are real benefits to having multiple game balls. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform a game in which the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted in order to cause a plurality of game balls to enter the movable entrance ball accessory device 190.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when two game balls are entered into the second flow down device 6400, the profit increasing device 6450 operates to obtain the specific region hole 6440 into which the previous game ball flows. The profit that can be obtained by the specific area hole 6440 into which the game ball flows later can be forcibly increased with respect to the profit that can be obtained. As a result, the flow path of the subsequent game ball can be changed by the action of the previous game ball, so that attention to the movement of the game ball can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, since the subsequent game ball does not have a smaller profit than the previous game ball, the specific area hole 6440 that the subsequent game ball flows into can be watched more safely than usual. be able to.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, since the 1st game ball which flowed into the 2nd flow-down apparatus 6400 can comprise the aspect which flows into the 3rd specific area | region hole 6443 reliably, it combines with another effect | action, suppressing a ball-out. (In this embodiment, combined with time saving), the range of game play can be expanded.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 101, the second flow down device 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the game ball flows down by its own weight and is distributed to the specific area holes 441 to 443 has been described. However, the second flow down device 7440 in the seventh embodiment has a driving force for moving the game ball. A generated game ball drive 7450 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the second flow down device 7400 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the rolling bed device 7410. Note that in FIG. 83, a game ball that starts flowing into the game ball driving device 7450 by flowing down the first branch induction flow path R1 is illustrated. 84 corresponds to a state in which the game ball driving device 7450 and the like are removed from FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the second flowing-down device 7400 rolls the rolling bed device 7410 that passes the game ball on the upper surface side and extends in the left-right direction, and the rolling bed device 7410. A pair of annular rotary distribution devices 7420 that distribute game balls and are formed of a translucent resin material, a drive device 7430 that generates the rotational driving force of the rotary distribution device 7420, and a rolling bed device 7410. And a plurality of specific area holes 7440 through which the game balls distributed to the rotary sorting device 7420 can flow down, and the rotary shaft is arranged in a manner in which the axial direction is along the extending direction of the rolling bed device 7410 And a game ball driving device 7450 to be provided.

  The rolling floor device 7410 includes a first branch guide flow path R1, left and right support columns 7411L and 7411R that rotatably support the rotary sorting device 7420, and a tilted floor 7412 configured to be tiltable by the weight of the game ball. And an inclined flow path 7413 inclined downward to the left where the game ball that has passed to the left through the left support column 7411L rolls, a pair of support holes 7414 that support the game ball drive device 7450, and driving of the drive device 7430 A motor support hole 7415 that supports the motor 7431; an inflow sensor 7416 that is a sensor that detects a game ball immediately before flowing into the screw member 7453 from the first branch induction flow path R1, and is disposed below the support hole 7414; Is mainly provided.

  The left support column 7411L is configured by a T-shaped column shape, and a main column 7411a extending in the vertical direction, a branch column 7411b extending in the front-rear direction in a symmetric shape at the upper end of the main column 7411a, A collar 7411c composed of a rotatable ring-shaped member projecting from the upper surface of the branch post 7411b.

  The main pillar 7411a is disposed on the side facing the tilted floor 7412 and the second specific area hole 7442 drilled along the vertical direction, and supports the tilted floor 7412 so that the tilted floor 7412 can tilt in the vertical direction. The bearing part 7411a1 to be mainly provided.

  The top surface of the branch post 7411b is recessed with an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the rotary sorting device 7420, and the rotary sorting device 7420 is rotatably supported (fitted) in the recessed portion. A plurality of collars 7411c are arranged in the vicinity of the front and rear ends of the branch post 7411b, and the allowance from the upper surface of the branch post toward the rotating shaft side of the rotary sorting device 7420 is constant. Thereby, the rotation distribution device 7420 can be rotated in contact with the plurality of collars 7411c, and it can be prevented that the rotation distribution device 7420 rotates and rubs against the branch pillar 7411b. Durability can be improved.

  The right support pillar 7411R is provided with a third specific area hole 7443 instead of the second specific area hole 7442 and a protruding member 7411h that protrudes to the inside of the hole by the operation of the tilting floor 7412. Has the same configuration as that of the left support column 7411L, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The inclined floor 7412 is supported by the bearing portion 7411a1, and can change its state between an upward state in which no game ball is on and a downward state in which the game ball is inclined when the game ball is on, and the upper surface is a game ball driving device 7450. It is recessed with an arc shape centering on the rotation axis. In addition, it arrange | positions so that the distance between the recessed part of an upper surface and the cylindrical part 7453a of the game ball drive device 7450 may become longer than the diameter of a game ball. Thereby, it becomes possible for the game ball to roll while swinging in the front-rear direction (circumferential direction of the arc) through the recessed portion on the upper surface.

  The inclined channel 7413 is an inclined channel that guides the game ball that has reached the left side of the left support column 7411L to the first specific region hole 7441, and the side support column in which the first specific region hole 7441 is drilled. 7413a.

  In this embodiment, the side support pillar 7413a provided with each specific area hole 7440 and the left and right support pillars 7411R and 7411L are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Accordingly, it is possible to easily form a configuration for preventing the game ball from flowing down by the time limit blocking plate 2411 (see FIG. 40). That is, in this embodiment, the time limit blocking plate 2411 described above in the second embodiment is arranged at a position where the inner diameter of each specific region hole 7440 is narrowed (see FIG. 85A). Thereby, from the relationship with the height difference of each specific area | region switch 2441a-2443a of this embodiment type | system | group, when several game balls enter into the specific area hole 7440 from which it differs, the profit provided to a player The game ball can be passed through the higher switch first. Therefore, since the player can win the jackpot with the higher profit, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

  Further, the time limit blocking plate 2411 is disposed at a position where only one game ball can be stored in the specific area hole 7440 and the second and subsequent game balls are not stored (depth corresponding to the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, since only a single game ball is accommodated in the single specific area hole 7440, when two or more game balls flow down to the second flow down device 7400, the player A jackpot of 7 rounds or more that can be obtained by passing the game ball through the switch 2442a can be obtained.

  The rotation distribution device 7420 is a device composed of an annular rotating member fitted to the upper surfaces of the left and right support columns 7411L and 7411R, and the first annular ring fitted to the upper surface of the left support column 7411L. It mainly includes a member 7421 and a second annular member 7422 fitted to the upper surface of the right support column 7411R.

  The first annular member 7421 includes a main body portion 7421a formed in a cylindrical shape, a plurality of opening portions 7421b that are opened by removing a wall portion at a central portion in the width direction of the main body portion 7421a, and an opening portion 7421b thereof. A concave fitting portion 7421c in which the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 7421a is recessed toward the rotation center on the outer side in the width direction than the central portion in the width direction where the opening is opened, and the outer side in the width direction than the concave fitting portion 7421c And a gear 7421d formed over the circumference.

  The first annular member 7421 alternately arranges the curved surface of the main body portion 7421a and the opening of the opening portion 7421b in the lower portion by the rotation operation of the driving device 7430. As a result, when the game ball is caused to flow down to the second specific area hole 7442 opened in the left support column 7411L (part of the case where the opening 7421b coincides with the opening of the second specific area hole 7442), When passing to the left without flowing down to the second specific region hole 7442 (a part of the case where the opening 7421b coincides with the opening of the second specific region hole 7442 and the main body 7421a closes the second specific region hole 7442) If).

  The opening 7421b is composed of a pair of opening portions that are opened to a size that allows a game ball to pass therethrough, and openings that are drilled over 90 degrees around the rotation axis are arranged at intervals of 90 degrees. That is, every time the first annular member 7421 rotates 90 degrees, the portion disposed below the rotation shaft is replaced by the main body portion 7421a and the opening portion 7421b. In addition, the side surface surrounding the opening 7421b is formed so as to be inclined in a mode facing the inner peripheral side (a mode in which a corner portion on the outer peripheral side is chamfered). Thereby, the deceleration degree at the time of a game ball contact | abutting (it catches) to the side surface of the opening part 7421b can be made small.

  The recessed fitting portion 7421c is a portion formed in accordance with the arrangement of the collar 7411c of the rolling floor device 7410. Since the first annular member 7421 rotates while the collar 7411c is in contact with the recessed fitting portion 7421c, the collar 7411c is arranged so as to be able to contact the main body portion 7421a in the left-right direction. Therefore, the axial displacement of the first annular member 7421 can be suppressed by the collar 7411c and the main body portion 7421a coming into contact with each other in the left-right direction (rotational axis direction).

  The gear 7421d serves as a transmission portion that meshes with the first gear 7432 of the driving device 7430. In the present embodiment, the first annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 are rotated by the same drive motor 7431 at the same gear ratio, so the first annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 are rotated. The rotation speed, the rotation start timing, and the rotation end timing are the same.

  Similarly to the first annular member 7421, the second annular member 7422 has a cylindrical main body portion 7422a and a plurality of openings that are opened by removing the wall portion at the center in the width direction of the main body portion 7422a. An opening 7422b, a recessed fitting portion 7422c whose outer peripheral surface is recessed in the body portion 7422a toward the center of rotation on the outer side in the width direction than the central portion in the width direction where the opening 7422b is opened, and the recess Unlike the first annular member 7421, the gear 7422 d formed mainly over the circumference on the outer side in the width direction than the fitting portion 7422 c is provided at the boundary portion between the main body portion 7421 a and the opening portion 7421 b. A plurality of protruding portions 7422e that protrude toward the inner peripheral side are mainly provided.

  Since the configuration of the recessed fitting portion 7422c and the gear 7422d is the same as that of the recessed fitting portion 7421c and the gear 7421d of the first annular member 7421, description thereof is omitted.

  The opening 7422b is composed of three opening portions that are opened to allow a game ball to pass through, and openings that are drilled over 60 degrees around the rotation axis are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees. That is, every time the second annular member 7422 rotates 60 degrees, the portion disposed below the rotation shaft is switched between the main body portion 7422a and the opening portion 7422b. Unlike the opening 7421b of the first annular member 7421, the side surface surrounding the opening 7422b is formed perpendicular to the circumference.

  The projecting portion 7422e is a portion projecting in a strip shape in the left-right direction that moves the game ball in the rotation direction when the game ball rolls on the main body portion 7422a, and is adjacent to the entrance in the vicinity of the entrance. The side surface opposite to the portion 7422b is formed as an inclined surface facing the opposite side of the opening 7422b. In the present embodiment, the protruding portion 7422e is arranged at the boundary between the two openings 7422b in the boundary between the main body portion 7422a and the opening 7422b, and the boundary with the one opening 7422b is projected. The installation portion 7422e is not disposed.

  The drive device 7430 is a device that generates the rotational drive force of the rotational distribution device 7420, and is provided with a drive motor 7431 that is supported in a state where the rotational shaft is inserted into the motor support hole 7412, and the rotational shaft of the drive motor 7431. A first gear 7432 that is fixed and meshed with the first annular member 7421, and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 7431 coaxially with the first gear 7432 and meshed with the second annular member 7432. The second gear 7433 is mainly provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first gear 7432 and the second gear 7433 are composed of gears having the same shape, and the gears 7421d and 7422d of the rotary sorting device 7420 are composed of gears having the same shape. The gear ratio between the annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 is the same.

  The specific area hole 7440 is formed in the first specific area hole 7441 arranged inside the side support pillar 7413a, the second specific area hole 7442 arranged inside the left support pillar 7411L, and the right support pillar 7411R. The third specific region hole 7443 to be arranged is mainly provided.

  The first specific area hole 7441 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the first specific area for 16 round big hits, and the first specific area switch 2441a is disposed therein. Thereby, a game ball passing through the first specific area through the first specific area hole 7441 is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

  The second specific area hole 7442 and the third specific area hole 7443 have the same internal shape as the first specific area hole 7441, and the second specific area hole 7442 has a game ball in the second specific area for 7 rounds big hit. The third specific area hole 7443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for 3 round big hits. That is, the second specific area switch 2442a is disposed inside the second specific area hole 7442, and the third specific area switch 2443a is disposed inside the third specific area hole 7443.

  Thereby, a game ball that passes through the second specific area hole 7442 and passes through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a, passes through the third specific area hole 7443, and passes through the third specific area. The game ball to be detected is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

  In addition, in the overhanging state, the time limit blocking plate 2411 (see FIG. 40) is overhanging above the first specific area switch 2441a, the second specific area switch 2442a, and the third specific area switch 2443a. It is possible to prevent (delay) the game ball from flowing down the specific area holes 7441, 7442, 7443.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 85, distances H1 to H3 from the specific area holes 7441 to 7443 to the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 7442 to the second specific area switch 2442a is made longer than the distance (distance H1) from the first specific area hole 7441 to the first specific area switch 2441a. The distance (distance H3) from the third specific area hole 7443 to the third specific area switch 2443a is made longer than the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 7442 to the second specific area switch 2442a (distance) H1 <distance H2 <distance H3).

  As a result, when the game balls fall from the vicinity of the upper ends of the specific area holes 7441 to 7443 at the same timing, the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a having the shorter distances H1 to H3 are effectively detected. Can win a jackpot with more rounds.

  The game ball drive device 7450 is rotatably supported by the pair of support holes 7414 as the drive motor 7451 that is held in a state where the rotation shaft is inserted through the pair of support holes 7414 and the rotation shaft of the drive motor 7451. It mainly includes a cylindrical shaft rod member 7452 that is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 7451 and a helical screw member 7453 that is integrally molded with the shaft rod member 7452.

  The screw member 7453 is a member that is integrally formed with the shaft rod member 7452, and is formed in a state in which a thin plate is spirally wound along a cylindrical column portion 7453a and an outer peripheral surface of the column portion 7453a. And a spiral plate portion 7453b.

  The diameter of the cylindrical portion 7453a is formed such that the distance between the rotary sorting device 7420 and the inclined floor 7412 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, a game ball can be passed between the rotation distribution device 7420 and the inclined floor 7412 and the cylindrical portion 7453a.

  In the spiral plate portion 7453b, the distance between the thin plates adjacent in the left-right direction is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball. Accordingly, the game ball is accommodated between the adjacent plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b, and can move to the left based on the rotation of the screw member 7453. In the present embodiment, the distance between adjacent plates is designed to be 25 mm.

  The support pillars 7411L and 7411R have a horizontal width of 20 mm, and the specific area holes 7442 and 7443 are arranged at the center positions of the support pillars 7411L and 7411R in the left-right width direction (see FIG. 101A). ).

  In addition, the spiral plate portion 7453b has a diameter in the axial direction as the inner diameter of the locus of the projecting portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422. This prevents the rotation distribution device 7420 and the screw member 7453 from interfering with each other.

  In the present embodiment, the spiral plate portion 7453b is formed as a left-handed screw starting from the right end portion. Therefore, the game ball can be moved to the left by rotating the screw member 7453 clockwise in a state where the right end is viewed (right view). In the present embodiment, the screw member 7453 is rotationally driven in a fixed drive mode in which the stored game ball is moved leftward at a speed of 10 mm / second (V = 10 mm / s) from the time of turning on the power.

  The phase relationship between the first annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the phase relationship described below is merely an example, and the phase relationship between the first annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 is not limited thereto.

  85 (a) is a front view of the second flow down device 7400, and FIG. 85 (b) is a sectional view of the first annular member 7421 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (C) is sectional drawing of the 2nd annular member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line | wire of Fig.85 (a). In FIG. 85A, the drive device 7430 is not shown for easy understanding.

  85 (a) to 85 (c), the opening 7421b of the first annular member 7421 has a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the first annular member 7421 in the upper front side (FIG. 85 (b)). Of the second ring member 7422 and the opening 7422b at the boundary between the rotation axis of the second ring member 7422 and the horizontal line. It is comprised by the phase relationship arrange | positioned. The state shown in FIGS. 85B and 85C is defined as the initial state of the rotary sorting device 7420 and will be described.

  In addition, each annular member 7421, 7422 is rotationally driven at a speed of 60 degrees per second (10 rpm) counterclockwise in FIGS. 85 (b) and 85 (c). The timing for starting the drive is controlled when the game ball wins the confirmed area switch 340a (see FIG. 5), and is stopped after being rotated for several seconds. Thus, in this embodiment, since the driving trigger of the screw member 7453 and each annular member 7421, 7422 is varied, it is difficult for the player to predict the operation pattern, and each annular member 7421 , 7422 is determined, so that it is possible to prevent the profits given to the player from being biased by the so-called timing hitting the game ball.

  In this embodiment, the width direction dimensions of the main body portions 7421a and 7421b (excluding the gears 7421b and 7422b) of the annular members 7421 and 7422 are 20 mm, and the opening portions 7421b and 7422b are 12 mm in the width direction. It is arranged at the center in the width direction. Since the diameter of the game ball is 11 mm, the game ball that is pushed by the screw member 7453 and moves to the left is positioned at the center position in the width direction of the openings 7421b and 7422b. When the specific area holes 7442 and 7443 corresponding to are not arranged (when they do not fit), the game ball passes to the left.

  The distance between the main body portions 7421a and 7422a of the ring members 7421 and 7422 (the gear 7422 is ignored) is set to 30 mm.

  Therefore, after the game ball is arranged at the position where the game ball can fall into the third specific area hole 7443 (the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421), the position where the second specific area hole 7442 can fall (the second annular ring). The moving distance until the member 7422 is arranged at the center in the width direction is defined as 50 mm. That is, the game ball reaches the center position of the second specific area hole 7442 in about 5 seconds after passing through the center position of the third specific area hole 7443, and each annular member 7421, 7422 is 300 degrees ( It rotates by an angle of 300 degrees counterclockwise in FIGS. 85 (b) and 85 (c) (that is, it is the same as the state rotated 60 degrees clockwise).

  Next, the operation of the second annular member 7422 will be described. The second annular member 7422 is a member that distributes whether the game ball is dropped into the third specific area hole 7443 or left without being dropped into the third specific area hole 7443, and the game ball is left A plurality of modes that flow downward are formed.

  86 (a) and 86 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85 (a). 86A shows a state rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 86B shows a state rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 86A. Is illustrated. That is, FIG. 86B shows a state in which one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 86A.

  In the state shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the main body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, the game is played after one second has elapsed. Since the ball moves to the left by 10 mm, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422. Therefore, the center in the width direction of the second ring member 7422 shown in FIG. The center position of the game ball is arranged at the position.

  In this case, since the opening 7422b is disposed below the game ball when the center position of the game ball is disposed at the center in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, the game ball falls into the third specific area hole 7443. To do.

  87 (a) and 87 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85 (a). 87A shows a state rotated 330 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 87B shows a state rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 87A. Is illustrated. That is, FIG. 87B shows a state in which one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 87A.

  In the state shown in FIG. 87 (a), when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the main body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, the game is played after one second has elapsed. Since the ball moves to the left by 10 mm, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422. Therefore, the center in the width direction of the second ring member 7422 shown in FIG. The center position of the game ball is arranged at the position.

  In this case, when the center position of the game ball is positioned at the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, the wall surface of the main body portion 7422a is positioned below the game ball. 85 (a) left (FIG. 87 (b) depth direction, second specific region hole 7442 side direction). At this time, since the load for moving the game ball in the vertical direction of the traveling direction is not applied from the second annular member 7422 to the game ball, the game ball passes while being positioned at the lowermost part of the second annular member 7422. To do.

  In this case, the driving force of the screw member 7453 passes through the tilting floor 7412 in a state of being located at the lowermost part of the upper surface of the tilting floor 7412 and reaches the first annular member 7421, so that the game is made in the second specific area hole 7442. Whether or not the sphere falls depends on the state of the first annular member 7421.

  88A and 88B are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85A. In FIG. 88 (a), the state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 87 (b) is shown, and in FIG. 88 (b), it is rotated 300 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 88 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, FIG. 88 (b) shows a state after about 5 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 88 (a).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball moves from the center position of the second annular member 7422 to the center position of the first annular member 7421 in about 5 seconds. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second annular member 7422 in FIG. 87 (b) reaches the center position of the first annular member 7421 in the state shown in FIG. 88 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 88 (b), since the opening 7421b is arranged below the game ball, the game ball passes through the opening 7421b and falls into the second specific area hole 7442.

  With reference to FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the case where a game ball flows into the rotation distribution device 7420 at another timing will be described.

  89 (a) and 89 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85 (a). 89A shows an initial state, and FIG. 89B shows a state rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 89A. That is, FIG. 89B shows a state in which one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 89A.

  In the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the main body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, the game is played after 1 second. Since the ball moves to the left by 10 mm, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422. Therefore, the center in the width direction of the second ring member 7422 shown in FIG. The center position of the game ball is arranged at the position.

  In this case, when the center position of the game ball is positioned at the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, the end of the wall surface of the main body portion 7422a is positioned below the game ball. It does not fall into the region hole 7443 but passes leftward in FIG. 85 (a) (FIG. 87 (b) in the back direction, the second specific region hole 7442 side direction). The second annular member 7422 rotates 30 degrees (0.5 seconds) counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 89 (b), so that the opening 7422b is arranged below the game ball. The center position of the game ball is moved 5 mm from the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422 (the game ball is pushed by the screw member 7453), and the game ball and the third specific area hole 7443 are Since the position is shifted, the game ball does not fall into the third specific area hole 7443 and moves to the left in FIG.

  At this time, since the load for moving the game ball in the vertical direction of the traveling direction is not applied from the second annular member 7422 to the game ball, the game ball passes while being positioned at the lowermost part of the second annular member 7422. To do.

  In this case, the driving force of the screw member 7453 passes through the tilting floor 7412 in a state of being located at the lowermost part of the upper surface of the tilting floor 7412 and reaches the first annular member 7421, so that the game is made in the second specific area hole 7442. Whether or not the sphere falls depends on the state of the first annular member 7421.

  90A and 90B are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85A. In FIG. 90 (a), the state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 89 (b) is shown, and in FIG. 90 (b), it is rotated 300 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 90 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, FIG. 90 (b) shows a state in which about 5 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 90 (a).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball moves from the center position of the second annular member 7422 to the center position of the first annular member 7421 in about 5 seconds. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second annular member 7422 in FIG. 89 (b) reaches the center position of the first annular member 7421 in the state shown in FIG. 90 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 90 (b), the end of the main body portion 7421a is arranged below the game ball, so that the game ball cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442, and the left side of FIG. 90 (b) flows in the back direction, the first specific area hole 7441 side).

  Thus, whether or not the first annular member 7421 falls into the second specific region hole 7442 is sorted. The specific area hole 7441-7443 to which the game ball falls can be varied with a slight difference (for example, a difference of 0.5 seconds) in the timing at which the game ball flows into the rotary sorting device 7420. Thereby, the attention degree of the game ball passing through the rotary sorting device 7420 can be improved.

  Up to here, the case where the game ball flows down the lowermost part of the second annular member 7422 when passing through the second annular member 7422 has been described. Next, a case where the second annular member 7422 is lifted from the lowermost part and passes through the second annular member 7422 will be described.

  91A and 91B are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85, and FIG. 91C is a view in the direction of arrow XCIc in FIG. 91A. It is a partial inner surface figure of the 2nd annular member 7422 in. 91A shows a state rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 91B shows a state rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 91A. The game ball rolling on the inner surface of the second annular member 7422 is shown by a solid line and an imaginary line. Note that the state shown in FIG. 91B corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in I9 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 91, in the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), the game ball is placed at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annular member 7422, and after about 2 seconds, It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85A) of the second annular member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 91B by the protruding portion 7422e for about 2 seconds (the second annular member 7422 The game ball is lifted up to half the radius. From here, the game ball is pushed to the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 91 (b) toward the tilted floor 7412. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the tilted floor 7412, the game ball flows down the tilted floor 7412 while shaking in the circumferential direction of the arc.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (c), the protruding portion 7422e is formed in the vicinity of the entrance with an inclined surface facing the opposite side of the opening 7422b on the opposite side of the adjacent opening 7422b. When the game ball flows into the second annular member 7422 in contact with the end portion of the projecting portion 7422e, the game ball is placed on the opposite side of the opening 7422b (the side where the wall portion of the main body portion 7422a is present). It can be made easy to guide.

  As a result, the second annular member has a timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the end of the protruding portion 7422e (a timing at which it cannot be immediately determined whether the game ball swings to the main body portion 7422a or the opening portion 7422b). When flowing into 7422, it is possible to easily roll the game ball in a direction that is more profitable for the player.

  Therefore, the timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the end of the projecting portion 7422e is not merely a timing of distribution that falls to the third specific region hole 7443 with a probability of 1/2, but the second annular member 7422. Can be produced as a timing of a great chance that the game ball easily passes to the second specific area hole 7442 side. Thereby, the timing which raises a player's interest can be increased.

  FIG. 92 is a partial top view of second flow-down device 7400 as seen in the direction of arrow XCII in FIG. In FIG. 92, an example of the path of the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 is shown by a curve. Further, a period t until the game ball passes is illustrated with reference to the end of the tilted floor 7412 on the second annular member 7422 side.

  As shown in FIG. 92, when the game ball is pushed out to the tilted floor 7412 from the state shown in FIG. 91 (b), the game ball switches the downward direction in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 about every 1 second. It flows down while swinging in a manner (illustrated by an arrow in the figure). Therefore, as shown in the position near the period t = 4, when the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421, the position of the game ball and the second specific region hole 7442 is shifted, so the second specific region hole It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling to 7442.

  93 (a) and 93 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 93 (a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 91 (b), and FIG. 93 (b) rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 93 (b) shows the state after about 4 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 91 (b) is the first annular member. A state at the timing of being arranged at the center position in the width direction of 7421 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the second specific area hole 7442 is located inside the area of the opening 7421b in a top view. Therefore, the game ball can fall into the second specific area hole 7442.

  When the game ball passes through the lowermost part of the inner surface of the first annular member 7421, the game ball mostly falls into the second specific area hole 7442 in the state shown in FIG. 93 (b). As described above with reference to FIG. 92, in this embodiment, the game ball can be swung in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412. Thereby, while the game ball is not arranged at the lowermost part of the first annular member 7421, the game ball can flow down in such a manner that the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421. Even if the first annular member 7421 is in the state shown in FIG. 93 (b), the gaming ball does not fall into the second specific area hole 7442, and the gaming ball moves the first annular member 7421 in FIG. a) A state of passing in the left direction (FIG. 93 (b) in the back side direction, the inclined flow path 7413 side direction (see FIG. 83)) can be configured (illustrated in phantom in FIG. 93 (b)).

  Therefore, if the game ball swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (if the game ball flow mode is different from the usual), the probability that it will be beneficial to the player can be increased, so attention is paid to the game ball flow mode. The power can be improved.

  FIG. 92 shows an example of how the game ball flows down. For example, when the game ball is hooked on a part of the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 and decelerates, the degree of convergence increases. There may be a case where the position with the second specific region hole 7442 matches.

  Therefore, even if the game ball flows down from the same height of the second annular member 7422 to the tilted floor 7412 and sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412, the flow path of the game ball is not always the same. Therefore, while maintaining the expectation level (expectation level that may pass the first annular member 7421 to the left) when the game ball swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412, It can be directed to watch the aspect to the end. Thereby, the attention of the game ball flowing down the second flow down device 7400 can be improved, and based on that, the attention of the second flow down device 7400 itself can be improved.

  FIGS. 94A and 94B are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. FIG. 94 (a) shows a state rotated 150 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 94 (b) shows a state rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 94 (a). The game ball P75 rolling on the inner surface of the second annular member 7422 is illustrated by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 94 (b) corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 94 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 94, in the state shown in FIG. 94 (a), the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annular member 7422, and after about 2 seconds, The second annular member 7422 is disposed at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85 (a)), and is projected to the position shown in FIG. 94 (b) by the protruding portion 7422e for about 2 seconds (of the second annular member 7422). The game ball P75 is lifted (to the height of the radius). From here, the game ball P75 is pushed to the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 94 (b) toward the tilted floor 7412. Therefore, when the game ball P75 rolls on the tilted floor 7412, it flows down the tilted floor 7412 while shaking in the circumferential direction of the arc.

  FIG. 95 is a partial top view of second flow-down device 7400 as seen in the direction of arrow XCII in FIG. In FIG. 95, an example of the path of the game ball P75 flowing down the tilted floor 7412 is illustrated by a curve. In addition, a period t until the game ball P75 passes is illustrated with reference to the end of the tilted floor 7412 on the second annular member 7422 side.

  As shown in FIG. 95, when the game ball is pushed out to the tilted floor 7412 from the state shown in FIG. 94 (b), the game ball moves downward in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 about every 1.2 seconds. It flows down while shaking in a mode of switching to (shown by arrows in the figure). In addition, since the swing width is larger than the mode shown in FIG. 92, the switching interval is long. Also in this example, as shown in the position near the period t = 4, when the game ball P75 passes through the first annular member 7421, the position of the game ball P75 and the second specific area hole 7442 is shifted. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling into the second specific area hole 7442.

  Here, in FIG. 92, the game ball P75 is arranged at a position where the direction of the swing is switched (position away from the second specific region hole 7442) at a position in the vicinity of the period t = 4, whereas in FIG. The game ball P75 is arranged closer to the second specific area hole 7442 than the position where the direction of shaking is switched at the position of the period t = 4.

  In other words, by changing the way the game ball P75 is shaken to the way the game ball P74 is shaken, it is possible to increase the types of effects produced by the operation of the game ball, and the game ball and the second specific area at the position of the period t = 4. By changing the degree of positional deviation from the hole 7442, the probability of whether or not the game ball P75 falls into the second specific area hole 7442 can be changed, so that the attention of the game ball can be improved. .

  96 (a) and 96 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). In FIG. 96 (a), the state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 94 (b) is shown, and in FIG. 96 (b), it is rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 96 (b) shows the state after about 4 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a), and the game ball P75 shown in FIG. The state at the timing when the member 7421 is arranged at the center position in the width direction is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the second specific area hole 7442 is located inside the area of the opening 7421b in the top view. Therefore, the game ball P75 can fall into the second specific area hole 7442.

  When the game ball P75 passes through the lowermost part of the inner surface of the first annular member 7421, the game ball is almost dropped into the second specific area hole 7442 in the state shown in FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 95, in this embodiment, the game ball can be swung in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412. Thereby, while the game ball is not arranged at the lowermost part of the first annular member 7421, the game ball can flow down in such a manner that the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421. Even if the first annular member 7421 is in the state of FIG. 96 (b), the game ball P75 does not fall into the second specific area hole 7442, and the game ball P75 shows the first annular member 7421. 85 (a) can be configured to pass to the left (FIG. 96 (b) back side direction, inclined flow path 7413 side direction (see FIG. 83)) (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 96 (b)). .

  Therefore, if the game ball P75 swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (if the game ball flow mode is different from the usual), the probability that it will be beneficial to the player can be increased. Attention can be improved.

  FIG. 95 shows an example of how the game ball P75 flows down. For example, if the game ball P75 is caught on a part of the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 and decelerated and the degree of convergence increases, There may be a case where the positions of the sphere P75 and the second specific region hole 7442 are aligned.

  Therefore, even if the game ball P75 flows down from the same height of the second annular member 7422 to the tilted floor 7412 and swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412, the flow path of the game ball P75 is always the same. Since it is not limited, the game ball P75 is maintained while maintaining the expectation when the game ball P75 swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412 (expectation that the first ring member 7421 may pass to the left). It can be directed to watch the flow of P75 down to the end. Thereby, the attention of the game ball P75 flowing down the second flow-down device 7400 can be improved, and based on that, the attention of the second flow-down device 7400 itself can be improved.

  97 (a) and 97 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85 (a). 97A illustrates a state rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 97B illustrates a state rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state illustrated in FIG. 97A. The game ball rolling on the inner surface of the second annular member 7422 is shown by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 97 (b) corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in I15 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 97, in the state shown in FIG. 97 (a), the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annular member 7422, and after about 2 seconds, It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85A) of the second annular member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 97B by the protruding portion 7422e for about 2 seconds (the second annular member 7422 of the second annular member 7422). The game ball is lifted up to half the radius. From here, the game ball is pushed toward the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 97 (b) toward the tilted floor 7412. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the tilted floor 7412, the game ball flows down the tilted floor 7412 while shaking in the circumferential direction of the arc.

  98 (a) and 98 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 98 (a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 97 (b), and FIG. 98 (b) rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 98 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 98 (b) shows the state after about 4 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 98 (a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 98 (b) is the first annular member. A state at the timing of being arranged at the center position in the width direction of 7421 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (b), the wall portion of the main body portion 7421a covers the second specific region hole 7442 at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421. Since it is arranged in a manner, the game ball cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442.

  97 and 98, since the game ball is pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 97 (b) (the same height position as shown in FIG. 91 (b)) to the tilting floor 7412, the falling floor 7412 flows down. The game ball flowing down is the same as that described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, unlike the case described in FIG. 93, even if the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 in a state where it is arranged at the lowermost part of the first annular member 7421, the second It does not fall into the specific area hole 7442 and passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow path 7413 side.

  In other words, even when the flow of the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, it can fall into the second specific area hole 7442 and cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442 And can be clearly separated.

  Therefore, the flow mode of the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, and the swing converges before reaching the first annular member 7421, and the first annular member 7421 Even when the game ball has settled down, whether the game ball that has flowed into the first annular member 7421 falls into the second specific region hole 7442 or passes to the inclined flow path 7413 side to the end ( Until the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421), the attention of the game ball can be improved.

  Further, the difference in the posture of the first annular member 7421 at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 is caused by the difference in the protruding portion 7422e for lifting the game ball. .

  Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which protruding portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422 is lifting the game ball, so that the game ball flows down the inclined floor 7412 from the first circle. It is difficult to predict the posture of the first annular member 7421 when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the annular member 7421.

  In the present embodiment, the three openings 7422b are all configured to have the same size, and the main body 7422a is not provided with a characteristic pattern (for example, the same color is used regardless of the color fill or phase). It is made difficult to grasp which of the pair of projecting portions 7422e lifts the game ball, among the pair of projecting portions 7422e.

  99 (a) and 99 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85 (a). 99A shows a state rotated 270 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 99B shows a state rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 99A. Is shown, and a game ball P76 that rolls on the inner surface of the second annular member 7422 is shown by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 99 (b) corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 99 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 99, in the state shown in FIG. 99 (a), the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annular member 7422, and after about 2 seconds, It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annular member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 99 (b) by the protruding portion 7422e for about 2 seconds (of the second annular member 7422). The game ball P76 is lifted (to the height of the radius). From here, the game ball P76 is pushed to the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 99 (b) toward the tilted floor 7412. Therefore, when the game ball P76 rolls on the tilted floor 7412, the game ball P76 flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

  FIGS. 100A and 100B are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 100A shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 99B, and FIG. 100B rotates 240 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 100A. The state is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 100 (b) shows the state after about 4 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 100 (a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 100 (b) is the first annular member. A state at the timing of being arranged at the center position in the width direction of 7421 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (b), the wall portion of the main body portion 7421a is partially above the second specific region hole 7442 at the timing when the center of the game ball is disposed at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421. Therefore, the game ball cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442.

  In FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, the game ball is pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 94 (b) (the same height position as shown in FIG. 94 (b)) to the tilt floor 7412. The flowing-down mode of the game ball to be played is the same as the mode described in FIG.

  On the other hand, unlike the case described with reference to FIG. 95, even if the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 in a state where it is arranged at the lowermost part of the first annular member 7421, the second It does not fall into the specific area hole 7442 and passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow path 7413 side.

  In other words, even when the flow of the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, it can fall into the second specific area hole 7442 and cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442 And can be clearly separated.

  Therefore, the flow mode of the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, and the swing converges before reaching the first annular member 7421, and the first annular member 7421 Even when the game ball has settled down, whether the game ball that has flowed into the first annular member 7421 falls into the second specific region hole 7442 or passes to the inclined flow path 7413 side to the end ( Until the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421), the attention of the game ball can be improved.

  Further, the difference in the posture of the first annular member 7421 at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 is caused by the difference in the protruding portion 7422e for lifting the game ball. .

  Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which protruding portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422 is lifting the game ball, so that the game ball flows down the inclined floor 7412 from the first circle. It is difficult to predict the posture of the first annular member 7421 when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the annular member 7421.

  In the present embodiment, the three openings 7422b are all configured to have the same size, and the main body 7422a is not provided with a characteristic pattern (for example, the same color is used regardless of the color fill or phase). It is made difficult to grasp which of the pair of projecting portions 7422e lifts the game ball, among the pair of projecting portions 7422e.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 to 100, the maximum amplitude of the pattern of the game ball flowing down when the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 swings along the circumferential direction of the arc on the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 is shown in FIG. At least two different flow modes can be formed, and the distribution probabilities of whether or not to allow the first annular member 7421 to pass to the inclined flow path 7413 side are greatly different while maintaining the respective flow modes. Can be configured.

  That is, the game ball is moved to the second annular member 7422 without changing the operation control of the rotary sorting device 7420 while maintaining the flow-down mode of the game ball that shakes the tilted floor 7412 after being lifted by the protruding portion 7422e. A state in which the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow path 7413 can be configured by the timing of flowing into the first annular member 7421.

  In this embodiment, since the inflow sensor 7416 (see FIG. 84) detects the timing at which the game ball flows into the screw member 7453, the specific region hole that the game ball has is determined from the phase of the first annular member 7421 at that timing. It can be recognized whether it has flowed into the screw member 7453 at the timing of dropping to 7441-7443, and this can be used for effect control.

  For example, in the case where it is determined that the game ball will fall into the first specific area hole 7441, a flashy effect indicating that the maximum profit is obtained is displayed between the spiral plates of the screw member 7453. Can be performed as a pre-reading effect. That is, by prefetching the difference in profits that would be obtained by the flow-down mode of the game ball by control and giving the second flow-down device 7400 a difference in the strength of the play when the game ball flows down, It is not just a buzz, it can be given a role that is directly linked to the player's interests.

  Thereby, when the flow-down mode of the game balls is the same (for example, in the flow-down mode shown in FIG. 92), whether or not the game balls pass through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow path 7413 when viewed from the player. Although it is not known, on the control side, it can be recognized that most of the passage passes toward the inclined flow path 7413 (for example, see the description given above in FIG. 98).

  Therefore, when viewed from the player, it is possible to prevent the flow-down mode of the game ball and the production from being linked one-on-one, and when the flow-down mode of the game ball is the same as usual, another production is performed. However, it can be prevented that it is determined to be a lively effect (so-called “gase effect”). Thereby, attention to the flow-down mode of the game ball can be improved.

  101 (a) and 101 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second flow down device 7400 along the CIa-CIa line in FIG. 85 (b). In FIG. 101A, the tilted floor 7412 is in an upward state, and in FIG. 101B, the tilted floor 7412 is in a downward state. Further, FIG. 101A shows a game ball P78 located at the left end position OUT of the second annular member 7422 and a game ball P79 located at the right end position IN, and FIG. A state after about 0.5 seconds from the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 101A, when the game ball P78 is not on the tilted floor 7412, the tilted floor 7412 is in an upward state, and the overhanging member 7411h is disposed outside the inner surface of the third specific area hole 7443. The In this state, the game ball P79 can fall into the third specific area hole 7443.

  When 0.5 seconds elapses from the state shown in FIG. 101 (a), the game ball is pushed forward by the screw member 7453 and moves to the left by about 5 mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the left game ball P78 rides on the tilting floor 7412, and the tilting floor 7412 is in a downward state with the weight of the game ball P78.

  In this state, since the projecting member 7411h projects inward of the inner surface of the third specific area hole 7443, the opening of the third specific area hole 7443 can be narrowed, so that the game ball P79 is in the third specific area hole. 7443 can be prevented from falling.

  Therefore, when the game ball P78 that has flowed into the screw member 7453 first passes through the second annular member 7422 leftward (toward the second specific region hole 7442), the game ball P79 that has flowed into the screw member 7453 later. However, it is possible to prevent falling into the third specific region hole 7443 which can obtain only a profit smaller than the profit obtained by the game ball P78 that has flown first. As a result, when two game balls P78 and P79 flow into the second flow down device 7400, the game ball P79 that flows in later can obtain a profit that is greater than the profit that can be obtained by the game ball P78 that flows in first. Therefore, after the flow path through which the previous game ball P78 passes is determined, it is possible to further improve the attention to the subsequent game ball P79.

  Since the game ball P78 stays on the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 for about 3 seconds, the tilted floor 7412 returns to the upward state before the game ball P79 that has flowed into the screw member 7453 passes through the second annular member 7422 later. This can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, in order to achieve the above-described effect, the interval between the plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b of the screw member 7453 is configured to be separated by 20 mm or more (in the present embodiment, the interval is set at an interval of about 25 mm). ) Thereby, it is possible to prevent the subsequent game ball P79 from falling into the third specific area hole 7443 before the overhanging operation of the overhang member 7411h.

  In the present embodiment, the interval between the plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b is configured with an interval of about 25 mm. Therefore, when two game balls reach the third specific area hole 7443, an interval of 2.5 seconds (first It passes through the center position of the second annular member 7422 at an interval at which the two annular members 7422 rotate by 150 degrees. Therefore, when one of the game balls falls into the opening due to the configuration of the second annular member 7422 (the configuration in which the opening of the opening 7422b is disposed on the opposite side of the wall portion of the main body portion 7422a by 180 degrees), the other game The ball is easy to ride on the wall.

  Therefore, even if there is no time limit blocking plate 2411, at least one of the game balls can be easily sent to the left side of the second annular member 7422.

  When two game balls are both on the wall of the main body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, the arrangement of the convex portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422 (the arrangement every 120 degrees, one place In this case, at least one of the game balls can be easily swung in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 7422. For example, in the case where a later game ball is placed behind the game ball P72 shown in FIG. 87 (a) with one plate of the spiral plate portion 7453b interposed therebetween and flows into the second annular member 7422, FIG. ), When the second annular member 7422 is rotated by 150 degrees (2.5 seconds) (see FIG. 91A), the subsequent game ball flows into the second annular member 7422.

  In this case, the game ball P72 shown in FIG. 87 (a) does not come into contact with the protruding portion 7422e and does not swing in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 7422, but the game shown in FIG. 91 (a). The sphere P74 is in contact with the protruding portion 7422e and moves between the second annular member 7422 and the first annular member 7421 while swinging in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 92B). Accordingly, a plurality of game balls are continuously flowed into the screw member 7453 (driven by the operation of the screw member 7453 with one plate of the spiral plate portion 7453b being sandwiched), thereby at least one game ball. Can be easily swung in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 7422, and the player's expectation can be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, two game balls are entered into the second flow-down device 7400, so that the game balls are operated by the action of the rotation sorting device 7420, the game ball driving device 7450, and the game balls. Is configured to pass through the second annular member 7421 to the left. That is, it becomes possible for the player to win a jackpot with higher profit (7 round jackpot, 16 round jackpot).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the process until the jackpot acquisition, the case where the game ball is operated in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 7422 and the case where the game ball is not operated are randomly formed. Since the distribution (probability) of profits that can be acquired is changed, it is possible to improve the attention of the flow-down mode of the game balls.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when the flow trajectories of the game balls are the same, a pattern that can be any big hit (7 round big hit, 16 round big hit) can be formed in each flow down trajectory. For this reason, it is possible to improve the attention of the flow-down mode of the game ball regardless of the flow-down trajectory of the game ball that has passed through the second annular member 7422 to the left.

  Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, the electrical configuration is configured by the block diagram described above with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the first control example, and FIG. 103 (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 104B is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the first control example, and FIG. 104A schematically shows the contents of the first random number table in the first control example. 104 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 in the first control example and the small hit determination value in the first special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 in the first control example and the small hit determination value in the second special symbol, and FIG. 104 (d) is a diagram illustrating the first control. Second random number counter in the example 4 and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between per the normal symbol.

  In the main control device 110, main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and display setting in the second symbol display device (not shown) are performed. Run. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 102, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device, and the like. Used in.

  For the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first per-random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the first per-type used for selecting the special symbol hit type Counter C2, stop type selection counter C3 used to select an outage stop type in the special symbol, first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation pattern selection The variation type counter CS1 used for the above is used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 115), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 119). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to winning in the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). And a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning in the middle starting winning opening 28, respectively, are provided in each of these areas, the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 or the middle starting winning prize. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the mouth 28. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal start ports (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 115) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is left-start winning port 26 and right-start winning port 27 or middle-start winning port 28. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning. Then, the value of the random number that is a hit of the special symbol is set by a first random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number counter C1. If it matches the value of the winning random number set by the random number per hit table, it is determined that the special symbol is hit. The special symbol first random number table 202 a is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be small hits in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0-399”, and any of “0-399” is determined. If it is, it is determined that it is a small hit (small hit probability = 1/1).

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a small hit, and sequentially increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After being added and reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball has won the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off. However, in this embodiment, since the small hit probability is 1, it is not displayed in an out-of-display mode.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a small hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the small hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 119) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 115), and the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. Is detected and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 104 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. If the value matches the value of the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is used for non-time / short time (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), time reduction (period in which the normal symbol is in a time-short state, and a period in which the value of the time / intermediate counter 203t is greater than 0). ), And the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by differentiating the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the non-time saving time and the time saving time.

  Returning to FIG. 102, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 102, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 119), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 118) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 117) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, stay counter 203l, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, discharged number counter 203s, It has a short / medium counter 203t, a big hit start flag 203v1, a big hit middle flag 203v2, a small hit start flag 203w1, a small hit middle flag 203w2, a V inlet passage flag 203x1, a V flag 203x2, and other memory areas 203z.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired based on winning in the left start winning port 26 and the right start winning port 27 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball has won (start winning) at the left start winning opening 26 and the right start winning opening 27, and the acquired data includes four pieces of data. Among the vacant areas of the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning in the middle start winning opening 28 are stored respectively. Since the configuration is the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winnings stored in the other reserved areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a first special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball (start winning) at the left starting winning port 26 and the right starting winning port 27. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. Each time a ball enters the left starting winning port 26 and the right starting winning port 27 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, Then, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S404 in FIG. 112). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 110).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 held ball number command (S211 in FIG. 110, FIG. 112). (See S405). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value held in the main controller 110 by a special symbol 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls on display can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual changed display held ball held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next-holding ball number command received.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls held in the middle start winning opening 28 and stored is stored. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball at the normal start port 67 at a maximum of four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right side, the second random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c ( 114 of FIG. 114: No).

  The winning number counter 203j is the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball player device 190 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of game balls that have entered the movable ball player device 190). Number). Specifically, one is added and updated based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the big winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) provided in the movable ball accessory device 190. On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is determined whether or not the number won (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (value of the discharged number counter 203s) in the movable pitching equipment 190 match. (S1267 in FIG. 123), the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time during which the large opening solenoid 209a is set to ON (excitation).

  The stay counter 203l includes the stay solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described in the first embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described in the second embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment, and the seventh embodiment. This is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the drive motor 7451 (see FIG. 83) described above in the form is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the stay counter 203l has a predetermined period (5 seconds in the first embodiment, the second embodiment and the sixth embodiment) based on the game ball passing the fixed area hole switch 340a (see FIG. 5). A counter value corresponding to 12 seconds in the embodiment and 14 seconds in the seventh embodiment is set (S724 in FIG. 116). On the other hand, 1 is subtracted and updated in the process of S1322 of the small hit end process (FIG. 125, S1312) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110.

  Further, based on the determination that the value of the stay counter 203l is 0 (S1323: Yes in FIG. 125), the stay solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the sixth embodiment. The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the embodiment and the seventh embodiment and the drive motor 7451 described above in the seventh embodiment are set to OFF (see FIG. 23). The stay counter 203l is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0, which is an initial value, in the initialized state. In this way, by setting the stay counter 203l and controlling the device that prevents the game ball from flowing down, such as the stay solenoid 413, the winning to the specific area hole 440 is determined according to the number of game balls that have won the determined area hole 340. Can be controlled. That is, it is possible to prevent all the game balls from passing through the third specific area hole 443 (the specific area hole having the specific area switch with the smallest benefit given to the player).

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing for outputting a notification effect (in this embodiment, sound and lighting effects) for attracting the player's attention. In this embodiment, 1 second corresponds to the timing at which the game ball passes through each of the start winning ports 26 to 28 and the end timing of the 15th round (10 ball winnings or 30 seconds have passed to the movable ball accessory device 190). A notification counter 203m is set. The notification counter 203m is updated by being subtracted by one by the notification processing of the main controller 110. A notification command that is output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set based on the notification counter 203m becoming zero. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, the above-described processing for outputting sound and illumination is executed.

  By configuring in this way, the player can be aware that the timing at which a game ball can be entered into the movable ball accessory device 190 is approaching, or that the end of the jackpot game is approaching. Since the game ball is not being fired toward the movable ball game device 190 at the timing when the movable ball game device 190 is released or the jackpot game has ended, the movable ball game device device 190 It is possible to reduce the useless balls caused by continuing to fire.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the movable piece 190a of the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 is closed at the end of the round in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the movable piece 190a of the movable incoming ball accessory 190 has been set from the open state to the closed state at the timing of the end of the round of one round. . When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203o described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1264 in FIG. 123). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the movable piece 190a is closed, and it is determined whether or not the time necessary for the game ball in the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for discrimination.

  The remaining ball timer 203o wins the movable ball accessory device 190 when the preset one round ends and the movable piece 190a of the movable ball accessory device 190 closes at the timing of the round end. It is a counter for discriminating whether the time necessary for the game ball to be discharged has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the movable ball accessory device 190 is discharged is 4 seconds. In this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in advance as the remaining ball timer 203o. Is set as the upper limit. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203o has reached the upper limit value (2 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winnings to the movable pitching accessory 190 matches the number of discharged balls. (S1267 in FIG. 123). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is clogged in the movable incoming ball accessory device 190.

  The discharged number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (see FIG. 2) in one round. The discharged number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls and the number of discharged game balls that have won the movable ball-type handing device 190 are determined (S1271 in FIG. 123).

  The short / medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols fluctuate in the short / short game state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203t is set to 100 by detecting that the game ball has passed through the short time switch 190d (see FIG. 2). That is, in this embodiment, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the time switch 190d, the game state is shifted to the time-reduced game state 100 times after the big hit game ends.

  The jackpot start flag 203v1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a jackpot start timing. The jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON (see S1327 in FIG. 125) when it is detected that the game ball has passed any one of the specific area switches 441a to 441c (see S1324 in FIG. 125). Reference is made to determine whether or not it is a jackpot start timing in the control process (see S1101 in FIG. 120), and it is set to OFF when it is determined that it is a jackpot start timing in the jackpot control process ( (See S1133 in FIG. 121). Thereby, the process according to jackpot start timing can be performed.

  The jackpot flag 203v2 is a flag used for determining whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot flag 203v2 is set to ON when it is detected that the game ball has passed any of the specific area switches 441a to 441c (see S1324 in FIG. 125), similarly to the jackpot start flag 203h described above. (Refer to S1327 in FIG. 125) and is referred to in the jackpot control process to determine whether or not the jackpot is being hit (see S1103 in FIG. 120), and in the jackpot control process, it is the timing of the jackpot end. Is determined to be off (see S1114 in FIG. 120).

  The small hitting start flag 203w1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a small hitting start timing. The small hitting start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process executed when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see S302 in FIG. 111). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process (see S1301 in FIG. 124), and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process (See S1302 in FIG. 124).

  The small hitting flag 203w2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a small hit is being made, that is, whether or not a small hit game is being executed. This small hitting medium flag 203w2 is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process in the same manner as the small hitting start flag 203w1 described above (see S302 in FIG. 111). Then, it is referred to to determine whether or not the small hit control process is in the small hit control process (S1305 in FIG. 124), and is turned off when it is determined that the small hit control end time in the small hit control process. It is set (S1330 in FIG. 125).

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Next, the contents of the first per-random number table 202a and the second per-random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 104A to 104C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first per-random number table 202a, and FIG. 104D schematically shows the contents of the second per-random number table 202c described above. It is the schematic diagram shown.

  In the first per random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired when a game ball enters the left start winning port 26 or the right start winning port 27 is The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not the game is a small hit, and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 28 are small hits. A special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for determining whether or not there is provided.

  Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a winning symbol in the first special symbol lottery based on the entrance to the left starting winning port 26 or the right starting winning port 27 as shown in FIG. 104 (b). It is a table in which a random value (determination value) to be determined is set. In the first special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0 to 399”, and if it is “0 to 399”, it is determined to be a small hit. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random value (determination value) determined to be a win in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the middle start winning opening 28. Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0 to 399”, and if it is “0 to 399”, it is determined that it is a small hit. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1.

  Thus, the first per-random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per-random number counter C1, the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 400 at the time of the first special symbol lottery based on the entrance to the left start winning port 26 or the right start winning port 27. The probability of winning a special symbol is “400/400 (= 1)”.

  In addition, when the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entrance to the middle start winning opening 28, the total number of random numbers that will be a small hit of the second special symbol is 400, the probability of a small hit of the second special symbol Becomes “400/400 (= 1)”.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (d), in the second random number table 202c, there are 24 random values that can be hit by a normal symbol when the time is short, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second per-random number table 202C for non-time reduction. In this way, when the normal symbol is not in a short time, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 while the total number of random number values is 240, so the probability that the regular symbol jackpot is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal time of the normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 30 seconds. And if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol). As a result, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the middle start winning opening 28 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal time of the normal symbol, the middle start winning opening 28 is opened only once for “0.2 seconds × 1” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers that are big jackpots for normal symbols during a short time, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second per-random number table 202C for time reduction. Thus, when the time is short, since the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200, the probability that a normal symbol jackpot will be “5/6”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed on the second symbol display device for 3 seconds. Is done. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. As a result, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the middle start winning opening 28 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the time is short, the display time of the fluctuation is very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and the release period of the middle start winning opening 28 is “0. 2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times ”, which makes the ball easy to enter the left starting winning port 26 and the right starting winning port 27.

  Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time, when the normal symbol is hit, the middle start winning opening 28 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”, but the opening time and number of times are arbitrary. Should be set. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  When it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, a symbol “O” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 28a is displayed. Is opened for a predetermined time.

  Here, the electric accessory 28a in the present control example rotates in a double-open manner with a pair of shafts facing in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 as rotation axes by the operation of the electric accessory solenoid 209b. The electric accessory 28a functions to guide the game ball to enter the middle start winning opening 28 by rotating (opening) in a double-open manner. On the other hand, the game ball is not guided (does not enter the ball) to the middle start winning opening 28 by rotating in a manner of closing from both sides toward the center (closing operation).

  Although details will be described later, the electric accessory 28a in this control example is opened for 2 seconds when the time is short, but is opened only for 0.2 seconds when the time is not short. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 28a of 0.2 seconds is shorter than the time required for the game ball to be guided to the middle start winning opening 28. Therefore, even when the value of the second random number counter C4 is won when the time is not short, it is not possible to win the game ball to the middle start winning opening 28. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game that attempts to enter the middle start winning opening 28 regardless of whether the time is short or not (the jackpot with the short time has not been revealed).

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 selects a small lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery of display results in the apparatus can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for game control.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a fluctuation pattern of each fluctuation pattern type is set in a counter value for fluctuation pattern selection (not shown). The sound lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as variation time and variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variation display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (b). As shown in FIG. 105 (b), in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, an effect counter 223f, a feather entrance A passage counter 223i, a V-entrance passage counter 223j, a round number accumulation counter 223k, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and is the main controller 110. Is a counter that counts up to four times the maximum number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects that are held at. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 110) transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. The number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is managed.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the left start winning port 26 or the right start winning port 27, or the main control device 110 changes in the special symbol. When the display is executed and the number of retained balls is subtracted, a retained ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1702 in FIG. 129). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for the notice effect and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 128) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The wing entrance passage counter 223i is a counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the big prize opening switch 190b of the movable entrance ball accessory device 190. This wing entrance passage counter 223i is incremented by 1 when a wing entrance passage command transmitted when a game ball passes through the big prize opening switch 190b is received (S712 in FIG. 115). This wing entrance passage counter 223i is referred to when setting an effect command for display in the lamp editing process (S1606 and S1609 in FIG. 128), and is set to 0 after the effect command for display is set in the lamp editing process. Initialization is performed (S1604 in FIG. 128).

  The V entrance passage counter 223j is a counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the fixed area switch 340a of the movable entrance ball accessory device 190. The V entrance passage counter 223j is incremented by 1 when a V entrance passage command transmitted when a game ball passes through the fixed region switch 340a is received (S1737 in FIG. 130). The V entrance passage counter 223j is referred to when a display effect command is set in the lamp editing process (S1621 in FIG. 128), and is initialized to 0 after the display effect command is set in the lamp editing process. (S1605 in FIG. 128).

  The round number cumulative counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the jackpot game when the jackpot or the jackpot continues. This round number accumulation counter 223k is incremented by 1 when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S1724 in FIG. 130), and is initialized when a jackpot end command is received ( S1728 of FIG.

  In addition, the other memory area 223z includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 128) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  FIG. 106 is a game flow diagram showing an example of a game flow by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. A normal game by the pachinko machine 10 is started by driving (launching) a game ball into the game area. Hereinafter, the flow of the game will be described on the assumption that the game ball is launched. In the description of FIG. 106, FIGS. 1 and 2 are referred to as appropriate.

  When a game ball flows into the game area and enters a left start winning port 26, a middle start winning port 28 or a right start winning port 27, a left start winning port switch corresponding to each start winning port The passing of the game ball is detected by 210a, the middle start winning port switch 210c or the right start winning port switch 210b, and a special symbol lottery is performed in response to this.

  The special symbol lottery is a lottery related to whether or not to move the movable entrance ball apparatus 190. In this embodiment, since it is set so that any random number in the first random number table 202a is subtracted (small hit probability = 1/1), the special symbol lottery has a confirming role. It is a lottery. If no game ball has entered any of the starting winning openings, the game flow is terminated for the time being, and the game flow is started again aiming for entering the starting winning opening (F01).

  Although not particularly shown, when the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and then stopped and displayed in a manner representing the lottery result. . The special symbol variation pattern by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b may be randomly changed by lottery or fixed to a constant variation pattern.

  Here, in this embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (internal lottery) is performed in response to the ball entering the left start winning port 26 or the right start winning port 27, while the ball entering the middle start winning port 28 is The second special symbol lottery (internal lottery) is performed as an opportunity.

  And, since the winning probability (small hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is set to 1 (= 1/1), when a game ball enters one of the start winning holes, it corresponds to the small hit as it is. Become. Therefore, it is not particularly necessary to internally acquire the hit determination random number in the main controller 110, but in the present embodiment, it is acquired.

  In the present embodiment, there is not provided a win (so-called direct hit, per direct hit) in which a big hit game is directly executed especially when the player enters each starting prize opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As a direct hit, the hit determination may be performed using the hit determination random number acquired here.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol has no display of “out”, and corresponds to “small hit 1” in the lottery based on the first special symbol, and “small hit 2” in the lottery based on the second special symbol. It is supposed to be. The difference between “small hit 1” and “small hit 2” is related to the number of actuations of the movable incoming ball accessory device 190. In the case of “two hits”, the movable ball accessory device 190 is operated twice.

  In any case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hitting manner by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 is actuated (released) as an opportunity (F02). The operation of the movable ball accessory device 190 changes the movable piece 190a to the open position as described above. In the present embodiment, the “small hit” is applied over a predetermined open time (for example, about 0.5 seconds). In the case of “1”, the movable piece 190a is opened for a short period only once, and in the case of “small hit 2”, the movable piece 190a is opened only for a short period.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning opening switch 190b when the movable ball-and-ball accessory device 190 is operated (F03). Here, when a game ball enters the big winning opening switch 190b, the game flow further proceeds to a sorting operation in the movable ball-entry device 190. If a game ball does not enter the big prize opening switch 190b of the movable entrance ball accessory device 190, the game flow is terminated for the time being, and the game flow is started with the aim of entering the starting prize opening again (F01). Will start.

  When the game flow progresses into the movable entrance ball apparatus 190, it is determined whether or not the game ball has finally passed through one of the specific areas through various game ball sorting operations as described above. (F04). As a result, unfortunately, when the game ball is finally ejected from the movable ball game apparatus 190 without passing through the specific area, the game flow is ended there, and the player enters the start winning opening (F01) again. Aiming to start the game flow.

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes through a specific area in the movable ball accessory device 190, the movable ball player device 190 operates again. Specifically, for example, either a large winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, once) over a predetermined opening time (for example, 30 seconds), or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have been won. A special game (a jackpot game) is executed in which one round is set until such a condition is satisfied, and this round is repeated over a predetermined number of continuous operations.

  In the present embodiment, the number of continuous operations (number of rounds) is set to 16 times when the game ball passes the first specific area switch 441a, and 7 times when the game ball passes the second specific area switch 442a. When the game ball passes through the third specific area switch 443a, it is set to 3 times. During such a big hit game (during the operation of the movable pitching accessory device 190), a large number of balls can be generated within a short time in the large winning opening switch 190b that is normally closed. Players can collect many prize balls together.

  In the present embodiment, the movable ball accessory device operation (F02) is the first round. Therefore, the number of rounds in which a player can actually collect a lot of prize balls is the number of rounds obtained by subtracting 1 from the above-mentioned continuous operation times (16 times, 7 times, 3 times) (15 times, 6 times). 2 times).

  Further, during special games (during big hit games), an open port configured as an inlet of a flow path that allows a game ball to flow directly into the back of the game board 13 from the introduction passage 310 and passes through the discharge detection switch 190c (see FIG. (Not shown) is released, the game ball flows down from the middle of the introduction passage 310 to the back of the game board 13, and the game ball passes through the first flow down device 300 and the second flow down device 400 as in the small hit game. It is prevented from flowing down.

  Thereby, the game ball flows down directly from the opening to the discharge detection switch 190c. Therefore, a special game can be performed without requiring time to pass through the first flow down device 300 and the second flow down device 400, and the processing time of an abnormal process (see FIG. 123) described later can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when the game ball that has passed through the big prize opening switch 190b passes through an open port (not shown) arranged in the middle of the introduction passage 310, the discharge detection switch 190c is turned on in 4 seconds at the maximum. Configured to pass.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the game ball detected by passing through the specific area (F04) has passed through the time reduction switch 444a (F06). Here, if the game ball has passed through the short time switch 444a, the game flow proceeds to the short game when the electric accessory 28a is actuated a prescribed number of times (F07) after the jackpot game ends. At this time, during the short game, the game ball is likely to be introduced into the middle start winning opening 28, so that the movable piece 190a is easily opened, and the sorting game is frequently performed in the movable ball accessory device 190. Therefore, it is easy to win jackpots continuously.

  If the game ball has not passed through the time switch 444a, the game flow is terminated for the time being, and the game flow is started again aiming at entering the start winning opening (F01).

  FIG. 107 is a time chart for explaining the flow from winning to the left start winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 to the occurrence of the jackpot game in this control example. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later.

  Based on the winning of the game ball to the left start winning opening 26 or the right start winning opening 27, the main controller 110 controls the variation of the first special symbol. When the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and the main controller 110 starts the small hit control 1 (also referred to as the small hit game 1), the large opening solenoid 209a for operating the movable piece 190a is turned on ( Open state). In this state, the player launches a game ball aiming at the big prize opening switch 190b of the movable entrance ball apparatus 190, and when a game ball enters the movable entrance hall device 190, The game ball passes through the fixed region hole 340 or the slipping hole 350 and flows down to the back of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the flow of the small hit control 1 by the main controller 110 will be described. Here, the entire time of the small hit control 1 is set to 7.5 seconds. First, when a set time t1 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the small hit control 1 is started, the large opening solenoid 209a opens at a set time t2 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). Next, when a set time t3 (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed and it is not detected that the game ball has passed through the fixed area switch 340, the small hit game is terminated. It should be noted that the set time t3 is set to a time sufficient for the game ball flowing down the movable ball accessory device 190 to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c when the set time t2 has elapsed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes the fixed area switch 340a, the main controller 110 ends the small hit control 1 based on the fact that the game ball has passed the fixed area switch 340a, and the set time t10 (first embodiment). 5 seconds, 12 seconds in the second and sixth embodiments, 14 seconds in the seventh embodiment), the residence solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the sixth embodiment. The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described in the embodiment and the seventh embodiment or the drive motor 7451 described above in the seventh embodiment is driven to allow the game ball to stay, and then, for example, the stay of the first embodiment By stopping the driving of the solenoid 413 and retracting the flow blocking plate 412, it is based on which of the specific area switches 441a to 443a the flowing game ball has passed. Stomach, perform the jackpot gaming control of the different number of rounds. Details of the jackpot game will be described later.

  Next, differences from FIG. 107 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a time chart illustrating the flow from winning a middle start winning opening 28 to generating a jackpot game in this control example. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later.

  Based on the winning of the game ball in the middle start winning opening 28, the main controller 110 controls the variation of the second special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the main control device 110 starts the small hit control 2 (also referred to as the small hit game 2), the large opening solenoid 209a for operating the movable piece 190a is turned on ( Open state).

  Next, the flow of the small hit control 2 by the main controller 110 will be described. Here, the entire time of the small hit control is set to 10 seconds. First, when a set time t4 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the small hit control 2 is started, the large opening solenoid 209a opens at a set time t5 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). Next, when the set time t6 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, the large opening solenoid 209a opens the set time t7 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). Thereafter, when a set time t8 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses and it is not detected that the game ball has passed through the fixed area switch 340, the small hit game is terminated. It should be noted that the set time t8 is set to a time sufficient for the game ball flowing down the movable ball accessory device 190 to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c when the set time t7 has elapsed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes the fixed area switch 340a, the main controller 110 ends the small hit game control based on the fact that the game ball has passed the fixed area switch 340a, and the set time t10 (first embodiment). 5 seconds, 8 seconds in the second and sixth embodiments, 10 seconds in the seventh embodiment), the residence solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the sixth embodiment. The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described in the embodiment and the seventh embodiment is driven, and the drive motor 7451 described above in the seventh embodiment is driven, for example, the flow blocking plate 412 (see FIG. 23) is in an overhanging state. Then, the game ball is retained, and then the energization of the retention solenoid 413 is canceled and the flow-down prevention plate 412 is in the retracted state, so that the flow-down game ball is in a specific area. Based on whether passing through any of the switches 441A～443a, it performs the jackpot gaming control of different round number. Details of the jackpot game will be described later.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 109 to 125. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, is executed (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the left start winning port 26, the right start winning port 27 or the middle start winning port 28 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 112.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and a through associated with the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed. A gate passing process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. After the through-gate passing process is executed, the feather entrance passing process is performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 (S140), and the game ball passes through the fixed area hole 340. Based on the above, the V entrance passing process for controlling the subsequent jackpot game is executed (S141), the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S108). S109), the timer interruption process is terminated.

  In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109) to control the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. It is processing of.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S201). The jackpot is included while the jackpot (including the jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changed. If not medium (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 119) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process is a process of determining a small hit variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and is changed by calculation. Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the process of S213 is executed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation display variation time executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed in the process of S214 (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is called. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a small hit is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1. In this embodiment, since the probability of winning a small symbol in the special symbol lottery is 1 (1/1), the lottery has a meaning as a confirmation operation.

  In the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, a blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started. Is determined to be a special symbol small hit (S243). In the process of S243, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S243: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S244). On the other hand, in the process of S243, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, this process ends. Details of the small hitting start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S244 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the hour / midtime counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203t is decremented by 1, and this process is terminated (S221).

  In the present embodiment, the small hitting probability of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is set to 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 may be set to 0.01, and the probability of winning a small bonus may be set to 0.99.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the small hitting start setting process will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the small hitting start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol variation start process (S213).

  In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, an opening scenario of the large opening solenoid 209a is set (S301). Thereafter, the small hitting start flag 203w1 and the small hitting medium flag 203w2 are set to ON (S302), and this process is terminated.

  In addition, as an open scenario, a different open mode is set depending on which special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is a small hit. That is, in the present embodiment, the release scenario of the mode illustrated in FIG. 107 (open once) or the mode illustrated in FIG. 108 (open twice) is set.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 109), and whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the left start winning port 26, the right starting winning port 27, or the middle start winning port 28. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process of the values when a start winning is obtained.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 112, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) the left start winning opening 26 or the right start winning opening 27 (S401). Here, the ball entering the left start winning opening 26 or the right start winning opening 27 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the left start winning opening 26 or the right start winning opening 27 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) Is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  If there is no winning at the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, the special symbol 1 holding ball If the value (N1) of the number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the left starting winning port 26 or the right starting winning port 27 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes). Then, 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 119) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing from S407 to S412, the same processing as that for S401 to S406 is executed for winning the middle start winning opening 28. The only difference with respect to winning in the middle start winning opening 28 is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed, and the other processes are the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. And when it determines with the ball | bowl not having won the middle start winning opening 28 in the process of S407 (S407: No), this process is complete | finished after the process of S412.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 109), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the middle start winning opening 28. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 28a.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 113, S106), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning port 28 is performed. In the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of normal symbols (S608).

  If the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S609). The jackpot game includes a jackpot game and a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the jackpot is not hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-short state, so the second per-random number counter obtained in the process of S607 Based on the value of C4 and the random number table 202c for the second symbol for time reduction, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second symbol random number table 202c for time reduction. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 104 (d)).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 Based on the second random number table 202c, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for non-short-time operation. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 104 (d)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S614). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S614: Yes), whether or not the present is a big hit. Is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the middle start winning opening 28 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol is hit, the number of times the opening of the electric accessory 28a and the opening time of the game ball are It is set to a period (0.2 seconds) during which entry is impossible. Thereby, it is difficult to obtain a winning ball due to a game ball entering the middle start winning opening 28 during the big hit game, and it is possible to prevent the number of outgoing balls from changing greatly.

  In the process of S615, if the jackpot is not hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal design, so the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 The opening period of 640a is set to 1 second, the number of opening times is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal design, the opening period of the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is set to 0.2 seconds. And the number of releases is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S619). Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except for big hits, when the normal symbol time is short, the fluctuation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol non-time short time, and further, the middle start prize opening Since the release period of 28 becomes very long, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the middle start winning opening 28.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S622). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 119) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 113, S106) when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a win (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 28a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 119) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed at the normal symbol starting port (through gate 67). In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 114, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate 67) (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate 67) is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol start port (through gate 67) (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the blade entrance passage process (S140) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the wing entrance passage process (S140) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

  In the feather entrance passage process (S140), when it is detected that the game ball has passed the big winning opening switch 190b, it is first determined whether or not the game is in a small hit (S711). In the process of S711, if it is determined that a small hit is being made (S711: Yes), a feather entrance passage command is set (S712), and this process ends. If it is not in a small hit (S712: No), it is a case where a game ball has entered the big prize opening switch 190b even though it is not a small hit game, an error command is set (S713), and this process Exit.

  The wing entrance passage command set in the processing of S712 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the feather entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the big prize opening switch 109b, and produces an effect based on the passage through the big prize opening switch 190b to the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Send a command to execute. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the movable ball accessory device 190 (see FIG. 106).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the V inlet passage process (S141) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage processing (S141). This V inlet passage process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

  In the V entrance passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the fixed region hole 340 (S721). In the process of S721, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the fixed area hole 340 (S721: Yes), the V inlet passing flag 203x is set to ON (S722), and the V inlet passing command is set (S723). The counter value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in the first embodiment, 8 seconds in the second and sixth embodiments, 10 seconds in the seventh embodiment) is set in the stay counter 203l (S724). The process ends.

  Note that while the stay counter 203l maintains a value of 0 or more, the corresponding drive device (the stay solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment). The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described in the embodiment and the drive motor 7451 (see FIG. 83) described in the seventh embodiment are set to ON (excitation).

  The V-entrance passing command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201, the voice is transmitted. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S721 that the game ball has not passed through the fixed area hole 340, it is next determined whether or not the V inlet passage flag 203x1 is set to ON (S725). In the process of S725, when it is determined that the V entrance passage flag 203x is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S725: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S725, when it is determined that the V inlet passage flag 203x is set to ON (S725: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot type value corresponds to jackpot C (S726). When it corresponds to the jackpot C (S726: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot C is set to ON (S727), and the process proceeds to S4604. The jackpot C corresponds to 16 rounds of jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S726 that the jackpot C does not correspond (S726: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot D is met (S729). In the process of S729, when it is determined that the jackpot D corresponds to the jackpot D (S729: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot D is set to ON (S730), and the process proceeds to S4604. The jackpot D corresponds to the seven round jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S729 that the jackpot D does not correspond (S729: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot E is met (S731). In the process of S731, if it is determined that the jackpot E is applicable (S731: Yes), then the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot E is set to ON (S732), and the process proceeds to S4604. The jackpot E corresponds to a three-round jackpot.

  In the process of S731, when it is determined that the jackpot E does not correspond (S731: No), an error command is set (S733), and this process ends. In the present control example, after the game ball that has entered the movable ball accessory device 190 passes through the fixed region hole 340, the jackpot that can be obtained is limited to jackpot C, jackpot D, or jackpot E. Accordingly, when the V-passing jackpot type value is not jackpot C, jackpot D, or jackpot E, the V entrance passing process (S141) that is executed based on the game ball passing through the fixed area switch 340a is executed. This is considered to be a case where a game ball is won in the confirmed area switch 340a illegally. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S731, an error output is executed, and an illegal act can be found. When the process of S727, S730, or S732 is completed, the hour / minute counter 203f is set to 0, and this process ends (S728).

  By setting the hour / short counter 203f to 0 in the process of S728, the hour / short game is ended when the jackpot game is started.

  In the process of S141, any one of the V flags 203x2 is set to ON, so that the V inlet passage flag 203x1 is set to OFF in the small hitting end process (see S1324 and S1328 in FIG. 125).

  When the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to OFF, the jackpot type is not determined in the processing of S141. Therefore, in this control example, during the small hit game, the big hit type is determined according to which switch the game ball first passes among the specific area switches 441a to 443a and 2441a to 2443a, and then the game ball No matter which specific region switches 441a to 443a and 2441a to 2443a pass, the passage becomes invalid (not reflected in the control).

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. 119, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as at the start of business in a hall, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 is permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 119), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 109) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 110) or the start winning process (see FIG. 112) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a command such as a round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 120) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the big prize opening switch 190b of the physical device 190 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the big prize opening switch 190b is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening switch 190b has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won the big prize opening switch 190b. . When any of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening switch 190b is closed. The opening and closing of the special prize opening switch 190b is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 119), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

  Next, a small hitting control process (S1041) for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is executed. In the small hitting control process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) is completed, it is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The variation display is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set by the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 110).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 113) or the process of S621, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighted display) in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 113). )

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 117 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack is initialized in the initial setting process (S901). By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 119). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a big prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth switch 190b.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 120, S1004), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the V entrance passage process (see FIG. 116) is executed and then the jackpot start is set (see S1327 in FIG. 125), it is determined that the jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), the process of the jackpot hourly accessory operation start process (S1102) is executed, and this process is terminated. Note that the processing of S1102 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot is being hit (S1103). The jackpot includes a jackpot (including a jackpot game) being displayed and a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1103 that the jackpot is being hit (S1103: Yes), the processing of the jackpot bonus equipment device release processing (S1104) is executed, and then the processing of S1105 is executed. Note that the processing of S1104 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S1105, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-releases counter has reached the number of times set in the current round (for example, 1 time). In the process of S1105, when the value of the number-of-opening counter has reached the number set within the current round (S1105: Yes), a big prize closing time timer countdown process is executed (S1106). On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when the value of the number of times of release counter has not reached the number set within the current round (S1105: No), an abnormal process is executed (S1118), and this process is terminated.

  In the big prize closing time countdown process (S1106), the big hit interval timer (S1149) set in S1104 is counted down.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed (S1107). If the closing time has not elapsed (S1107: No), an abnormal process is executed (S1118), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing time has elapsed (S1107: Yes), the round number counter is incremented (S1108). Note that the value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 203, for example, with an initial value of 0.

  After the processing of S1108, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter has reached the number of execution rounds (S1132) set in S1102. At this time, if the value of the round number counter has not yet reached the number of execution rounds (S1109: No), the process proceeds to S1115 and a round number command is set (S1115).

  The land number command set in S1115 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process S1101 (see FIG. 119). The sound lamp control device 113 can recognize the current number of rounds based on the received round number command, and reflect the result in the effect control during the jackpot.

  Next, a normal round big opening closing command is set (S1116). This command is for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the closing of the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 after each round at the time of big hit. Note that the normal round big opening closing command is a command indicating that the movable ball accessory device 190 is closed in other than the final round. The command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process S1101 (see FIG. 119).

  Next, the process of S1117 is performed, and the winning ball counter counted in the current round is reset (S1117). At the same time, the value of the number-of-opens counter is also reset, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the value of the round counter reaches the number of execution rounds in the processing of S1109 (S1109: Yes), this means that this round is the final round, and then the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF. It is determined whether it has been performed (S1110). If it is determined in S1110 that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is not set to OFF (that is, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON) (S1110: No), then abnormal processing is executed. (S1118), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1110, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1110: Yes), the number of game balls that have flowed into the movable incoming ball accessory 190 and the game that has been discharged. This is a case where the number of spheres coincides, and then the round number counter is reset (S1111).

  Next, a final round big opening closing command is set (S1112). This command is for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the closing of the movable ball accessory device 190 in the final round at the time of big hit. Here, the final round corresponds to 3 rounds if it is a big hit of 3 rounds, 7 rounds if it is a big win of 7 rounds, and 16 rounds if it is a big win of 16 rounds.

  Next, a jackpot end command is set (S1113), the jackpot flag is turned off (S1114), the process proceeds to S1117, and this process ends. The final round big opening closing command and the jackpot end command are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process S1101 (see FIG. 119).

  With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 121, the jackpot hour apparatus operation start processing S1102 will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the jackpot hourly accessory operation start process S1102.

  First, a big hit start waiting time timer countdown process is executed (S1130). In this process, main controller 110 sets an initial value for the jackpot start waiting time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (every time this module is called). The initial value of the big hit start waiting time timer is set as a waiting time (for example, about several seconds) from the end of the operation of the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 at the time of the small hit until the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 is operated again. . In the sound lamp control device 113, for example, an effect before the start of the big hit game is performed using the “hit start waiting time”.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit start waiting time has elapsed (S1131). If the value of the jackpot start waiting time timer has not yet reached 0 (S1131: No), it is determined that the jackpot start waiting time has not elapsed, and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the big hit start waiting time timer becomes 0 (S1131: Yes), the process proceeds to S1132 and subsequent steps.

  Next, the number of execution rounds is set (S1132). In the present embodiment, the number of execution rounds (number of continuous operations) to be set is “3 rounds”, “7 rounds”, and “16 rounds”. By confirming the type status (confirming the type of the V flag 203x2), the number of execution rounds can be set.

  However, as described above, the initial opening (small hitting operation) of the movable ball accessory device 190 corresponds to the first round. Therefore, here, the remaining “2 rounds”, “6 rounds”, or “15 rounds” are set as the number of execution rounds. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 203 as a corresponding value on the program.

  Next, the jackpot flag is turned off (S1133), a jackpot start command is set (S1134), and this process ends.

  The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes effect control for starting the jackpot.

  With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122, the jackpot hourly equipment device release processing S1104 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the jackpot hour bonus device opening process S1104. Note that this processing is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the movable ball accessory device 190 as an operation during the big hit game (special game).

  First, the main control device 110 determines whether or not the current timing is the opening timing of the special prize opening switch 190b (S1141). In the process of S1141, if it is determined that it is the timing for opening the big prize opening switch 190b (S1141: Yes), the big prize opening switch 190b is opened (S1142). Specifically, a drive signal applied to the large opening solenoid 209a is output. As a result, the movable piece 190a of the movable ball accessory device 190 is activated, and the special winning opening switch 190b is shifted from the closed state to the opened state.

  Next, a big hit release timer is set (S1143). The value of the timer set here is the opening time per operation when the movable ball accessory device 190 is operated. In this embodiment, a total opening time for one round (for example, about 30 seconds) is set as the value of the big hit release timer. With such an opening time, a sufficient number (for example, about 10) of game balls can be won in the grand prize opening during that time.

  Next, a big hit time interval timer (big prize closing time timer) is set (S1144). The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hit or the waiting time at the end of the final round. The timer value is set to, for example, about 3 seconds (a value longer than the set value of the remaining ball timer).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1141, when it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the big winning opening switch 190b (S1141: No), it is then determined whether or not the big winning opening switch 190b is being opened (S1145).

  In the process of S1145, when it is determined that the special winning opening switch 190b is being opened (S1145: Yes), an open timer countdown process is executed (S1146). In this process, the count-down of the release timer set in the previous process of S1102 is executed. Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (S1147: No), then the number of winning balls Count processing is executed (S1149). In this process, the number of game balls won in the movable ball accessory device 190 within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the count value is incremented based on the winning detection signal input from the big winning opening switch 190b within the opening time.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round in the big hit, one in the small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (S1150: Yes), this process ends.

  If it is determined in S1147 that the opening time has ended (S1147: Yes), or if it is determined in S1150 that the count has reached a predetermined number (S1150: No), then S1148 is executed.

  In S1148, the main controller 110 closes the big prize opening switch 190b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the large opening solenoid 209a is stopped. As a result, the movable ball accessory device 190 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Next, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is turned on (S1151). Next, interval waiting processing (S1152) is executed. In this process, the count-down of the interval timer set in the process of S1102 is executed. When the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, next, the value of the release count counter is incremented (S1153), and this process is terminated. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 203 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1145, when it is determined that the special winning opening 190b is not being opened (S1145: No), this process ends.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormality process (S1118). In the abnormal process (S1118), a process of monitoring whether or not the big winning opening switch 190b is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality process (FIG. 123, S1118), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1261). If it is outside the round valid period (S1261: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1263). Thereafter, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262: No), the process of S1264 is executed.

  In the process of S1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by one and updated (S1265) because it is during the ball throwing time period. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether or not the upper limit value (2 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1266). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1266: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S1266: Yes), it is determined whether the number of discharges (total value of the discharge number counter 203s) matches the number of winnings (value of the winning number counter 203j) (S1267). .

  If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the process of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). Thereafter, the process of S1269 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of leaving the game ball illegally in the movable ball accessory device 190 and passing the game ball through the fixed region hole 340 after the big hit game is over.

  In the process of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1270). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j and the discharging number counter 203s are respectively reset to initial values (S1271), and then this process is terminated.

  The small hitting control process (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 119). This small hit control process (S1040) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 119). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the big hit and the movable entrance ball This is a process for opening or closing the big prize opening switch 190b of the accessory device 190.

  In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit is started (S1301). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the process of S4308 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 111), it is determined that the small hit is started. In the process of S1301, if a small hit is started (S1301: Yes), the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to off (S1302), an open scenario is set (S1303), and a small hit start command is set. (S1304), and this process ends.

  The small hitting start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the voice output is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it executes an effect of starting the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if the small hit is not started in the processing of S1301 (S1301: No), it is determined whether the small hit is being made (S1305). Specifically, the determination of small hitting is determined by whether or not the small hitting flag 203w2 is on. In the process of S1305, if it is not a small hit (S1305: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1305, if it is a small hit (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is the next release timing (S1306). If it is the next opening timing (S1306: Yes), the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable pitching accessory 190 is opened (S1307), and a command indicating the newly opened number of times is set (S1308). This process ends. The command indicating the number of times of opening set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating the number of times of opening, the sound lamp control device 113 starts an effect corresponding to the number of times of opening.

  On the other hand, if it is not the next opening timing in the processing of S1306 (S1306: No), it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the big prize opening switch 190b of the movable pitching accessory device 190 (S1309). Specifically, it is determined that the closing timing is reached when a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball accessory device 190 is opened.

  In the processing of S1309, when it is determined that it is the closing timing of the big prize opening switch 190b of the movable pitching accessory device 190 (S1309: Yes), the big prize opening switch 190b of the movable pitching accessory device 190 is determined. Is closed (S1310), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the big prize opening switch 190b of the movable ball accessory device 190 is not satisfied (S1309: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit period has passed (S1311).

  Specifically, it is determined that the small hit period has elapsed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the small hit for each small hit release scenario. That is, in the small hit control 1, when 7.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit (see FIG. 107), in the small hit control 2 when 10 seconds have elapsed from the small hit (see FIG. 108), the small hit It is determined that the period of time has passed.

  In the process of S1311, when it is determined that the small hit period has elapsed (S1311: Yes), the small hit end process is executed (S1312), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1311, when it is determined that the small hit period has not elapsed (S1311: No), this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125, the details of the small hit end processing (S1312) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the small hit end processing (S1312). This small hitting end process (S1312) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the small hitting control process that it is the timing of the small hitting end.

  In the small hit end process (S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the V inlet passage flag 203x1 is ON (S1321). When it is determined in the processing of S1321 that the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is on (S1321: Yes), this is a case where the game ball has passed through the fixed area hole 340 during the small hit game (the specific area hole 440 (This is a case where one of the specific area switches 441a, 442a, and 443a is passed), so that processing for starting the execution of the jackpot game is performed. First, the stay counter 203l is updated (S1322).

  In the process of S1322, the stay counter 203l is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, when it is determined that the value of the stay counter 203l is 0 or less (S1323: Yes), the process proceeds to S1324.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203x2 is set to ON (S1324). In the processing of S1324, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is set to ON (S1324: Yes), an open scenario of the big winning opening switch 190b is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203x2 (S1325). ), The jackpot start is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203x2 (S1326). Next, the big hit start flag 203v1 and the big hit middle flag 203v2 are set to ON (S1327), the V inlet passage flag 203x1 is set to OFF (S1328), the V flag 203x2 is set to OFF (S1329), Transition to processing.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1323, when it is determined that the stay counter 203l is greater than 0 (S1323: No), or in the process of S1324, the V flag 203x2 is not set to ON (that is, the V flag 203x2 is OFF). If it is set to (S1324: No), this process is terminated.

  In the process of S1321, if it is determined that the V-entrance passage flag 203x1 is not on (S1321: No), it is a case where the game ball has not passed through the fixed area switch 340a during the small hit game, so a big hit is given In order to end without executing, a small hit end command is set (S1331), and the process proceeds to S1330.

  The small hitting end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201 It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the small hit end command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display format of the small hit end effect based on the winning information stored in the win information storage area 223a of the RAM 223, and the small hit end effect. To start.

  After shifting to the processing of S1330, the small hitting medium flag 203w2 is set to OFF (S1330), the release scenario is cleared (S1332), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-off processing in S1512 (see FIG. 127) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 127, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1511 in FIG. 127), it executes a power-off process in S1512. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1512 is in the middle of execution can be determined from the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1402: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1512 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1514, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223. Therefore, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1402: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1514, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1406). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 223 of an abnormality.

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1514 is executed (see S1513 in FIG. 127). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1514 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1514 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached after the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1404 to S1406. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1411, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S1409 is that when the process from S1404 to S1406 is reached via the process of S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current process of S1501 was executed (S1501). If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1510 without performing the processes in S1502 to S1509. In S1501, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1502 to S1509 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1510 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1510 at a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1510 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1502). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1508 described later are set (S1503), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1504). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1505, a customer waiting effect processing is executed, and then a hold number display update processing is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, a setting for switching the output of the display lamp 34 to a low power setting is performed when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the gaming state. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the gaming state, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. Details of the ramp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S1509, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1510). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the command determination process is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1511). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1511 (S1511: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1513), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1514). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1515), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1511 (S1511: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1512), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1512: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1512: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the lighting patterns of the electrical decoration units 29 to 33 do not change according to the gaming state. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Here, the lamp editing process (S1508) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the lamp editing process (S1508). This lamp editing process (S1508) is a process executed at intervals of 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 127).

  In the lamp editing process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made (S1601). If it is determined in the process of S1601 that the jackpot is not being hit (S1601: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S1602).

  If it is determined in the process of S1602 that the game is not a small hit (S1602: No), the current game state is a normal game state in which a game ball is launched aiming at advancing to the small hit game state. is there. Therefore, the lamp outputs of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to the normal game effect pattern (S1603), the feather entrance passage counter 223i is set to 0 (S1604), and the V entrance passage counter 223j is set to 0. (S1605), this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S1602 that a small hit is being made (S1602: Yes), a game ball has been won in any of the start winning holes 26, 27, 28, and the big winning hole switch 190b is opened. Accordingly, the game ball can flow into the movable ball accessory device 190a, so that the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A1 pattern so that the player can grasp this fact. (S1606). In this embodiment, in the A1 pattern, the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit blue light.

  The A1 pattern is one of the outputs of the small hit game lamp. In the present embodiment, output patterns A1 to A3 can be configured as different effect patterns of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33.

  For example, in the A1 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit blue light, in the A2 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit light green, and in the A3 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 turn red. By emitting light, it is possible for the player to grasp the degree of expectation of jackpot. Note that the output pattern is not limited to three, but can be configured with an arbitrary number, and is not limited to configuring the difference depending on the color. For example, the blinking speed and the light emission of the lamp Differences may be configured by changes in orientation.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1607). In the process of S1607, when it is determined that the value of the feather entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1607: Yes), the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A2 pattern (S1608). In the present embodiment, in the A2 pattern, the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit light in green, which has a higher expectation level than jackpot.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223i is 2 or more (S1609). When it is determined that the value of the feather entrance passage counter 223i is 2 or more (S1609: Yes), the lamp outputs of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to the A3 pattern (S1610), and the process proceeds to S1611. In the present embodiment, in the A3 pattern, the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit light in red with a higher degree of expectation than jackpot.

  That is, it is possible to change the color of light emitted from the lamps of the lighting units 29 to 33 during the small hit game in accordance with how many balls pass through the big winning opening switch 190b. As described above in the first embodiment, when a plurality of game balls pass through the big prize opening switch 190b, the special route holes 323 are more likely to flow into the fixed area hole 340. For this reason, the number of game balls that have passed through the winning prize switch 190b can be directly associated with the change in the expectation of the jackpot. It can be done as something that changes in response to profits. Thereby, the interest of a player can be improved.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1607 that the value of the feather inlet passage counter 223j is not 1 or more (S1607: No), or in the processing of S1609, the value of the feather inlet passage counter 223j is smaller than 2. If it is determined (S1609: No), the process proceeds to S1611.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1611). In the process of S1611, when it is determined that the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1611: Yes), the current state is determined to be a jackpot game, and the jackpot type is determined from now on It is. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the lighting units 29 to 33 is set as a winning acquisition effect pattern (S1612), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1611 that the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is smaller than 1 (0) (S1611: No), the transition to the jackpot game is unconfirmed. The output state of the lamps of the decoration units 29 to 33 is maintained, and the present process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S1601 that the game is a big hit (S1601: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the round number accumulation counter 223k is 1 (S1620).

  In the process of S1620, when it is determined that the value of the round number cumulative counter 223k is 1 (S1620: Yes), the number of rounds of the big hit is in an unconfirmed state.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is 1 (S1621). In the process of S1621, when it is determined that the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is 1 (S1621: Yes), the current state is that one game ball passes through any one of the specific area holes 440. Is a state in which the number of jackpot rounds is determined based on the above, and there is still a possibility of winning a jackpot of three rounds. In this case, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the B1 pattern, and this process is terminated (S1622). In this embodiment, in the B1 pattern, the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit gold light.

  The B1 pattern is one pattern of the output for performing the first round of the output of the lamp for the jackpot game effect. In the present embodiment, the output patterns B1 and B2 can be configured as different effect patterns of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33.

  For example, in the B1 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit gold, and in the B2 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit rainbow colors, which increases the jackpot profit to the player. Can be expected. Note that the number of output patterns is not limited to two, but can be configured with an arbitrary number, and is not limited to configuring the difference depending on the color. For example, the blinking speed or the light emission of the lamp Differences may be configured by changes in orientation.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1621, when it is determined that the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is not 1 (S1621: No), the current state is that two or more game balls have passed any specific area hole 440. This is a state where the number of jackpot rounds is determined based on passing. For example, in the first embodiment, in the process in which two or more game balls pass through the fixed region hole 340 and flow down through the second flow-down device 400, at least one game ball moves to the third branch induction flow path R3. It is supposed to be headed.

  The game ball flowing down the third branch induction flow path R3 will pass through either the first specific area hole 441 (given 16 round jackpot) or the second specific area hole 442 (given 7 round jackpot), The passing timing is configured to be earlier than the passing timing when another game ball passes through the third specific area hole 443 (given 3 round jackpots).

  Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the third specific area hole 443, it is determined that the pass is invalid, so there is a possibility that the current state will win 3 rounds of jackpot It is in an excluded state. In this case, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the B2 pattern, and this process is terminated (S1623). In the present embodiment, in the B2 pattern, the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 emit light in a rainbow color that has a higher expected level of profit that can be obtained than gold.

  In the processing of S1620, when it is determined that the value of the round number cumulative counter 223k is not 1 (S1620: No), the current state is determined as the number of rounds per jackpot, and proceeds to the jackpot game of transition to two rounds. It is in a state. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the lighting units 29 to 33 is set to the jackpot game effect pattern (S1624), and this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal game state before proceeding to the small hit game, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the normal game effect pattern, and the small hit game state In the case of transition from the jackpot game state to the jackpot game state, the lamp outputs of the lighting units 29 to 33 are set to the winning acquisition effect pattern, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is fixed, and the remaining jackpot game is executed. The output of the lamps of the sections 29 to 33 is set to the jackpot game effect pattern.

  In the states described here, the profits given to the players are fixed, so even if a difference in color is provided, the player's interest does not improve, but rather the eyes stimulate the change in the luminescent color. Will lead to fatigue of the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being fatigued meaninglessly, in the normal game effect pattern, the hit acquisition effect pattern, and the jackpot game effect pattern, by light of a similar color (for example, white light) The lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are made to emit light. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the timing for determining profit.

  In addition, since the moment of winning the jackpot is the moment when the player's interest is most improved, in order to respond to it, the light emission intensity of the lamps of the lighting parts 29 to 33 by the winning winning effect pattern is the normal game effect. It is comprised more strongly than the light emission intensity | strength of the lamp | ramp of the electrical decoration parts 29-33 by a pattern and the jackpot game production pattern.

  In FIG. 128, the control of the light emission of the lamps of the lighting units 29 to 33 has been described. However, in the processing of S1509, the sound effect output from the audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226 is also controlled in the same manner. Is done. That is, the sound changes based on the expected level of profit given to the player. For example, when the output of the lamps of the lighting units 29 to 33 is set to the A2 pattern (S1608) than when the output of the lamps of the lighting units 29 to 33 is set to the A1 pattern (S1606). The tempo of the music to be output is increased and the volume is increased.

  Next, a command determination process (S1510) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1510). This command determination processing (S1510) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 129, S1510), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110. It is then determined whether or not a reserve ball number command has been received (S1701). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main controller 110 is extracted. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1702).

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is a lottery of a special symbol when the ball wins (start winning prize) in the left and right starting winning holes 26, 27 or the middle starting winning hole 28. Is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the special symbol 1 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed by the processing of S1702 every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn. The values of the reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the special symbol lottery even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1702 is executed, the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are arranged to be visible to the player as an alternative to the liquid crystal display device. A display holding ball number command for notifying to a 7-segment display (not shown) is set. Thereby, the number of reserved balls according to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the 7-segment display.

  On the other hand, if no pending ball number command has been received (S1701: No), it is determined whether or not a hit-related command has been received (S1703). When a hit-related command is received (S1703: Yes), a hit-related process is executed (S1704), and then this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1703 that a hit-related command has not been received (S1703: No), it is then determined whether a notification command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1705). If it is determined that a notification command has been received (S1705: Yes), a notification sound corresponding to the received command (for example, “push a ball on top”) is selected, and a notification command is set (S1706). .

  Next, in the processing of S1705, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1705: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed. In step S1707, the process is terminated. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the 7-segment display, the command is displayed on the 7-segment display. The command is set so as to be transmitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 130, the hit-related process (S1704) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S1704). This hit-related process (S1704) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 129) that a hit-related command has been received.

  In the hit-related processing, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot start command is received (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S1721: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S1722), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on a 7-segment display (not shown).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S1721: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S1723). In the process of S1723, when it is determined that the round number command is received (S1723: Yes), 1 is added to the round number accumulation counter 223k (S1724). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223k (S1725), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1723 that the round number command has not been received (S1723: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S1726). If it is determined in step S1726 that a jackpot end command has been received (S1726: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S1727), the round cumulative counter 223k is set to 0 (S1728), and this processing is performed. finish.

  If it is determined in step S1726 that a jackpot end command has not been received (S1726: No), it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S1729).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1729 that a small hitting start command has been received (S1729: Yes), a display small hitting start command is set (S1730), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S1729, when it is determined that a small hitting start command has not been received (S1729: No), it is determined whether or not a small hitting end command has been received (S1731).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1731 that a small hitting end command has been received (S1731: Yes), a display small hitting end command is set in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hitting game (S1732). This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1731, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S1731: No), it is determined whether or not a feather entrance passage command has been received (S1733).

  If it is determined in S1733 that the wing entrance passage command has been received (S1733: Yes), 1 is added to the wing entrance passage counter 223i (S1734). The added wing entrance passage counter 223i is referred to in order to determine the number of game balls that have entered the movable ball accessory device 190 during the small hit game in the ramp editing process described with reference to FIG. The

  When the processing of S1734 is completed, a display feather entrance passage command is set in order to execute an effect (for example, refer to FIG. 128) based on the entry to the movable entrance ball device 190 during the small hit game (S1735). ), This process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1733 that the wing inlet passage command has not been received (S1733: No), it is determined whether a V inlet passage command has been received (S1736).

  If it is determined in step S1736 that the V-entry passage command has been received (S1736: Yes), 1 is added to the V-entry passage counter 223j (S1737). The added V entrance passage counter 223j is referred to in order to determine the number of balls entering the fixed area switch 340a during the big hit game (the first round) in the ramp editing process described with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1737 is completed, a display V entrance passing command is set in order to execute an effect that suggests the start of the jackpot game (S1738), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1736, when it is determined that the V-entry passage command has not been received (S1736: No), this process is ended as it is.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect depends on how many game balls have passed through the big prize opening switch 190b of the movable ball accessory device 190 and how many game balls have passed through the fixed area switch 340a. (See FIG. 128). Thereby, even when the player is not paying attention to the game ball, it is possible to notify that the player is in a state advantageous to the player by the effect mode, and the player can miss the big hit moment. Can be prevented.

  In addition, this makes it possible to link the characteristic of the movable ball accessory device 190 (the characteristic that the amount of profit that can be expected to be acquired changes depending on how many game balls are inserted) and the effect. In other words, the change in production can be configured as a production change based on a change in profit that can be expected to be acquired, not just a change in liveliness. Thereby, a player's attention degree with respect to an effect can be improved.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 165. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the change in the flow-down mode of the ball to the movable ball-carrying accessory device 190 occurs randomly due to the collision between the ball and the nail, but the flow-down device 8500 before winning in the eighth embodiment is It is arranged on the upstream side of the movable ball accessory device 190, and is configured to be able to control the change in the flow-down mode of the sphere by colliding the in / out member 8520 with the sphere. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  131 is a front view of a game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment, FIG. 132 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 8013, and FIG. 133 is a partial front exploded perspective view of the game board 8013. 131 shows an example of the arrangement of the nail that collides with the sphere above the top opening 8512. In FIGS. 132 and 133, the nail is not shown. In FIG. 133, since the base plate 60 is transparent, the first flow-down device 300 disposed behind the base plate 60 can be seen through. As will be described later, the front-side device 8510 is formed of a light-transmitting material, but the internal structure is not shown for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 131 to FIG. 133, in this embodiment, an opening 8013a is formed in the game board 8013 above the movable pitching accessory device 190, and the pre-winning flow-down device 8500 is filled with the opening 8013a. Fastened to the panel 8013.

  It is possible to enter a sphere from the top opening 8512 in the pre-winning flow down device 8500, but after launching the sphere from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4), the sphere enters the top opening 8512. In addition, the arrangement of nails to be planted near the top opening 8512 and the shape of the inclined channel 8513 of the pre-winning downflow device 8500 are set so that at least one second elapses before entering the internal channel INR8. Is done.

  Of the balls that flow down the game area, a ball that has entered the top opening 8512 of the pre-winning flow-down device 8500 approaches the movable piece 190a of the movable winning ball accessory device 190 through the internal flow path INR8 of the pre-winning flow-down device 8500. Flow down in a manner. The configuration of the pre-winning flow down device 8500 and the position of the opening 8013a so that the balls discharged from the pre-winning flow down device 8500 can enter the movable winning ball accessory device 190 when the movable piece 190a is in the open state. Is set. In the present embodiment, the configuration of the pre-winning flow down device 8500 and the position of the opening 8013a are such that one second elapses after the ball is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 until it reaches the open movable piece 190a. Is set.

  The pre-winning downflow device 8500 is formed of a light-transmitting material and is disposed on the front side of the game board 8013 in a manner to close the opening 8013a and fastened and fixed to the game board 8013, and the front side device 8510 A back side device 8540 that is fitted into the opening 8013a of the game board 8013 on the back side of the game board 8013 and extends to the rear of the game board 8013 and fastened and fixed to the game board 8013, and the back side device 8540. A transmission device 8600 that transmits a driving force to a retracting member 8520 that moves in and out of the internal flow path INR8 and is disposed in the back side device 8540, and a driving motor KM1 that generates a driving force transmitted by the transmission device 8600 , KM2 are mainly provided.

  According to the pre-winning flow down device 8500 in the present embodiment, the front side device 8510 and the back side device 8540 can be individually fastened and fixed to the game board 8013, so that it is unnecessary to replace all of them when it is desired to change a part. For example, when it is desired to change the decoration on the front side surface of the main body plate portion 8511 of the front side device 8510, only the front side device 8510 can be removed from the game board 8013 and replaced. At this time, as will be described later, the transmission rod 8530 of the front side device 8510 and the second transmission rod 8550 of the back side device 8540 are moved from the direction in which the front side device 8510 and the back side device 8540 move close together at the time of assembly (front-rear direction). The connecting pieces 8534 and 8555 can be connected to each other (see FIG. 152). Thereby, the front side apparatus 8510 and the back side apparatus 8540 can be easily exchanged individually.

  Details of the front side apparatus 8510 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134A is a rear view of the front device 8510, and FIG. 134B is a cross-sectional view of the front device 8510 taken along the line CXXXIb-CXXXIb in FIG. 134A.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the front-side device 8510 is a plate-shaped member that is a framework, and has a main body plate portion 8511 having an opening portion 8514 that opens toward the back side, and loosely fits in the opening portion 8514 and appears in the front-rear direction. A retractable member 8520 that can be configured and a transmission rod 8530 accommodated in the opening 8514 below the retractable member 8520 are mainly provided.

  The main body plate portion 8511 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 (a) is a rear view of the main body plate portion 8511, and FIG. 135 (b) is a side view of the main body plate portion 8511 in the direction of the arrow CXXXVb in FIG. 135 (a). FIG. 135A is a partial cross-sectional view of the main body plate portion 8511 taken along the line CXXXVc-CXXXVc in FIG. 135A, and FIG. 135D is a partial cross-sectional view of the main body plate portion 8511 taken along the line CXXXVd-CXXXVd in FIG. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the main body plate portion 8511 has a top opening 8512 that opens a ball that flows down on the front side of the game board 8013 so as to be receivable, and a ball that enters the top opening 8512 obliquely downward and rearward. A half-pipe-shaped inclined channel 8513 to flow down, an opening 8514 formed as an opening recessed from the back surface of the main body plate portion 8511 toward the front surface and opened to the back surface, and from the opening 8514 in the vertical direction. And a plurality of loose fitting recessed portions 8515 that are recessed upward along the line (slightly inclined).

  The main body plate portion 8511 is formed by a thin plate member having an opening 8514 and a thick plate member fixed to the rear of the thin plate member. After the loose fitting recessed portion 8515 is recessed in the thick plate member in advance, the thin plate member and the thick plate member are fixed, whereby the main body plate portion 8511 is manufactured.

  The front side surface of the main body plate portion 8511 is disposed to face the glass surface of the pachinko machine 10, and the player views the internal flow path INR8 described later through the front side surface of the main body plate portion 8511. Various decorations can be applied to the front side surface of the main body plate portion 8511, and the mode is not limited. In the present embodiment, for example, a location where the movement range of each transmission rod 8530, 8550 is invisible from the front side (a location overlapping each transmission rod 8530, 8550 in the front-rear direction, that is, the upper end of the transmission rod 8530 shown in FIG. 153 The position extending from the position to the lower end position of the transmission rod 8530 shown in FIG. 154) is not transparent, and above the upper end positions of the transmission rods 8530 and 8550 arranged at the upper end position of the moving range. There is no non-transparent decoration, and the internal flow path INR8 is visible. Accordingly, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movement of each of the transmission rods 8530 and 8550, and the visibility of the internal flow path INR8 can be ensured. The non-transparent decoration may be provided in the left-right direction, or may be a position projected from the transmission rods 8530, 8550 in the front-rear direction (position spaced in the left-right direction).

  The loose fitting recessed portion 8515 includes a retaining portion 8515a that reduces the opening width on the back surface side in both the left and right directions at the back surface and the surface position. When the left and right width of the member inserted into the loose fitting recessed portion 8515 from below is smaller than the left and right width of the loose fitting recessed portion 8515 and larger than the left and right spacing of the retaining portions 8515a, the retaining portion 8515a. Thus, the member can be held in a state in which it is impossible to pull it out from the rear.

  136 (a) is a top view of the in / out member 8520, FIG. 136 (b) is a side view of the in / out member 8520 in the direction of arrow CXXXVIb in FIG. 136 (a), and FIG. It is a front view of the intrusion member 8520 in the arrow CXXXVIc direction view of Fig.136 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 136, the projecting / retracting member 8520 has a collision portion 8521 that sharpens in a manner that the left and right sides are inclined on the protruding tip side (right side of FIG. 136 (a)), and a root side (left side of FIG. 136 (a)) on the bottom surface. It mainly includes an inclined surface 8522 inclined upward and a pair of protruding portions 8523 protruding in the left-right direction at the root side end portion.

  The protruding portion 8523 is set such that the width between the protruding tips is smaller than the left and right width of the loose fitting recessed portion 8515 and larger than the left and right interval of the retaining portion 8515a. That is, since the projecting portion 8523 is hooked on the retaining portion 8515a in the assembled state (see FIG. 134), the retractable member 8520 cannot be pulled out from the main body plate portion 8511 in the front-rear direction. Are held (freely fitted).

  FIG. 137 (a) is a top view of the transmission rod 8530, FIG. 137 (b) is a side view of the transmission rod 8530 in the direction of the arrow CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137 (a), and FIG. 137 is a front view of a transmission rod 8530 when viewed in the direction of the arrow CXXXVIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 137, the transmission rod 8530 includes a main body bar portion 8531 formed of a bar member extending in the vertical direction, and a bulging portion 8532 that bulges at the upper end portion of the main body bar portion 8531. An inclined surface 8533 inclined in one direction (FIG. 137 (b) left-right direction) on the upper surface of the bulging portion 8532 and a direction intersecting with the extending direction of the main body rod portion 8531 from the lower end portion of the main body rod portion 8531 (see FIG. 137 (b) right side) and a connecting piece 8534 mainly provided.

  The inclined surface 8533 is formed on the same surface as the inclined surface 8522 of the protruding member 8520 when the protruding direction of the protruding member 8520 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 136 (b)) and the extending direction of the main body bar portion 8531 of the transmission rod 8530 are at right angles. (See FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, as the transmission rod 8530 moves up and down, the retracting member 8520 operates while rubbing the inclined surfaces 8522 and 8533.

  In the present embodiment, the inclined form of the inclined surface 8533 is such that the width direction of the main body bar portion 8531 (the vertical direction in FIG. 137 (b)) is shorter than the width direction of the main body rod portion 8531 (FIG. 137 (b)). ) The width in the front-rear direction) is longer. As an example, as shown in FIG. 137, the inclination angle of the inclined surface 8533 from the front-rear direction (FIG. 137 (b) left-right direction) is about 20 degrees.

  With reference to FIG. 138, the assembly method of the front side apparatus 8510 is demonstrated. FIG. 138 (a), FIG. 138 (b), and FIG. 138 (c) are cross-sectional views of the front-side device 8510 along the CXXXIb-CXXXIb line in FIG. 134 (a).

  FIG. 138 (a) shows a state immediately before assembling the in / out member 8520 to the main body plate portion 8511. As shown in FIG. 138 (a), the root part can be accommodated in the loose fitting recessed portion 8515 by moving the protruding and retracting member 8520 accommodated in the opening 8514 upward (see FIG. 138 (b)). ).

  FIG. 138 (b) shows a state immediately before the transmission rod 8530 is assembled to the main body plate portion 8511. As shown in FIG. 138 (b), by holding the retracting member 8520 above the opening 8514, a space below the retracting member 8520 is made, and the transmission rod 8530 is slid into the open space to open the opening. The main body bar portion 8531 of the transmission rod 8530 can be accommodated in the 8514. Since the opening portion 8514 does not penetrate, the transmission rod 8530 is positioned at a position where it abuts against the main body plate portion 8511.

  FIG. 138 (c) shows a state after the projecting member 8520 and the transmission rod 8530 are assembled to the main body plate portion 8511. As shown in FIG. 138 (c), when the load applied to the retracting member 8520 after the transmission rod 8530 is accommodated, the retracting member 8520 moves downward (downward in FIG. 138 (c)) by its own weight. The projecting / retracting member 8520 is lowered to a position where it comes into contact with the transmission rod 8530, and in the contact state, a load is applied to the transmission rod 8530 via the inclined surfaces 8522 and 8533. In this embodiment, since the inclined surfaces 8522 and 8533 are inclined upward toward the bottom surface side (the left side in FIG. 138 (c)) of the opening 8514, the load from the projecting member 8520 via the inclined surfaces 8522 and 8533 is transmitted. This occurs in the direction in which 8530 is pressed against the bottom surface of the opening 8514. That is, the transmission rod 8530 is prevented from dropping from the opening 8514 due to a load via the inclined surfaces 8522 and 8533.

  Further, when the transmission / reception member 8520 receives a load opposite to that of the transmission rod 8530, the transmission / reception member 8520 prevents the movement of the projection / retraction member 8520 to the opening 8514 when the transmission rod 8530 is accommodated in the opening 8514. . Therefore, the intruding member 8520 moves toward the back side in the loose fitting recessed portion 8515, but the protruding portion 8523 is caught by the retaining portion 8515a, and further movement is restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the intruding member 8520 from falling off the loose fitting recessed portion 8515.

  Accordingly, by lowering the in / out member 8520 with its own weight, the in / out member 8520 and the transmission rod 8530 can be temporarily fixed to the main body plate portion 8511. Thereby, in the state before fixing the front side apparatus 85100 to the game board 8013, it can be made unnecessary to hold the protruding and retracting member 8520 and the transmission rod 8530 so as not to fall. Furthermore, since the front side device 8510 can be assembled without a fastening member such as a fastening screw, the manufacturing efficiency of the front side device 8510 can be increased.

  FIG. 139 (a) is a front view of the back side device 8540 and the transmission device 8600, and FIG. 139 (b) is a side view of the back side device 8540 and the transmission device 8600. The back-side device 8540 is disposed at a position below the lower end of the main body plate portion 8541 that is a frame-shaped member, the ceiling plate portion 8542 disposed above the main body plate portion 8541, and the inclined flow path 8513. A distribution device 8543 that distributes the spheres to the left and right by a rotating operation, an extended floor portion 8544 that extends to the front side at the bottom of the main body plate portion 8541 and that forms the bottom surface of the internal flow path INR8, and a main body plate portion 8541 A rear cover member 8545 that mainly contacts and is fixed from the back side and accommodates a member in a space formed between them, and the above-described retractable member 8520 in the space between the main body plate portion 8541 and the rear cover member 8545 The second transmission rod 8550 for operating the retracting member 8520 is accommodated. The transmission device 8600 is disposed on the rear cover member 8545, which will be described in detail later.

  The pair of ceiling plate portions 8541 are formed so that the inner interval is slightly larger than the left and right width of the inclined flow path 8513, and in the assembled state, guide flow for guiding the sphere discharged from the inclined flow path 8513 in the vertical direction. Functions as a road.

  The extended floor portion 8544 has a configuration in which an upper surface 8544a is inclined downward in both the left and right directions from directly below the sorting device 8543. That is, although details will be described later, the spheres flowing down the front side of the ceiling plate portion 8542 and distributed to the sorting device 8543 roll along the inclination of the extended floor portion 8544, and the left and right sides of the extended floor portion 8544 It is discharged from the end.

  FIG. 140 is a rear view of the back-side device 8540, and FIG. 141 is a rear view of the main body plate portion 8541. In FIG. 140, illustration of the rear cover member 8545 and the transmission device 8600 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the projecting member 8520 and the second transmission rod 8550 are accommodated in the space on the back side of the main body plate portion 8541. That is, the main body plate portion 8541 has a support hole 8541a that is drilled in the front-rear direction so that the protruding and retracting member 8520 can be inserted, and a retaining member that reduces the opening width from both the left and right directions at the front end portion of the support hole 8541a. A portion 8541b and a protruding support portion 8541c that is a portion that guides the second transmission rod 8550 so as to be movable in one direction in a manner that intersects with the projecting member 8520 and protrudes from the back surface of the main body plate portion 8541. .

  The interval between the retaining portions 8541b is set to be smaller than the interval between the projecting tips of the projecting portions 8523. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the intruding member 8520 from falling off from the front side.

  The protruding support portion 8541c is disposed in a portion excluding the gap V81 that extends by an equal length in a direction orthogonal to the straight line L81 with reference to a straight line L81 that passes through the center of the support hole 8541a and is orthogonal to the bottom side. A second transmission rod 8550, which will be described later, can move through the gap V81.

  142 (a) is a top view of the second transmission rod 8550, and FIG. 142 (b) is a side view of the second transmission rod 8550 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLIIb in FIG. 142 (a). c) is a front view of the second transmission rod 8550 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLIIc in FIG. 142 (b).

  The second transmission rod 8550 includes a main body bar portion 8551 formed of a bar member extending along the vertical direction, a bulge portion 8552 that bulges at the upper end portion of the main body bar portion 8551, and a bulge portion thereof. An inclined surface 8553 that inclines in one direction (FIG. 142 (b) left-right direction) on the upper surface of 8552, and a direction that intersects the extending direction of the main body bar 8551 from the lower end of the main body bar 8551 (right in FIG. 142 (b)). An intermediate piece 8554 extending in the direction), and a connecting piece 8555 extending in a direction perpendicular to the plane formed by the main body bar portion 8551 and the intermediate piece 8554 from the extended tip of the intermediate piece 8554, Is mainly provided.

  The main body bar portion 8551 has a width dimension slightly shorter than the width of the gap V81 between the protruding support portions 8541c. Accordingly, the main body bar portion 8551 can be slidably disposed between the projecting support portions 8541.

  The bulging portion 8552 is formed in such a manner that the left-right width (the width in the left-right direction in FIG. 142 (c)) is longer than the width of the gap V81. Thereby, it can prevent that the bulging part 8552 is hooked on the protrusion support part 8541c, and the 2nd transmission rod 8550 falls from between the protrusion support parts 8541c.

  The inclined surface 8553 is an inclined surface 8522 of the intruding member 8520 when the extending direction of the intruding member 8520 (FIG. 136 (b) left-right direction) and the extending direction of the main body bar portion 8551 of the second transmission rod 8550 are at right angles. And an inclined angle that abuts on the surface (see FIG. 155). For this reason, as the second transmission rod 8550 moves up and down, the retracting member 8520 operates while rubbing the inclined surfaces 8522 and 8553.

  In the present embodiment, the inclined aspect of the inclined surface 8553 is such that the width of the main body bar portion 8551 in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 137 (b) vertical direction) is shorter than the width direction of the main body bar portion 8551 (FIG. 137 (b)). The width of the (direction) is longer. As an example, as shown in FIG. 142, the inclination angle of the inclined surface 8553 from the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 142 (b)) is about 20 degrees. In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the inclined surface 8533 is the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface 8553, but these may be different values.

  The connecting piece 8555 is a portion that engages with the connecting piece 8534 of the transmission rod 8530 in the assembled state (see FIG. 131), and the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 are integrally operated by the engagement. Can be made.

  The assembly of the retracting member 8520 and the second transmission rod 8550 to the back side device 8540 will be described. The projecting member 8520 is inserted into the support hole 8541a from the back surface side of the main body plate portion 8541, and then the second transmission rod 8550 is moved close to the main body plate portion 8541 from the back surface side of the main body plate portion 8541. The second transmission rod 8550 is fitted into the main body plate portion 8541 in a manner of being fitted into the gap V81. Thereafter, the rear cover member 8545 is fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 8541, so that the retractable member 8520 and the second transmission rod 8550 can be held between the main body plate portion 8541 and the rear cover member 8545 so as not to fall off. .

  FIG. 143 is a front perspective view of the transmission device 8600, and FIG. 144 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission device 8600. In FIG. 143 and FIG. 144, the left transmission device 8600 is illustrated among the symmetrical transmission devices 8600 arranged in a pair of left and right. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the connecting piece 8555 of the second transmission rod 8550 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the transmission device 8600 is a device disposed on the rear cover member 8545 of the back-side device 8540 and is rotatably supported by the rear cover member 8545 in front of the rear cover member 8545. A first transmission member 8610, a second transmission member 8620 connected to the first transmission member 8610 and supported by the rear lid member 8545 so as to be slidable in a linear direction, and disposed on the back side of the rear lid member 8545. And a drive motor KM1 that generates a driving force for driving the first transmission member 8610. The first transmission member 8610 and the second transmission member 8620 are members that transmit the driving force of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 to the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 described above.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the rear cover member 8545 is formed of a through hole 8545a through which the drive shaft of the drive motor KM1 is inserted, and a pair of flat plates extending parallel to each other on the front side. And a retaining protrusion 8545c extending in a direction facing each other from the front side end of the support plate 8545b.

  The retaining protrusion 8545c has a thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the first transmission member 8610 (direction in which the drive shaft extends) and a thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the second transmission member 8620 on the front side of the rear lid member 8545. The distance between the protrusions 8545c is set shorter than the length of the second transmission member 8620 in the longitudinal direction. As a result, the first transmission member 8610 and the second transmission member 8620 can be stacked between the front surface of the rear lid member 8545 and the retaining protrusion 8545c, and the second transmission member 8620 can be disengaged in the front-rear direction. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the first transmission member 8610 and the second transmission member 8620 can be fixed to the rear lid member 8545 without a fastening member. Here, a method of attaching the first transmission member 8610 and the second transmission member 8620 to the rear cover member 8545 will be described.

  First, the drive motor KM1 is fixed to the back side of the rear cover member 8545. In this state, the drive shaft of the drive motor KM1 protrudes to the front side of the rear cover member 8545 through the through hole 8545a.

  Next, the first transmission member 8610 is brought close to the rear cover member 8545 from the front side of the rear cover member 8545 so that the drive shaft of the drive motor KM1 is inserted into the center hole 8612 of the first transmission member 8610. 8610 is connected to the drive motor KM1. In this state, there is no retaining member that prevents the first transmission member 8610 from being pulled out of the drive shaft. Therefore, the first transmission member 8610 can be easily removed.

  Next, in a mode in which the transmission protrusion 8613 of the first transmission member 8610 passes between the lower notches 8624 of the second transmission member 8620, the second transmission member 8620 is moved in the longitudinal direction of the support plate 8545b (second transmission member 8620). The second transmission member 8620 can be inserted (accommodated) between the first transmission member 8610 and the retaining protrusion 8545c. By sliding the second transmission member 8620 until the transmission protrusion 8613 passes through the upper end of the lower notch 8624, the transmission protrusion 8613 can be accommodated in the incomplete arc hole 8625 of the second transmission member 8620.

  The incomplete arc hole 8625 is configured as a closed hole that does not communicate with the outside except the lower notch 8624. Therefore, the transmission protrusion 8613 does not come off the incomplete arc hole 8625 unless it passes through the lower notch 8624. Here, as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the lower notch 8624 is connected to the incomplete arc hole 8625 in such a manner that it extends downward from the incomplete arc hole 8625. The transmission protrusion 8613 does not pass through the lower notch 8624 as long as it moves under its own weight. In other words, as long as an external force is not applied (for example, an operator lifts the second transmission member 8620, etc.), the second transmission member 8620 can be prevented from being detached from the rear lid member 8545, and the first transmission member is left as it is. 8610 and the second transmission member 8620 can be interlocked.

  In addition, since the second transmission member 8620 is prevented from being detached in the front-rear direction, the first transmission member 8610 sandwiched between the rear cover member 8545 on the back side of the second transmission member 8620 is disposed in the front-rear direction. It can be prevented from coming off.

  Accordingly, a separate member such as a cover member that covers the second transmission member 8620 from the front can be dispensed with and a fastening member associated therewith can be dispensed with, thereby reducing the number of members, and the first transmission member 8610 and the second transmission member 8620. Can be configured to be interlocked with each other.

  Here, although the details will be described later, an outline of interlocking between the first transmission member 8610 and the second transmission member 8620 will be described. By this interlock, the driving force of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 is transmitted to the second transmission rod 8550.

  First, when the drive motors KM1 and KM2 are driven to rotate, the first transmission member 8610 rotates accordingly. By this rotation, the transmission protrusion 8613 of the first transmission member 8610 is displaced along a circular path coaxial with the rotation path of the first transmission member 8610. The transmission protrusion 8613 is inserted into the incomplete arc hole 8625 of the second transmission member 8620, and when the traveling direction of the transmission protrusion 8613 and the extending direction of the incomplete arc hole 8625 intersect, the transmission protrusion 8613. The driving force is transmitted from the second transmission member 8620 to the second transmission member 8620.

  Although the second transmission member 8620 can be displaced by the driving force transmitted from the transmission protrusion 8613, the movement of the second transmission member 8620 is restricted by the support plate portion 8545 b of the rear lid member 8545. Therefore, the moving direction of the second transmission member 8620 is limited to the extending direction (linear direction) of the support plate portion 8545b. Accordingly, the second transmission member 8620 performs a linear reciprocating operation in accordance with the rotation operation of the first transmission member 8610.

  FIG. 145 (a) is a front view of the first transmission member 8610, and FIG. 145 (b) is a side view of the first transmission member 8610 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVb in FIG. 145 (a). The first transmission member 8610 has a disc-shaped main body plate portion 8611, a central hole 8612 that is drilled at the center position of the main body plate portion 8611 and through which the drive shafts of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 are inserted and fixed, and an eccentric position. In a mode in which the outer diameter is continuously reduced clockwise from a front view (FIG. 145 (a) clockwise) from a transmission protrusion 8613 protruding in the plate thickness direction from the outer position near the transmission protrusion 8613. And a reduced diameter portion 8614 to be formed.

  The reduced diameter portion 8614 is set such that the dimensional difference from the outer diameter of the main body plate portion 8611 is equal to or larger than the movement width of the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 described later. Accordingly, when the first transmission member 8610 is rotated, the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 are switched between a contact with the main body plate portion 8611 and a contact with the reduced diameter portion 8614. The transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 can be operated.

  146 (a) is a front view of the second transmission member 8620, and FIG. 146 (b) is a side view of the second transmission member 8620 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). The second transmission member 8620 includes a main body plate portion 8621 formed on a horizontally long rectangular plate, an arc bulging portion 8622 that bulges upward from the main body plate portion 8621, and left and right ends of the main body plate portion 8621. Guided arm portion 8623 extending outward in the left-right direction from the upper portion, lower notch 8624 cut linearly from the lower end of the main body plate portion 8621, and left and right directions at the upper end portion of the lower notch 8624 An incomplete arc hole 8625 that is cut into a circular arc shape and an end hole 8626 that extends linearly in the left-right direction from the left and right outer ends of the incomplete arc hole 8625 are mainly provided. In FIG. 146 (a), the center hole 8612 of the first transmission member 8610, the movement locus of the transmission protrusion 8613, and the outer shape of the main body plate portion 8611 when the second transmission member 8620 is disposed at the upper end position of the movement range. Is illustrated with imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 146, the outer shape of the arc bulging portion 8622 is a circle formed by the outer shape of the main body plate portion 8611 of the first transmission member 8610 when the second transmission member 8620 is disposed at the upper end position of the movement range. And the same shape in the front-rear direction.

  The incomplete arc hole 8625 is formed in a shape including the movement locus of the transmission protrusion 8613 of the first transmission member 8610 in the front-rear direction when the second transmission member 8620 is disposed at the upper end position of the movement range. The gap width is designed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the transmission protrusion 8613 of the first transmission member 8610. That is, when the transmission protrusion 8613 is moved (the first transmission member 8610 is rotated) in a state where the second transmission member 8620 is disposed at the upper end position of the movement range, the second transmission member 8620 is maintained at the upper end position. Can be interlocked in such a manner.

  The guided arm portion 8623 is a portion that is disposed to face the support plate portion 8545b and whose operation is restricted by the support plate portion 8545b. The length between the left and right outer ends of the guided arm portion 8623 is set to be slightly smaller than the gap between the support plate portions 8545b.

  The lower notch 8624 is set so that the width of the notch is longer than the diameter of the transmission protrusion 8613. In the end hole 8626, the distance between the outer ends in the left-right direction is set to a length equal to or greater than the diameter of the movement locus of the transmission protrusion 8613.

  In addition, as described above, the lower notch 8624 has an effect of reducing the operating resistance of the second transmission member 8620 in addition to an effect as a notch that allows the transmission protrusion 8613 to pass during assembly.

  That is, the second transmission member 8620 performs a linear operation in accordance with the rotation operation of the first transmission member 8610, and the operation direction is restricted by the pair of support plate portions 8545b. Here, if the gap between the second transmission member 8620 and the support plate portion 8545b becomes too small due to dimensional errors of the second transmission member 8620 and the support plate portion 8545b, the operating resistance increases and the driving motors NM1 and KM2 On the other hand, there arises a problem that an excessive driving force is required. On the other hand, if the gap between the second transmission member 8620 and the support plate 8545b becomes too large, the posture of the second transmission member 8620 is difficult to maintain. In addition, precision is required for dimensional management, and it becomes difficult to control manufacturing costs.

  In contrast, in the second transmission member 8620, the lower notch 8624 is disposed in the direction in which the second transmission member 8620 and the support plate 8545b leave a gap, so even if the gap becomes smaller (the gap disappears). Even if the lower notch 8624 is vacant, the main body plate portion 8621 of the second transmission member 8620 can be bent, and the pressing force generated between the second transmission member 8620 and the support plate portion 8545b can be reduced. It can be reduced (can be absorbed by bending deformation).

  Therefore, in the design value, the gap between the second transmission member 8620 and the support plate portion 8545b is set to a small side, and the attitude of the second transmission member 8620 is increased even if the dimensional error is increased to the maximum (even if the gap is increased). Control of the dimensions within a range that can maintain the above-mentioned range causes the transmission device 8600 to malfunction (the movement resistance of the second transmission member 8620 becomes excessive and the operation stops, or the second transmission member 8620 changes its posture). Can be prevented. Thereby, as a dimension between the dimension of the 2nd transmission member 8620 and the support plate part 8545b, an allowable dimension error can be enlarged and manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, an aspect of transmission of driving force between the transmission device 8600 and the second transmission rod 8550 will be described. As described above, since the second transmission rod 8550 operates integrally with the transmission rod 8530, the operation of the second transmission rod 8550 illustrated in FIG. 147 may be recognized as the operation of the transmission rod 8530. .

  FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (f) are front views of the transmission device 8600 and the second transmission rod 8550 for explaining the operation of the transmission device 8600 in time series. In order to facilitate understanding, the first transmission member 8610 is illustrated with an imaginary line and the upper portion of the second transmission rod 8550 is omitted. Note that FIG. 147 illustrates an operation in the case where the first transmission member 8610 rotates counterclockwise. In FIG. 147, the second transmission rods 8550 are also referred to as second transmission rods 8550A, 8550B, and 8550C in order from the right side of the front view of FIG. 147 (from the side where the sphere enters).

  FIG. 147 (a) shows a state in which the transmission protrusion 8613 is disposed in the end hole 8626 immediately before entering the imperfect arc hole 8625. FIG. In this state, as shown in FIG. 147 (a), the second transmission member 8620 is disposed below the upper end position, and each second transmission rod 8550 contacts the reduced diameter portion 8614 of the first transmission member 8610. Touch.

  FIG. 147 (b) shows a state after the first transmission member 8610 rotates counterclockwise from FIG. 147 (a) and the transmission protrusion 8613 enters the imperfect arc hole 8625. FIG. In this state, the second transmission member 8620 is disposed at the upper end position, and each second transmission rod 8550 contacts the upper surface of the second transmission member 8620. Since the movement of the second transmission member 8620 until it is arranged at the upper end position is a vertical movement, the respective second transmission rods 8550 are simultaneously lifted from the position shown in FIG. 147 (a).

  FIG. 147 (c) shows a state in which the first transmission member 8610 has rotated counterclockwise from FIG. 147 (b) and the transmission protrusion 8613 has moved to the end position of the incomplete arc hole 8625. In this state, since the transmission protrusion 8613 only moves inside the incomplete arc hole 8625 along the extending direction of the incomplete arc hole 8625, the second transmission member 8620 does not move from the position shown in FIG. 147 (b). Instead, it stays at the top position.

  FIG. 147 (d) shows a state in which the first transmission member 8610 is rotated counterclockwise from FIG. 147 (c) and the transmission projection 8613 is moved from the incomplete arc hole 8625 to the end hole 8626. In this state, as the transmission protrusion 8613 moves downward, the second transmission member 8620 also moves downward, but the outermost of the second transmission rod 8550 and the main body plate portion 8611 of the first transmission member 8610. Since the radial surface (outer peripheral surface) abuts, the second transmission rod 8550 is restricted from being lowered by the main body plate portion 8611 and remains in the position illustrated in FIG. 147 (c).

  FIG. 147 (e) illustrates a state in which the first transmission member 8610 rotates counterclockwise from FIG. 147 (d) and the reduced diameter portion 8614 is disposed to face the second transmission rod 8550A. In this state, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 147 (d), the second transmission rod 8550A moves downward by the difference between the reduced diameter portion 8614 and the main body plate portion 8611. On the other hand, the remaining second transmission rods 8550B and 8550C remain at the positions shown in FIG. 147 (d).

  FIG. 147 (f) shows a state in which the first transmission member 8610 rotates counterclockwise from FIG. 147 (e) and the reduced diameter portion 8614 is disposed to face the second transmission rod 8550B. In this state, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 147 (e), the second transmission rod 8550B is lowered by the difference between the reduced diameter portion 8614 and the main body plate portion 8611. On the other hand, the remaining second transmission rod 8550C remains in the position shown in FIG. 147 (e).

  When the first transmission member 8610 continues to rotate in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 147 (f), the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 147 (a), and the second transmission rod 8550C is also shown in FIG. 147 (f). It moves down from the position shown.

  Therefore, when the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C are moved up by the transmission device 8600, the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C are moved up simultaneously and when the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C are moved down, the second transmission rod 8550A to 8550C is moved from the entrance side. The bars 8550A to 8550C can be moved downward in order. That is, the operation mode (operation order) can be switched in accordance with the operation direction of the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C.

  According to this embodiment, the arrangement of the second transmission member 8620 corresponds to the arrangement of the transmission protrusion 8613 on a one-to-one basis. For this reason, for example, in the case where the mutual arrangement is shifted due to the presence or absence of rubbing between members, a measure for keeping the degree of rubbing within a desired range can be made unnecessary. Further, when the second transmission member 8620 is linked to the first transmission member 8610, the second transmission member 8620 can be linked with high accuracy regardless of the operating speed.

  Next, the internal flow path INR8 will be described. FIG. 148 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device 8500 along the line CXLVIII-CXLVIII in FIG. 131. In FIG. 148, the retracted member 8520 in the retracted state disposed on the outer side of the internal flow path INR8 is illustrated by a solid line, and the retracted member 8520 in the projecting state disposed on the inward side. Is illustrated with imaginary lines. Further, the state illustrated by the solid line corresponds to the state of FIG. The internal flow path INR8 indicates a pair of flow paths through which the balls distributed to the sorting device 8543 (see FIG. 133) flow down. In FIG. 148, one of the flow paths (the left side in FIG. 131) is described. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the internal flow path INR8 has a lower side surface that is the upper surface 8544a of the extended floor portion 8544, a front side surface that is the main body plate portion 8511 of the front side device 8510, and a rear side surface that is the main body plate portion 8541 of the rear side device 8540. Each of the flow paths is configured. Although not shown in FIG. 148, the upper side surface is formed by the ceiling plate portion 8542, and the flow path is configured.

  The internal flow path INR8 is configured as a section extending in the left-right direction in FIG. 148 from the ball entry position Start to the arrival position Goal within a range in which the ball can roll by the extended floor 8544. That is, the internal flow path INR8 includes a first region Rt that is disposed to face the retracting member 8520A, a second region Rm that is disposed to face the retracting member 8520B, and a third region Rb that is disposed to face the retracting member 8520C. The description of being configured and discharged from the internal flow path INR8 means discharged from the third region Rb.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the upper surface 8544a of the extended floor portion 8544 is formed to be wide in the front and rear (wide enough to allow a plurality of spheres to be arranged), and the extended floor portion 8544 extends at an intermediate position in the front and rear direction. A concave groove 8544b extending in a concave cross section along the installation direction is provided.

  In the lower end portion (left end portion in FIG. 148) of the extended floor portion 8544, since a long hole 8544c having a length in which two balls are arranged in the front-rear direction is formed, a ball is formed at the lower end portion of the extended floor portion 8544. Even when a plurality of particles arrive at the same time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging.

  The ball that has passed through the long hole 8544c is discharged to the front side of the game board 8013 (see FIG. 131) from the flow path below, and rolls on the upper surface of the movable piece 190a in the open state, thereby moving the movable ball accessory device 190. It is possible to enter.

  The flow down mode of the sphere rolling on the internal flow path INR8 will be described. First, when the retracting member 8520 is in the retracted state (the solid line state in FIG. 148), since the rolling ball guided by the recessed groove 8544b and the retracting member 8520 do not come into contact with each other, the ball does not contact the recessed groove 8544b. It rolls and rolls the internal flow path INR8 in the left-right direction in FIG. 148 along the first path RF.

  Even in the retracted state of the in / out member 8520, the tip of the in / out member 8520 protrudes from the front side device 8510 and the back side device 8540 to the internal flow path INR8 side. The ball that rolls off the position away from the recessed groove 8544b is bounced back by being brought into contact with the protruding portion of the projecting member 8520 and rebounded toward the recessed groove 8544b. In other words, the retracted retractable member 8520 can move the sphere that flows away from the recessed groove 8544b toward the recessed groove 8544b. In other words, in the retracted state of the retracting member 8520, the sphere can be prevented from flowing out of the recessed groove 8544b.

  On the other hand, when the intruding member 8520 is in the overhanging state (the state of the imaginary line in FIG. 148), each time it reaches the recessed groove 8544b, the ball is likely to be guided into the recessed groove 8544b. Makes contact with the first path RF and rolls along the second path RS that bends back and forth while avoiding the retracting member 8520.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the flow path of the sphere is constituted by a first path RF and a second path RS. In the present embodiment, the first route RF and the second route RS intersect on the recessed groove 8544b, and the triangle formed by the first route RF and the second route RS with the intersecting position as the apex is a normal. The arrangement of the in / out members 8520 and the shape of the internal flow path INR8 are set so as to form a triangle. Therefore, for example, on the assumption that the sphere rolls without decelerating, when the sphere rolls to the intersection position of the first route RF and the second route RS, the time for flowing down the second route RS is: This is twice the time required to flow down the first path RF. This is the difference between flowing down along two sides of an equilateral triangle or flowing down along one side. That is, in this embodiment, the time required for the sphere to flow down can be changed depending on whether the intruding member 8520 is in the retracted state or in the overhanging state.

  FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device 8500 along the line CXLVIII-CXLVIII in FIG. 131. Note that FIG. 149 shows a case where all the protruding and retracting members 8520 are in the overhanging state. The state shown in FIG. 149 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 147 (b).

  In the state shown in FIG. 149, the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 has a flow path defined by the retracting member 8520, and flows down the internal flow path INR8 along the second path RS. That is, while bending in the front-rear direction, it flows down in the extending direction of the internal flow path INR8 at the speed of the left-right direction component perpendicular to the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, even if the flow velocity of the sphere does not change, the flow direction of the sphere is switched, so that it is necessary for the sphere to pass through the internal flow path INR8 as compared with the case where the sphere flows to the left along the recessed groove 8544b. The time will be longer.

  In other words, when flowing down the second route RS, the flow direction of the sphere also has a front-rear direction component, and the left-right direction component is half that when flowing down the first route RF, so that the sphere is in the second route RS. 2 times as long as the sphere flows down the first path RF.

  In the present embodiment, even when the projecting member 8520 is in the overhanging state, the sphere is not stopped, and the speed in the left-right direction of the sphere is only decelerated (the sphere is delayed). Therefore, as compared with the case where the sphere is stopped, even if a plurality of spheres continuously enter the top opening 8512 (see FIG. 132), It is possible to reduce the possibility that the entrance is inhibited.

  Thus, while the top opening 8512 is always in a state where a sphere can enter, it is possible to prevent the next sphere from entering due to the action of the sphere and to prevent the entrance to the heaven opening 8512. The arrangement of the stopper device that regulates at predetermined time intervals can be eliminated.

  150 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow-down device 8500 along the line CXLVIII-CXLVIII in FIG. 131. In FIG. 150, only the intruding member 8520A on the top opening 8512 side is in the retracted state, and the remaining intruding members 8520B and 8520C are in the overhanging state. The state shown in FIG. 150 corresponds to the state shown in FIG.

  In the state shown in FIG. 150, the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 flows down the first path RF in the first region Rt that is disposed opposite to the in / out member 8520A, while the ball that is disposed opposite to the in / out member 8520B. In the third region Rb disposed opposite to the two regions Rm and the intruding member 8520C, the flow path is defined by the intruding member 8520, and flows down the internal flow path INR8 along the second route RS.

  That is, immediately after entering the internal flow path INR8, while flowing down at the shortest distance in the left-right direction, the sphere becomes slow from the middle (the velocity component of the sphere in the left-right direction becomes smaller by bending). The ball flows down.

  FIG. 151 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device 8500 along the line CXLVIII-CXLVIII in FIG. 131. In FIG. 151, the projecting members 8520A and 8520B on the top opening 8512 side are in the retracted state, and the remaining projecting members 8520C are in the projecting state. The state shown in FIG. 151 corresponds to the state shown in FIG.

  In the state shown in FIG. 151, the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 flows down the first path RF in the first region Rt that is disposed to face the retracting member 8520A and the second region Rm that is disposed to face the retracting member 8520B. On the other hand, in the third region Rb arranged to face the intruding member 8520C, the flow path is defined by the intruding member 8520, and flows down the internal flow path INR8 along the second path RS.

  That is, immediately after entering the internal flow path INR8, while flowing down at the shortest distance in the left-right direction, the sphere becomes slow from the middle (the velocity component of the sphere in the left-right direction becomes smaller by bending). The ball flows down.

  In the present embodiment, the state changes illustrated in order from FIG. 148 to FIG. 151 occur at intervals shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through the internal flow path INR8. Therefore, the state of the in / out member 8520 changes while the sphere is flowing down the internal flow path INR8, and the flow path of the sphere is switched in real time. Thereby, the space | interval of a sphere can be shortened and a continuous ball (a sphere which flows down continuously) can be formed. Details thereof will be described later.

  152 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device 8500 along the CLII-CLII line of FIG. In FIG. 152, illustration of the transmission device 8600 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 152, the projecting member 8520 and the transmission rod 8530 are disposed in the space between the main body plate portion 8511 and the back side device 8540 in the assembled state.

  The extended floor portion 8544 of the back side device 8540 has a rectangular cross section with a width smaller than that of the recessed groove 8544b inside the recessed groove 8544b (lower direction in FIG. 152 (direction perpendicular to the upper surface 8544a of the extended floor portion 8544)). A long support hole 8544d drilled to the inside, and an overhanging member 8544e supported inside the long support hole 8544d so as to be vertically movable and supported by the second transmission rod 8550.

  The overhanging member 8544e moves up and down as the second transmission rod 8550 moves up and down, and the upper end of the overhanging member 8544e projects upward from the lower surface of the recessed groove 8544b and the lower surface of the recessed groove 8544b sinks downward. It is comprised from the shape which can form both.

  FIG. 153 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device 8500 along the CLII-CLII line of FIG. FIG. 153 shows a state in which the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 are arranged at the upper end position of the movement range (see FIG. 147 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 153, when the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 are arranged at the upper end position of the movement range, the projecting member 8520 is in the projecting state, and the projecting member 8544e is below the recessed groove 8544b. An overhanging state that projects upward from the side surface is formed.

  The projecting member 8544e projects to a position where the projecting member 8544e interferes with the lower end of the rolling ball guided by the recessed groove 8544b. As a result, the sphere can be pushed out from the recessed groove 8544b, and the guiding effect of the recessed groove 8544b can be eliminated (the load required to push the sphere in the direction intersecting the recessed groove 8544b can be reduced). it can).

  The overhang member 8544e is disposed below the upper surface 8544a in the overhang state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid collision with the sphere flowing down in the direction intersecting with the recessed groove 8544b as much as possible.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the movement of the retracting member 8520 from the retracted state to the extended state is performed in the horizontal direction (front-rear direction, left-right direction in FIG. 153). Therefore, resistance caused by gravity can be reduced when the intruding member 8520 is moved.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the inclination angles of the inclined surfaces 8533 and 8553 are set to be loose with respect to the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 152), so in the state change of the state shown in FIGS. 152 and 153 Compared with the distance (front-rear direction distance) in which the in / out member 8520 moves, the distance (in FIG. 152 vertical direction distance) in which each transmission rod 8530, 8550 moves can be shortened. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the change in state of each of the transmission rods 8530 and 8550 by visual recognition, compared to grasping the change in state of the retractable member 8520.

  FIG. 154 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device 8500 along the line CLII-CLII in FIG. FIG. 154 shows a state after the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 are moved from the state shown in FIG. 153 to the lower end position of the movement range (see FIG. 147 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 154, when the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 move to the lower end position of the movement range, the protruding and retracting member 8520 whose movement direction is limited to the horizontal direction is maintained in the protruding state, and the movement direction is The overhanging member 8544e, which is the direction along the top and bottom, forms a retracted state that sinks downward below the bottom surface of the recessed groove 8544b as the second transmission rod 8550 that supports it descends.

  The state shown in FIG. 153 and the state shown in FIG. 154 are the same in the arrangement of the in / out member 8520, but the action of the in / out member 8520 on the sphere is different. That is, in FIG. 153, after the ball flowing down the internal flow path INR8 collides with the retracting member 8520, the retracting member 8520 maintains the protruding state and the position is fixed, but in FIG. 154, the internal flow path INR8 is When the falling ball collides with the retracting member 8520, since there is no member that supports the retracting member 8520 from the rear, the retracting member 8520 is displaced toward the retracted position by the load from the ball.

  Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the non-transparent decoration applied to the front side surface of the main body plate portion 8511 prevents the player from grasping the positions of the transmission rods 8530 and 8550. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish between the state shown in FIG. 153 and the state shown in FIG.

  Therefore, even if the in / out member 8520 is in an overhanging state and viewed as a similar state by the player, in the state shown in FIG. 153, the ball flows down the internal flow path INR8 along the second route RS, In the state shown in FIG. 154, the sphere flows down the internal flow path INR8 along the first path RF. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the flow-down mode when the ball flows down the internal flow path INR8. Thus, it is difficult to determine the target timing for a player who visually recognizes the state of the in / out member 8520, launches a sphere using the state as the mark, and enters the ball into the internal flow path INR8. can do.

  Since the groups of the projecting members 8520 operate at different timings (see FIG. 147), the difference between FIGS. 153 and 154 occurs at different timings for the groups of the projecting members 8520. Therefore, it can be made more difficult for the player to visually recognize the state of the in / out member 8520 and determine the timing of launching.

  In the state shown in FIG. 154, the overhang member 8544e does not interfere with the lower end portion of the ball that rolls while being guided by the recessed groove 8544b. Therefore, the guiding effect of the sphere by the recessed groove 8544b (the effect of sufficiently securing the pressing force required to move the sphere guided by the recessed groove 8544b in the direction intersecting the extending direction of the recessed groove 8544b) Can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sphere is detached from the recessed groove 8544b due to the load applied to the sphere by the retracting member 8520 while the retracting member 8520 collides with the sphere and pushes the retracting member 8520 into the retracted state. The sphere can be stably flowed down by the first path RF.

  FIG. 155 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning flow down device 8500 along the line CLV-CLV in FIG. In FIG. 155, the transmission device 8600 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in the assembled state, the retracting member 8520 and the second transmission rod 8550 are disposed in the space between the main body plate portion 8541 and the rear lid member 8545 of the back side device 8540. In addition, since the effect | action given to the intruding member 8520 when the 2nd transmission rod 8550 moves up and down is the same as the effect | action demonstrated in FIGS. 152-154, description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the operation of the retracting member 8520 of the first operation pattern in the present embodiment and the length of time required for the sphere to pass through the internal flow path INR8 that changes accordingly will be described. In the following description, the projecting member 8520 that contacts the second transmission rod 8550A is contacted with the projecting member 8520A, and the projecting member 8520 that contacts the second transmission rod 8550B is contacted with the projecting member 8520B and the second transmission rod 8550C. The intruding member 8520 that makes contact operation is also referred to as an intruding member 8520C.

  FIG. 156 (a) is a diagram illustrating a change in time of the retracting member 8520A in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 156 (b) is a diagram illustrating a change in time of the retracting member 8520B in the first operation pattern. Yes, FIG. 156 (c) is a diagram showing a change in time of the protruding and retracting member 8520C in the first operation pattern.

  In FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (c), the horizontal axis is shown as the phase change of the first transmission member 8610. In other words, the rotation angle of about 5 degrees counterclockwise from FIG. 147 (b) is 0 degree, and the rotation angle when rotating counterclockwise from there is from 156 (a) to 156 (c). Corresponds to the value on the horizontal axis. In the present embodiment, since the first transmission member 8610 is controlled by the drive motor KM1 at a speed of one rotation in 8 seconds (a speed of 45 degrees in 1 second), FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (c) The numerical value obtained by dividing the numerical value on the horizontal axis up to) by the corresponding angle (45 degrees) represents the number of seconds required for the state change.

  The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) is capable of controlling the operation of the retracting member 8520 with a first operation pattern described below as a constant operation after the power is turned on. Hereinafter, operation control of the retracting member 8520 performed after the power is turned on will be described.

<When operating in the first operation pattern>
As shown in FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (c), each of the projecting members 8520A to 8520C is stretched until the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 becomes 0 to 180 degrees (4 seconds). Keep out.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (a), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 225 degrees, the retracting member 8520A changes from the protruding state to the retracted state. Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (b), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 270 degrees, the retracting member 8520B changes from the protruding state to the retracted state. Next, as shown in FIG. 156 (c), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 315 degrees, the retracting member 8520C changes its state from the extended state to the retracted state. Next, when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 355 degrees, the projecting members 8520A to 8520C change from the retracted state to the extended state. The in / out member 8520 repeats the above-described state change in a cycle of 8 seconds.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, a mode in which the sphere flows down through the internal flow path INR8 will be described. FIG. 157 (a) to FIG. 157 (g) are schematic views schematically showing the internal flow path INR8 and a sphere passing through the internal flow path INR8. FIG. 157 (a) illustrates a state in which the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 180 degrees, and FIGS. 157 (b) to 157 (g) following FIG. 157 (a) illustrate the first transmission member 8610. The state of the timing in which the rotation angles of the positions are sequentially shifted at intervals of 22.5 degrees (0.5 seconds) is illustrated.

  That is, in FIG. 157 (b), the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 202.5 degrees, and in FIG. 157 (c), the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 225 degrees. In (d), the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 247.5 degrees, in FIG. 157 (e), the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 270 degrees, in FIG. 157 (f). FIG. 157 (g) shows a state where the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 292.5 degrees, and FIG. 157 (g) shows a state where the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 315 degrees.

  FIG. 157 (a) to FIG. 157 (g) are described in chronological order, and spheres newly entered into the internal flow path INR8 are sequentially added. That is, as a pattern for entering the internal flow path INR8 without a gap, the balls that enter the internal flow path INR8 every 0.5 seconds are referred to as spheres P1 to P7.

  In FIG. 157, the state of the second transmission rod 8550 corresponding to each position of the internal flow path INR8 is schematically illustrated by a rectangle partitioned into 6 squares. That is, the second transmission rod 8550 arranged oppositely is illustrated in three sections in the left-right direction below the internal flow path INR8, and in each section, if the upper mass is shaded, the second transmission at that position When the bar 8550 is arranged at the upper end position of the movement range and the lower cell is shaded, the second transmission bar 8550 at that position is arranged at the lower end position of the movement range.

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the sphere to pass through the internal flow path INR8 is 1.5 seconds when flowing down on the first path RF, and 3.0 seconds when flowing down on the second path RS. Set to In other words, in FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (g), the time required for the sphere to pass through one side of the equilateral triangle formed with the point where the first route RF and the second route RS intersect as the vertex. Is 0.25 seconds, passes through one side of the six routes (0.25 × 6 = 1.5) when flowing down on the first route RF, and one side of twelve when flowing down on the second route RS. Through (0.25 × 12 = 3.0). For ease of understanding, description will be made assuming that the rebound coefficient of the sphere passing through the internal flow path INR8 is 1 (assuming that the flow velocity of the sphere does not change due to rebound).

  In addition, when the rebound coefficient of the sphere is considered as a value less than 1 by actual examination, the speed of the sphere that flows down while rebounding in the second flow path RS decreases due to the rebound, so that the sphere flowing down in the first flow path RF Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to form a continuous ball. In other words, by assuming that the rebound coefficient is 1, it is possible to carry out a study under conditions that make it difficult to form a continuous ball.

  FIG. 157 (a) shows a sphere P1 that enters the internal flow path INR8 when the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 180 degrees. In addition, since each projecting member 8520 is in an overhanging state on the downstream side of the sphere P1, the sphere P1 starts to flow along the second route RS.

  FIG. 157 (b) shows a sphere P2 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P1 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 202.5 degrees. The sphere P2 entering after the sphere P1 is distributed to the opposite side of the sphere P1 by the sorting device 8543 (see FIG. 139 (a)), and enters the internal flow path INR8 on the opposite side (right side of FIG. 157). . In addition, since each projecting member 8520 is in an overhanging state on the downstream side of the sphere P2, the sphere P2 starts to flow along the second route RS.

  FIG. 157 (c) shows a sphere P3 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the sphere P2 entered. At this time, the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 225 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P3, the sphere P3 flows down at least in the first region Rt through the first path RF. Further, since the retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P2, the sphere P2 flows down at least in the first region Rt through the first path RF.

  FIG. 157 (d) shows a sphere P4 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the sphere P3 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 247.5 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P4, the sphere P4 flows down at least in the first region Rt through the first path RF.

  In addition, the sphere P2 flows down the first region Rt through the first route RF and enters the second region Rm. However, since the intrusion member 8520B is still in the overhanging state in the second region Rm, the sphere P2 in the second region Rm As a result of flowing down on the second route RS, it moved to the position shown in FIG. 157 (d). That is, in 0.5 seconds from FIG. 157 (c) to FIG. 157 (d), the first region Rt is completely passed in the previous 0.25 second, and the second region Rm is flowed down in the subsequent 0.25 second. As a result, it is illustrated.

  At the time of FIG. 157 (d), the interval between the sphere P1 and the sphere P3 was reduced from the interval of 1 second to the interval of 0.5 second.

  FIG. 157 (e) shows a sphere P5 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the sphere P4 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 270 degrees. In addition, since the retracting members 8520A and 8520B are in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P5, the sphere P5 flows down at least through the first region Rt and the second region Rm through the first path RF.

  At the time of FIG. 157 (e), the interval between the sphere P1 and the sphere P3 was reduced from the 0.5 second interval to the 0.25 second interval. In addition, the interval between the sphere P2 and the sphere P4 was reduced from an interval of 1 second to an interval of 0.5 seconds.

  FIG. 157 (f) shows a sphere P6 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the sphere P5 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 292.5 degrees. In addition, since the retractable members 8520A and 8520B are in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P6, the sphere P6 flows down at least through the first region Rt and the second region Rm through the first path RF.

  In addition, the sphere P3 flows down the second region Rm through the first route RF and enters the third region Rb. However, since the protruding member 8520C is still overhanging in the third region Rb, the third region Rb As a result of flowing down on the second route RS, it moved to the position shown in FIG. 157 (f). That is, in 0.5 seconds from FIG. 157 (e) to FIG. 157 (f), the second region Rm is completely passed in the previous 0.25 second, and the third region Rb is flowed down in the subsequent 0.25 second. As a result, it is illustrated.

  At the time of FIG. 157 (f), the interval between the sphere P2 and the sphere P4 was reduced from the interval of 0.5 seconds to the interval of 0.25 seconds.

  FIG. 157 (g) shows a sphere P7 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the sphere P6 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 315 degrees. In addition, since the retracting members 8520A, 8520B, and 8520C are in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P7, the sphere P7 starts to flow down on the first path RF.

  At the time of FIG. 157 (g), the interval between the sphere P3 and the sphere P5 was reduced from an interval of 1 second to an interval of 0.5 seconds.

  At the time of FIG. 157 (g), the ball P1 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8. The spheres P2, P3, and P4 are discharged from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds from the discharge of the sphere P1, and the sphere P5 is discharged from the discharge of the spheres P2, P3, and P4 for 0.25 seconds (discharge of the sphere P1). For 0.5 second) from the internal flow path INR8.

  In other words, four balls can be collected in 0.25 seconds (5 balls in 0.5 seconds) and discharged from the internal flow path INR8. As described above in the first embodiment, since the opening time of the movable piece 190a is about 0.5 seconds, if the opening timing of the movable piece 190a and the discharge timing of the sphere from the internal flow path INR8 can be well matched, the movable piece 190a can be moved. While the piece 190a is released once, a plurality of balls (up to 5 according to FIG. 157) can be made to enter the movable ball accessory device 190. As a result, simultaneous winnings in the movable winning ball accessory device 190 can be generated not by chance but by using the control of the pre-winning flow-down device 8500, and the possibility of simultaneous winning can be increased. Therefore, the expectation of simultaneous winning can be enhanced, and the attention of the pre-winning flow-down device 8500 that is deeply related to the simultaneous winning can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the balls that have entered the internal flow path INR8 are arranged in the order of their entry. That is, the ball that has entered later is held upstream of the ball that has entered earlier. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the order of entering the top opening 8512 and the order of discharging from the internal flow path INR8 from being switched.

  On the other hand, when the projecting members 8520A to 8520C project from the retracted state to the projecting state all at once, when the projecting member 8520A to 8520C enters the retracted state from the projecting state, Within the flow path INR8, at the same time, the internal flow path INR8 extending direction component of the velocity of the ball that has previously entered is equal to or less than the internal flow path INR8 extending direction component of the velocity of the ball that has subsequently entered. be able to.

  In other words, inside the internal flow path INR8, on the upstream side of the sphere flowing down on the second path RS, the sphere can flow down on either the first path RF or the second path RS, while the first path It can be set as the structure which prevents a sphere from flowing down by 2nd path | route RS in the upstream of the sphere which flows down by RF.

  Thereby, in the relationship between the spheres flowing down the internal flow path INR8, it is possible to prevent the interval between the spheres from being increased and to gradually reduce the interval between the spheres. Thereby, a feeling of expectation for the spheres flowing down the internal flow path INR8 can be increased.

  Hereinafter, a case where the ball is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 within 0.5 seconds will be referred to as “a continuous ball is formed” (excluding the case where the ball is exactly 0.5 seconds). As described above, since the balls P1 to P4 or the balls P2 to P5 are discharged from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds, the balls P1 to P4 and the balls P2 to P5 are connected in the first operation pattern. A sphere can be formed.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the relationship between the ball entry timing of the sphere into the internal flow path INR8 and the length of time required to pass through the internal flow path INR8 in the first operation pattern. In FIG. 158, the horizontal axis is shown as the phase change of the first transmission member 8610. That is, as in FIG. 156, the state rotated about 5 degrees counterclockwise from FIG. 147 (b) is set to 0, and the rotation angle when rotating counterclockwise from there is the numerical value on the horizontal axis of FIG. Corresponding to In the present embodiment, since the first transmission member 8610 is controlled by the drive motor KM1 at a speed of one rotation in 8 seconds (a speed of 45 degrees in 1 second), the numerical values on the horizontal axis in FIG. The numerical value divided by the angle (45 degrees) represents the number of seconds required for the state change.

  In FIG. 158, the vertical axis indicates the time until the sphere that has entered the internal flow path INR8 at the timing of each horizontal axis is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 at intervals of 22.5 degrees on the horizontal axis. For example, a ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 with the horizontal axis ranging from 0 degrees to 180 degrees has the protruding / retracting member 8520 that protrudes when the ball flows down (see FIG. 156), so the internal flow path INR8. Is 3 seconds required to flow down through the second route RS.

  On the other hand, for example, a ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 from 180 degrees to 360 degrees is not only a region where the protruding / exiting member 8520 that is opposed to when it flows down has a region that is in a retracted state. Have. In that region, since the sphere flows down on the first route RF, the time required is reduced compared to the case where the sphere flows down on the second route RS.

  Specifically, quoting what has been described with reference to FIG. 157, it takes 3 seconds for the sphere P1 entering the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8 at a numerical value of 180 degrees on the horizontal axis. It takes 2.75 seconds for the ball P2 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 at a numerical value of 202.5 degrees to flow down the internal flow path INR8, and the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 at a horizontal value of 225 degrees. It takes 2.25 seconds for P3 to flow down the internal flow path INR8, and for the ball P4 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 at a value of 247.5 degrees on the horizontal axis to flow down the internal flow path INR8, 1. It takes 75 seconds, and the ball P5 that entered the internal flow path INR8 at the horizontal axis value 270 degrees and the ball P6 that entered the internal flow path INR8 at the horizontal axis value 292.5 degrees enter the internal flow path INR8. It takes 1.5 seconds to flow down, and the internal flow path is 315 degrees on the horizontal axis. It takes 2.0 seconds for the ball P7 that has entered the NR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8. With the same concept, the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 at the horizontal axis value of 337.5 degrees It takes 2.5 seconds to flow down the flow path INR8.

  As shown in FIG. 158, depending on when the sphere enters the internal flow path INR8, the time required for the sphere to flow down the internal flow path INR8 can be changed, and the degree of change can be reduced for a short time ( In this embodiment, by changing continuously for 4 seconds), the ease of forming a continuous ball in the case where a continuous ball is formed by balls that have entered the internal flow path INR8 at different timings Can be changed.

  For example, when the first ball is the above-described ball P1, the ball P1 and the last ball discharged from the internal flow path INR8 within 0.5 seconds thereafter are balls P4 (from ball P1 entering to discharging) Time = 3.0 seconds, time from sphere P1 entry to sphere P4 discharge = difference in entry timing between sphere P1 and sphere P4 + 1.5 seconds + time for sphere P4 to flow down internal flow path INR8 75 seconds = 3.25 seconds, time from entry of the ball P1 to discharge of the ball P5 = difference of entry timing between the balls P1 and P5 2 seconds + time for the ball P5 to flow down the internal flow path INR8 1.5 seconds = 3.5 seconds), the ball can be formed if the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 for 1.5 seconds until the ball P4 enters. In addition, if the balls P2 and P3 can be entered, four balls can be formed as continuous balls.

  On the other hand, when the first ball is the above-described ball P4, the ball P4 and the last ball discharged from the internal flow path INR8 within 0.5 seconds thereafter are balls P5 (discharged from the ball P4 entering the ball). Time to 1.75 seconds, time from entry of sphere P4 to discharge of sphere P5 = difference in entry timing of sphere P4 and sphere P5 0.5 seconds + time 1 for sphere P5 to flow down internal flow path INR8 .5 seconds = 2.0 seconds, time from entry of the sphere P4 to discharge of the sphere P6 = difference of entry timing between the sphere P4 and the sphere P6 1 second + a time for the sphere P6 to flow down the internal flow path INR8 1.5 Second = 2.5 seconds), so that the next ball cannot enter into the internal flow path INR8 for 0.5 seconds until the ball P5 enters, so that two continuous balls cannot be formed. It becomes the limit to use a ball as a continuous ball, and the difficulty of forming a continuous ball increases.

  Therefore, it is difficult to form a continuous ball depending on at which timing of the first operation pattern the first ball enters the internal flow path INR8 (at which timing of the extending and retracting patterns of the retracting members 8520A to 8520C). Since the degree changes, a player who wants to form a continuous ball can be directed to play a game in which the launch timing is determined based on the operation timing of the in / out member 8520 and the ball is fired. Thereby, the attention of the projecting member 8520 can be improved.

  For example, it is possible to make it easier to enter the first ball as the ball P1 by firing the ball after visually confirming that all the protruding members 8520 are in the overhanging state. The player can select a game method of confirming the overhang state and firing a ball toward the pre-winning flow-down device 8500.

  On the other hand, since it is difficult to form a continuous ball if the first and second members 8520A have started to evacuate, it is difficult to form a continuous ball, so the time until the ball reaches the pre-winning flow down device 8500 is taken into account. If it is difficult to form a continuous ball even if the second ball enters, the game is temporarily stopped and restarted when all the retractable members 8520 are overloaded. The person can choose.

  That is, by confirming the operation mode of the in / out member 8520, the player can grasp the launch timing at which it is easy to form a continuous ball, so that the player can select the launch mode of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to form a continuous ball using the pre-winning flow-down device 8520 to the retracting member 8520.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the inclination of the graph shown in FIG. 158 becomes maximum when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is in the range of 202.5 degrees to 247.5 degrees. In this range, the inclination of the graph is an inclination that shortens the time required for the sphere to be ejected while rotating 45 degrees (1 second). That is, since the shortened amount of time until the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 is discharged is equal to the time difference of the balls, the ball that has previously entered the internal flow path INR8 (for example, the sphere P2). Then, it is possible to catch up the sphere (for example, sphere P3) that has entered the internal flow path INR8 later.

  According to the present embodiment, even when the sphere P2 catches up with the sphere P3, the allocating device 8543 (see FIG. 133) distributes the spheres P2 and P3 to the different flow paths. P2 and P3 can be simultaneously discharged from the left and right outlets of the pair of internal flow paths INR8 without colliding with each other. The same applies to the case where the ball does not enter at the timing of the ball P3 but enters at the timing of the balls P2 and P4. Unlike the mode shown in FIG. 157, the sphere P2 and the sphere P4 can be prevented from colliding with each other by being distributed to different flow paths.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 157, even when all of the balls P2, P3, and P4 have entered, the elongated hole 8544c is formed from a shape that allows the balls P2 and P4 to enter at the same time. Ball clogging can be prevented from occurring near the exit of the path INR8.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the operation of the retracting member 8520 of the second operation pattern in the present embodiment and the length of time required for the sphere to pass through the internal flow path INR8 that changes accordingly will be described.

  In the second operation pattern, the in / out member 8520 operates in the same manner as the first operation pattern in the internal channel INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front, while the in / out member 8520 is operated in the internal channel INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front. Is fixed in the retracted state.

  The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can control the operation of the retractable member 8520 even in a mode in which the second operation pattern described below is inserted between the first operation patterns described above as a constant operation after the power is turned on. The In other words, the operation control in the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern proceeds in a preset order. Hereinafter, operation control of the retracting member 8520 performed after the power is turned on will be described.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
FIGS. 159 (a) to 159 (g) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the internal flow path INR8 and a sphere passing through the internal flow path INR8. FIG. 159 (a) shows a state in which the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 acting on the internal flow path INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front is 180 degrees, and FIGS. 159 (b) to 159 following FIG. 159 (a). (G) illustrates a state in which the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is sequentially shifted at intervals of 22.5 degrees (0.5 seconds). In FIGS. 159 (a) to 159 (g), the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 acting on the internal flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front is maintained at an angle between 315 degrees and 355 degrees. The

  159 (a) to 159 (g) are described in chronological order, and spheres newly entered into the internal flow path INR8 are added in order. That is, the description will be made assuming that a ball enters the internal flow path INR8 every 0.5 seconds as a pattern of entering the internal flow path INR8 without a gap.

  In FIG. 159, the state of the second transmission rod 8550 corresponding to each position of the internal flow path INR8 is schematically illustrated by a rectangle partitioned into 6 squares. That is, the second transmission rod 8550 arranged oppositely is illustrated in three sections in the left-right direction below the internal flow path INR8, and in each section, if the upper mass is shaded, the second transmission at that position When the bar 8550 is arranged at the upper end position of the movement range and the lower cell is shaded, the second transmission bar 8550 at that position is arranged at the lower end position of the movement range.

  FIG. 159 (a) shows a sphere P1 that enters the internal flow path INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front when the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 180 degrees. In addition, since each projecting member 8520 is in an overhanging state on the downstream side of the sphere P1, the sphere P1 starts to flow along the second route RS.

  FIG. 159 (b) shows a sphere P2 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P1 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 202.5 degrees. The sphere P2 that enters after the sphere P1 is distributed to the opposite side of the sphere P1 by the sorting device 8543 (see FIG. 139 (a)) and enters the internal flow path INR8 on the opposite side (right side of FIG. 159). . In addition, since each intruding member 8520 is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P2, the sphere P2 starts to flow down on the first path RF.

  FIG. 159 (c) shows a sphere P3 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front after 0.5 second has elapsed since the sphere P2 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 225 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P3, the sphere P3 flows down at least in the first region Rt through the first path RF.

  FIG. 159 (d) shows a sphere P4 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P3 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 247.5 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P4, the sphere P4 flows down along the first path RF.

  At the time of FIG. 159 (d), the interval between the sphere P1 and the sphere P3 was reduced from an interval of 1 second to an interval of 0.5 seconds.

  FIG. 159 (e) shows a sphere P5 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P4 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 270 degrees. In addition, since the retracting members 8520A and 8520B are in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P5, the sphere P5 flows down at least through the first region Rt and the second region Rm through the first path RF.

  Note that, at the time of FIG. 159 (e), the interval between the sphere P1 and the sphere P3 was reduced from an interval of 0.5 seconds to an interval of 0.25 seconds. On the other hand, the interval between the sphere P2 and the sphere P4 remains unchanged for 1 second.

  FIG. 159 (f) shows a sphere P6 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P5 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 292.5 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520 is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P6, the sphere P6 flows down along the first path RF.

  In addition, the sphere P3 flows down the second region Rm through the first route RF and enters the third region Rb. However, since the protruding member 8520C is still overhanging in the third region Rb, the third region Rb As a result of flowing down on the second route RS, it moved to the position shown in FIG. 159 (f). That is, in 0.5 seconds from FIG. 159 (e) to FIG. 159 (f), the second region Rm is completely passed in the previous 0.25 second, and the third region Rb is flowed down in the subsequent 0.25 second. As a result, it is illustrated.

  FIG. 159 (g) shows a sphere P7 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P6 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 315 degrees. In addition, since the retracting members 8520A, 8520B, and 8520C are in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P7, the sphere P7 starts to flow down on the first path RF.

  At the time of FIG. 159 (g), the interval between the sphere P3 and the sphere P5 was reduced from an interval of 1 second to an interval of 0.5 seconds.

  At the time of FIG. 159 (g), the ball P1 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8. The sphere P4 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front simultaneously with the sphere P1, and the sphere P3 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 within 0.25 seconds from the discharge of the sphere P1. Further, the sphere P5 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds (0.5 seconds from the discharge of the balls P1 and P4) from the discharge of the ball P3.

  That is, it is possible to discharge three balls together in 0.25 seconds (four balls in 0.5 seconds) from the internal flow path INR8. As described above in the first embodiment, since the opening time of the movable piece 190a is about 0.5 seconds, if the opening timing of the movable piece 190a and the discharge timing of the sphere from the internal flow path INR8 can be well matched, the movable piece 190a can be moved. While the piece 190a is released once, a plurality (three at the maximum according to FIG. 159) of the balls can be entered into the movable ball accessory device 190. As a result, simultaneous winnings in the movable winning ball accessory device 190 can be generated not by chance but by using the control of the pre-winning flow-down device 8500, and the possibility of simultaneous winning can be increased. Therefore, the expectation of simultaneous winning can be enhanced, and the attention of the pre-winning flow-down device 8500 that is deeply related to the simultaneous winning can be improved.

  Here, the maximum number of balls that can be made to enter the movable entrance ball accessory device 190 is greater in the second operation pattern (3) than in the first operation pattern (4). Less. On the other hand, the operation mode of the left and right extending and retracting member 8520 is the same as the first operation pattern. Therefore, if the player does not check the operation mode of the right in / out member 8520 in addition to the operation mode of the left in / out member 8520, the timing at which the first ball enters the pre-winning flow down device 8500 It is difficult to accurately grasp the relationship between the maximum number of balls that can form a continuous ball. Accordingly, it is possible to improve attention to both the left and right pair of intruding members 8520.

  In addition, by making it difficult to confirm both operation modes, it is difficult to reliably grasp the best timing for entering the first ball into the pre-winning flow-down device 8500, and the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to reduce the possibility of being captured (for example, entering a ball with a high probability in the movable ball accessory device 190).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the case where the first ball P1 enters the inner flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the top when the retracting member 8520 operates in the second operation pattern will be described.

  FIG. 160 (a) to FIG. 160 (g) are schematic views schematically showing the internal flow path INR8 and a sphere passing through the internal flow path INR8. 160 (a) shows a state in which the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 acting on the internal flow path INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front is 180 degrees, and FIGS. 160 (b) to 160 following FIG. 160 (a). (G) illustrates a state in which the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is sequentially shifted at intervals of 22.5 degrees (0.5 seconds). 160 (a) to 160 (g), the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 acting on the internal flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front is maintained at an angle between 315 degrees and 355 degrees. The

  160 (a) to 160 (g) are described in chronological order, and spheres newly entered into the internal flow path INR8 are respectively added in order. That is, the description will be made assuming that a ball enters the internal flow path INR8 every 0.5 seconds as a pattern of entering the internal flow path INR8 without a gap.

  In FIG. 160, the state of the second transmission rod 8550 corresponding to each position of the internal flow path INR8 is schematically illustrated by a rectangle partitioned into 6 squares. That is, the second transmission rod 8550 arranged oppositely is illustrated in three sections in the left-right direction below the internal flow path INR8, and in each section, if the upper mass is shaded, the second transmission at that position When the bar 8550 is arranged at the upper end position of the movement range and the lower cell is shaded, the second transmission bar 8550 at that position is arranged at the lower end position of the movement range.

  FIG. 160 (a) shows a sphere P1 that enters the internal flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front when the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 180 degrees. In addition, since each intruding member 8520 is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P1, the sphere P1 starts to flow along the first path RF.

  FIG. 160 (b) shows a sphere P2 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P1 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 202.5 degrees. The sphere P2 that enters after the sphere P1 is distributed to the opposite side of the sphere P1 by the sorting device 8543 (see FIG. 139 (a)) and enters the internal flow path INR8 on the opposite side (left side in FIG. 160). . In addition, since each projecting member 8520 is in an overhanging state on the downstream side of the sphere P2, the sphere P2 starts to flow along the second route RS.

  FIG. 160 (c) shows a sphere P3 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P2 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 225 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520 is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P3, the sphere P3 flows down along the first path RF.

  FIG. 160 (d) shows a sphere P4 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P3 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 247.5 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P4, the sphere P4 flows down on the first path RF at least in the first region Rt.

  FIG. 160 (e) shows a sphere P5 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P4 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 270 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520 is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P5, the sphere P5 flows down along the first path RF.

  At the time of FIG. 159 (e), the interval between the sphere P1 and the sphere P3 remains unchanged for 1 second, and the interval between the sphere P2 and the sphere P4 is 0.75 seconds from the interval of 1.0 seconds. The interval was reduced.

  FIG. 160 (f) shows a sphere P6 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P5 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 292.5 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520 is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P6, the sphere P6 flows down along the first path RF.

  FIG. 160 (g) shows a sphere P7 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P6 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 315 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520 is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P7, the sphere P7 flows down along the first path RF.

  At a time point of 0.25 seconds in FIG. 160 (g), the sphere P2 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8. The sphere P4 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front simultaneously with the sphere P2, and the sphere P5 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 within 0.25 seconds from the discharge of the spheres P2 and P4.

  That is, three balls can be discharged together from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds (three balls in 0.5 seconds). As described above in the first embodiment, since the opening time of the movable piece 190a is about 0.5 seconds, if the opening timing of the movable piece 190a and the discharge timing of the sphere from the internal flow path INR8 can be well matched, the movable piece 190a can be moved. While the piece 190a is released once, a plurality (three at the maximum according to FIG. 160) of balls can be entered into the movable ball accessory device 190. As a result, simultaneous winnings in the movable winning ball accessory device 190 can be generated not by chance but by using the control of the pre-winning flow-down device 8500, and the possibility of simultaneous winning can be increased. Therefore, the expectation of simultaneous winning can be enhanced, and the attention of the pre-winning flow-down device 8500 that is deeply related to the simultaneous winning can be improved.

  Here, in the case shown in FIG. 159, the timing at which a joint ball begins to be formed (the timing at which the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 315 degrees) and the timing in which the joint ball begins to be formed in the case shown in FIG. 160 (first transmission). Since the member 8610 is different from the rotation angle of 326.25 degrees), the continuous ball enters the movable incoming ball accessory 190 depending on whether the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 as the ball P1 is distributed to the left or right. The easy opening timing of the movable piece 190a can be varied (can be varied for 0.25 seconds). Thereby, the possibility that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is captured (for example, a ball with a high probability of entering the movable ball accessory device 190) can be reduced.

  On the other hand, no matter where the ball P1 is allocated, a room for forming a continuous ball can be left. Therefore, a game in which a game is played by a game method in which a ball is continuously launched regardless of the operation mode of the retracting member 8520. Can prevent a person from losing excessively.

  Moreover, according to the pattern of this operation | movement, the ball | bowl itself which forms a continuous ball can be changed by which sphere P1 is distributed. That is, when the sphere P1 enters the internal flow path INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front, continuous balls are formed by the spheres P1, P3, and P4 (see FIG. 159), and the sphere P1 enters the internal flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front. When entering a ball, a continuous ball can be formed by the balls P2, P4, and P5 (see FIG. 160).

  Therefore, even when the ball is made to enter the pre-winning flow down device 8500 at the same plurality of timings (for example, the timings of the balls P1 and P4) as the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 on the left side when viewed from the front, Whether the ball P1 can form a continuous ball with the ball P4 can be changed depending on which of the left and right internal flow paths INR8 (in this case, the ball P1 enters the left side of the front view) Can only form a ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the timing of entering the pre-winning flow-down device 8500 that can form a continuous ball from being fixed, and the pachinko machine 10 is able to capture (for example, the movable pitching equipment device 190 with high probability). It is possible to reduce the possibility that the balls are put together).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the operation of the third operation pattern in the third operation pattern in the present embodiment and the length of time required for the sphere to pass through the internal flow path INR8 that changes accordingly will be described.

  In the third operation pattern, it is the same as in the first operation pattern that the left and right in / out members 8520 perform the same in-and-out operation, but the operation speed is not always constant, the low-speed operation, the high-speed operation, and the first operation pattern. The operation is controlled in such a manner that the operation pattern and the operation at the same speed are repeated in order.

  That is, the first transmission member 8610 rotates at the same speed as the first operation pattern until the rotation angle becomes 0 to 225 degrees, and then the rotation angle is 225 to 270 degrees until just before 2 seconds elapses. At a time when two seconds have elapsed after the rotation angle has reached 225 degrees, and the rotation angle is 225 degrees (the operation at a speed about 0.5 times the speed of the first operation pattern). The high-speed operation is performed at a speed at which the rotation angle is 315 degrees, and thereafter, the rotation operation is performed at the same speed as that of the first operation pattern until the rotation angle reaches 360 degrees (eight seconds pass for one rotation).

  The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can control the operation of the retractable member 8520 even in a mode in which a third operation pattern described below is inserted between the first operation patterns described above as a constant operation after power-on. The That is, the first operation pattern, the second operation pattern, or the third operation pattern is sequentially selected in a preset order, and the operation control proceeds. Hereinafter, operation control of the retracting member 8520 performed after the power is turned on will be described.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
161 (a) to 161 (g) are schematic views schematically showing the internal flow path INR8 and a sphere passing through the internal flow path INR8. 161 (a) shows a state where the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 acting on the internal flow path INR8 is 180 degrees, and FIG. 161 (b) following FIG. 161 (a) to FIG. 161 (g). Fig. 6 illustrates the state of timing shifted in order at intervals of 0.5 seconds in the pattern of this operation.

  161 (a) to 161 (g) are described in chronological order, and spheres newly entered into the internal flow path INR8 are respectively added in order. That is, the description will be made assuming that a ball enters the internal flow path INR8 every 0.5 seconds as a pattern of entering the internal flow path INR8 without a gap.

  In FIG. 161, the state of the second transmission rod 8550 corresponding to each position of the internal flow path INR8 is schematically illustrated by a rectangle partitioned into 6 squares. That is, the second transmission rod 8550 arranged oppositely is illustrated in three sections in the left-right direction below the internal flow path INR8, and in each section, if the upper mass is shaded, the second transmission at that position When the bar 8550 is arranged at the upper end position of the movement range and the lower cell is shaded, the second transmission bar 8550 at that position is arranged at the lower end position of the movement range.

  FIG. 161 (a) shows a sphere P1 that enters the internal flow path INR8 when the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 180 degrees. In addition, since each projecting member 8520 is in an overhanging state on the downstream side of the sphere P1, the sphere P1 starts to flow along the second route RS.

  FIG. 161 (b) shows a sphere P2 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the sphere P1 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 202.5 degrees. The sphere P2 entering after the sphere P1 is distributed to the opposite side of the sphere P1 by the sorting device 8543 (see FIG. 139 (a)) and enters the internal flow path INR8 on the opposite side (right side of FIG. 161). . In addition, since each projecting member 8520 is in an overhanging state on the downstream side of the sphere P2, the sphere P1 starts to flow along the second route RS.

  FIG. 161 (c) shows a sphere P3 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the sphere P2 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 225 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P3, the sphere P3 flows down at least in the first region Rt through the first path RF.

  FIG. 161 (d) shows a sphere P4 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the sphere P3 entered. At this time, 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the first transmission member 8610 has reached a rotation angle of 225 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P4, the sphere P4 flows down at least in the first region Rt through the first path RF. In addition, at the time of FIG. 161 (d), the space | interval of the sphere P1 and the sphere P3 was reduced from the space | interval of 1 second to the space | interval of 0.5 second.

  FIG. 161 (e) shows a sphere P5 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 after 0.5 seconds have passed since the sphere P4 entered. At this time, 1.0 second has elapsed since the first transmission member 8610 has reached a rotation angle of 225 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P5, the sphere P5 flows down at least in the first region Rt through the first path RF. 161 (e), the interval between the sphere P2 and the sphere P4 is reduced from the interval of 1.0 second to the interval of 0.75 second.

  161 (f) shows a sphere P6 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the sphere P5 entered. At this time, 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the first transmission member 8610 has reached a rotation angle of 225 degrees. In addition, since the retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P6, the sphere P6 flows down at least in the first region Rt through the first path RF.

  FIG. 161 (g) shows a sphere P7 that has entered the internal flow path INR8 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the sphere P6 entered. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 315 degrees. In addition, since the retracting members 8520A, 8520B, and 8520C are in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P7, the sphere P7 starts to flow down on the first path RF. At the time of FIG. 161 (g), the interval between the sphere P4 and the sphere P6 is reduced from an interval of 1 second to an interval of 0.5 seconds.

  At the time of FIG. 161 (g), the ball P1 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8. The spheres P2 and P3 are discharged from the internal flow path INR8 within 0.25 seconds from the discharge of the sphere P1. The sphere P4 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds from the discharge of the spheres P2 and P3 and in 0.5 second from the discharge of the sphere P1. The sphere P5 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 within 0.25 seconds from the discharge of the sphere P4 and 0.5 seconds after discharge of the spheres P2 and P3. The sphere P6 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds from the discharge of the sphere P5 and in 0.5 seconds from the discharge of the sphere P4.

  That is, it is possible to discharge three balls together in 0.25 seconds (four balls in 0.5 seconds) from the internal flow path INR8. As described above in the first embodiment, since the opening time of the movable piece 190a is about 0.5 seconds, if the opening timing of the movable piece 190a and the discharge timing of the sphere from the internal flow path INR8 can be well matched, the movable piece 190a can be moved. While the piece 190a is released once, a plurality (three at the maximum according to FIG. 161) of the balls can be made to enter the movable ball accessory device 190. As a result, simultaneous winnings in the movable winning ball accessory device 190 can be generated not by chance but by using the control of the pre-winning flow-down device 8500, and the possibility of simultaneous winning can be increased. Therefore, the expectation of simultaneous winning can be enhanced, and the attention of the pre-winning flow-down device 8500 that is deeply related to the simultaneous winning can be improved.

  Here, the maximum number of balls that can be entered into the movable entrance ball accessory device 190 is greater in the third operation pattern (4) than in the first operation pattern (5). Less. On the other hand, since the operation mode of the in / out member 8520 is the same as the first operation pattern, the player can determine whether the operation mode of the in / out member 8520 is the first operation pattern or the third operation pattern. It becomes difficult to grasp. Thereby, it is difficult to predict the flow-down mode of the sphere in advance from the operation mode of the in / out member 8520, and the attention to the sphere flowing down the internal flow path INR8 can be improved.

  In addition, before launching the ball, it is substantially difficult to confirm whether the retracting member 8520 is operating in the first operating pattern or the third operating pattern, so that the pre-winning It can be difficult to reliably grasp the best timing for entering the first ball into the flow-down device 8500, and the pachinko machine 10 captures (for example, the ball enters the movable ball accessory device 190 with a high probability) ) Can be reduced.

  A feature in forming a joint ball between the first operation pattern and the third operation pattern will be described. In particular, focusing on the case where at least two balls can be connected, FIG. 157 is referred to as appropriate in this description.

  In the first operation pattern, the ball P1 and the ball P4, or the ball P2 and the ball P5 can form a continuous ball. Therefore, the ball entry interval to the pre-winning flow down device 8500 required for the formation of the continuous ball is increased (maximum 1). .5 seconds).

  Thereby, for example, when launching a ball toward the pre-winning flow-down device 8500, it was launched not only in two consecutive (0.6 second intervals) but in three consecutive (balls launched at short intervals). A continuous ball can also be formed in the first and last spheres (spheres fired at long intervals (1.2 second intervals), the first and third balls). Thereby, the difficulty of forming a continuous ball can be lowered.

  On the other hand, in the third operation pattern, since it stays in the sphere P1 and the sphere P3, or the sphere P2 and the sphere P4, the spheres fired in two consecutive (0.6 second intervals) (spheres fired at short intervals) However, unlike the first operation pattern, it is possible to form a continuous ball with the ball P6 even when the ball P5 is the first ball. In other words, in the first operation pattern, the ball P5, P6 cannot form a continuous ball, but in the third operation pattern, the ball P5, P6 can form a continuous ball. In other words, compared to the case of the first operation pattern, the third operation pattern is a continuous ball when the ball enters the pre-winning flow down device 8500 in two consecutive (0.6 second intervals). It is possible to secure a long allowable period for allowing the formation of the.

  Therefore, in the comparison between the first operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the first operation pattern has the disadvantage that the allowable period for allowing the formation of the joint ball is short, and the firing interval of the balls that can be formed into the joint ball. On the other hand, there is an advantage that it can be set longer, while the third operation pattern has an advantage that a permissible period for allowing formation of a continuous ball is long, and a disadvantage that a firing interval of a ball that can be formed is short. .

  Since these advantages and disadvantages are contradictory, the pachinko machine 10 can be captured by the player (for example, a movable ball) by appropriately switching the first operation pattern and the third operation pattern. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a ball is inserted into the accessory device 190 with a high probability.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 162 and FIG. 163, description will be given of the operation of the protruding and retracting member 8520 of the fourth operation pattern in the present embodiment and the length of time required for the sphere to pass through the internal flow path INR8 that changes accordingly. To do. The fourth operation pattern corresponds to the case where the first transmission member 8610 rotates in the reverse direction with respect to the case of the first operation pattern.

  FIG. 162 (a) is a diagram showing a change in time of the retracting member 8520A in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 162 (b) is a diagram showing a change in time of the retracting member 8520B in the fourth operation pattern. Yes, FIG. 162 (c) is a diagram showing a time change of the protruding and retracting member 8520C in the fourth operation pattern.

  In the diagrams from FIG. 162 (a) to FIG. 162 (c), the horizontal axis is shown as the phase change of the first transmission member 8610. That is, from FIG. 147 (b), the state rotated about 5 degrees counterclockwise is set to 0 degree, and the rotation angle when rotating clockwise from there (from the first to third operation patterns described above). The rotation angle in the opposite direction to the case corresponds to the numerical value on the horizontal axis from FIG. 162 (a) to FIG. 162 (c). In addition, in order to show that it is a reverse direction, a negative sign is attached | subjected to an angle in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, since the first transmission member 8610 is controlled by the drive motor KM1 at a speed of one rotation in 8 seconds (a speed of 45 degrees in 1 second), FIG. 162 (a) to FIG. 162 (c The numerical value obtained by dividing the numerical value on the horizontal axis up to) by the corresponding angle (45 degrees) represents the number of seconds required for the state change.

  The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can control the operation of the retracting member 8520 even in a mode in which a fourth operation pattern described below is inserted between the first operation patterns described above as a constant operation after power-on. The That is, the first operation pattern, the second operation pattern, the third operation pattern, or the fourth operation pattern is sequentially selected in a preset order, and the operation control proceeds. Hereinafter, operation control of the retracting member 8520 performed after the power is turned on will be described.

<When operating in the fourth operation pattern>
As shown in FIGS. 162 (a) to 162 (c), each of the projecting members 8520A to 8520C is stretched until the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 5 degrees (about 0.1 second). Keep out.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 162 (a) to 162 (c), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 5 degrees, the projecting members 8520A to 8520C change from the overhanging state to the retracted state. Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (c), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 45 degrees, the retracting member 8520C changes its state from the retracted state to the extended state. Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 90 degrees, the retracting member 8520B changes from the retracted state to the extended state. Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 135 degrees, the retracting member 8520A changes from the retracted state to the extended state. Each of the projecting members 8520A to 8520C is maintained in an overhanging state until the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 360 degrees. The in / out member 8520 repeats the above-described state change in a cycle of 8 seconds.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the relationship between the ball entry timing of the sphere into the internal flow path INR8 and the length of time required to pass through the internal flow path INR8 in the fourth operation pattern. In FIG. 163, the horizontal axis is shown as the phase change of the first transmission member 8610. That is, as in FIG. 162, the state rotated about 5 degrees counterclockwise from FIG. 147 (b) is set to 0 degree, and the rotation angle when rotated clockwise from there is the numerical value on the horizontal axis in FIG. Corresponding to

  In the present embodiment, since the first transmission member 8610 is controlled by the drive motor KM1 at a speed of one rotation in 8 seconds (a speed of 45 degrees in 1 second), the numerical values on the horizontal axis in FIG. 163 correspond. The numerical value divided by the angle (45 degrees) represents the number of seconds required for the state change.

  In FIG. 163, the vertical axis indicates the time until the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 at the timing of each horizontal axis is discharged from the internal flow path INR8, with a numerical value of 22.5 degrees on the horizontal axis. For example, a ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 from 135 degrees to 225 degrees on the horizontal axis has the protruding and retracting member 8520 facing when it flows down (see FIG. 156), so the internal flow path INR8. Is 3 seconds required to flow down through the second route RS.

  This is an angle range that is half of the angle range at the time of entry (from 0 degrees to 180 degrees, see FIG. 158) that forms the case where the internal flow path INR8 flows down by the second route RS in the first operation pattern described above. It is. That is, according to this operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sphere can flow down through the internal flow path INR8 along the second route RS as compared with the first operation pattern.

  On the other hand, for example, the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 from 0 degrees to 135 degrees and from 225 degrees to 360 degrees is not only a region where the protruding and retracting member 8520 is in an overhanging state when flowing down, It also has an area that is in a retracted state. In that region, since the sphere flows down on the first path RF, the time required for the sphere to flow down the internal flow path INR8 is shortened compared to the case where the sphere flows down on the second path RS.

  Specifically, it takes 2 seconds for a sphere that entered the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8 at a horizontal axis value of 0 ° to 45 °, and the horizontal axis value of 67.5 ° to 112. It takes 2.5 seconds for the ball that entered the internal flow path INR8 at 5 degrees to flow down the internal flow path INR8, and the ball that entered the internal flow path INR8 from the horizontal axis value of 135 degrees to 225 degrees 3.0 seconds are required to flow down the internal flow path INR8, and 2.75 seconds are required for a ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 at a value of 247.5 degrees on the horizontal axis to flow down the internal flow path INR8. Therefore, it takes 2.5 seconds for a ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 at the horizontal axis value 270 degrees to flow down the internal flow path INR8, and at the horizontal axis value 292.5 degrees, the internal flow path INR8. It takes 2.25 seconds for the ball that entered the ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8. In 5 degrees 360 degrees and entered the special internal channel INR8 sphere takes 2.0 seconds to partition flows down the internal channel INR8.

  As shown in FIG. 163, in this operation pattern, the degree of change is moderate as compared to the change in the time required for the sphere to flow down the internal flow path INR8, which occurred in the first operation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 163, the time required for the ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8 can be changed depending on when the sphere enters the internal flow path INR8, and the degree of the change can be reduced in a short time. By changing continuously, it is possible to change the easiness of formation of a continuous ball according to the incoming timing when forming a continuous ball with balls that have entered the internal flow path INR8 at different timings.

  Note that, according to this operation pattern, the first transmission member 8610 has a timing at which it is easy to shorten the interval between the spheres (a timing at which the time required for a continuously entering ball to pass through the internal flow path INR8 is shortened). The timing at which the angle becomes 225 degrees. From that timing, when a ball enters the internal flow path INR8 at intervals of 0.5 seconds within 2.0 seconds, the time required for the subsequent sphere to pass through the internal flow path INR8 is reduced by 0.25 seconds. Therefore, the interval between the pair of spheres is within 0.5 seconds, and a continuous ball can be formed.

  According to this operation pattern, in comparison with the first operation pattern, it is difficult to surely form a continuous ball by timing the ball into the internal flow path INR8 with the state of the protruding and retracting member 8520 as a mark. It can be.

  For example, in the first operation pattern, about 4 seconds after the timing at which each of the in / out members 8520 changes from the retracted state to the extended state (when the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 180 degrees, refer to FIG. 158). By causing the first ball to enter the internal flow path INR8, a continuous ball can be formed by continuously hitting the ball into the pre-winning flow down device 8500.

  On the other hand, in the fourth operation pattern, about 4 seconds after the timing at which the projecting / retracting member 8520C that first enters the projecting state from the retracted state among the projecting / extracting members 8520 enters the projecting state (the first transmission member 8610 is When the rotation angle is 225 degrees, it is still the best way to make the first ball (for example, the ball P1) enter the internal flow path INR8 in (see FIG. 163). When a ball is continuously entered into the road INR8, a continuous ball can be formed with a ball (for example, the ball P2) that is entered at intervals of 0.5 seconds, while a ball that is entered at intervals of 1 second. A continuous ball cannot be formed with (for example, sphere P3). Therefore, during the operation with the fourth operation pattern, the formation of continuous spheres can be suppressed as compared with the case where the operation is performed with the first operation pattern (the timing at which the formation of the spheres is permitted). The interval can be reduced).

  According to this operation pattern, in relation to the first operation pattern, the time required for a ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8 when the retractable member 8520 is in the same state is changed. be able to.

  For example, when only the retracting member 8520C is in the overhanging state in the first operation pattern, the time required for the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8 is 1.5 to 2.0. In this operation pattern, when only the retracting member 8520C is in the overhanging state, the time required for the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8 is 2.0-2. 5 seconds.

  For example, in the first operation pattern, when the in / out member 8520A is in the retracted state and the in / out members 8520B and 8520C are in the extended state, a ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 is required to flow down the internal flow path INR8. Although the time is 1.5 to 2.25 seconds, in this operation pattern, when the projecting member 8520A is in the retracted state and the projecting and retracting members 8520B and 8520C are in the projecting state, The time required to flow down the internal flow path INR8 is 2.5 to 3.0 seconds.

  By giving this change, the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 with the state of the in / out member 8520 as a mark, and the ball and the ball flowing down the pre-winning flow down device 8500 to the movable piece 190a are connected. Thus, the success rate of the game method for forming a continuous ball can be lowered.

  That is, when the relationship between the state of the in / out member 8520 and the time required for the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 to pass through the internal flow path INR8 is always maintained (the in / out member 8520 is maintained while stopped). It is possible to easily grasp when the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 to the movable piece 190a.

  Therefore, by striking the ball so that the ball reaches the vicinity of the movable piece 190a in accordance with the discharge timing, a continuous ball can be easily formed without continuously entering the internal flow path INR8. It becomes possible to allow a plurality of balls to enter the device 190, and the pachinko machine 10 is likely to be captured (for example, a ball is inserted into the movable ball accessory device 190 with a high probability).

  On the other hand, in the first operation pattern and the main operation pattern, the time required for a ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 when the retractable member 8520 is in the same state to flow down the internal flow path INR8 is different. . Therefore, the timing of launching the spheres that are launched in the vicinity of the movable piece 190a so as to form spheres and balls discharged from the internal flow path INR8 is determined depending on whether the operation is performed in the first operation pattern or the operation pattern. Can be shifted. Thereby, the possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is captured (for example, a ball with a high probability of entering the movable ball accessory device 190) can be reduced.

  Next, an example of the relationship between the rotation operation of the first transmission member 8610 and the operation of the large opening solenoid 209a that operates the movable piece 190a will be described. FIG. 164 is a time chart illustrating a flow from winning to the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 until the end of the small hit game in the first control example described above. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later. In the time chart shown in FIG. 164, the first transmission member 8610 is controlled in the first operation pattern (see FIGS. 156 and 158).

  Based on the winning of the game ball to the left start winning opening 26 or the right start winning opening 27, the main controller 110 controls the variation of the first special symbol. When the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and the main controller 110 starts the small hit control 1 (also referred to as the small hit game 1), the large opening solenoid 209a for operating the movable piece 190a is turned on ( Open state). In this state, the player launches a game ball aiming at the big prize opening switch 190b of the movable entrance ball apparatus 190, and when a game ball enters the movable entrance hall device 190, The game ball passes through the fixed region hole 340 or the slipping hole 350 and flows down to the back of the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, in the small hit control 1, the entire time is set to 7.5 seconds, the set time t1 is set to 2 seconds, the set time t2 is set to about 0.5 seconds, and the set time t3 is set to It is set in about 5 seconds.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 164, the start time of the set time t2 and the angle of the first transmission member 8610 depending on the ball entry timing and the variation time to the left start winning opening 27 or the right start winning opening 27. Is equal to 0.degree., The timing when the ball P1 completely flows down the internal flow path INR8 and reaches the movable piece 190a (the flow time of the internal flow path INR8 is 3 seconds + the internal flow path INR8 is discharged from the movable piece). The time required to reach 190a is 1 second = the timing 4 seconds after the ball P1 enters the internal flow path INR8) and the timing when the movable piece 190a changes to the open state. That is, the continuous ball that can be formed by the above-described balls P1 to P5 can reach the movable piece 190a when the movable piece 190a is in an open state.

  If the relationship shown in FIG. 164 is established, the possibility that a continuous ball will enter the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 increases dramatically, so a notification such as “Keep the ball in the upper pocket!” By performing by voice or liquid crystal display, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a period in which it is easy to make a continuous ball enter the movable ball accessory device 190, and to prevent the player from playing casually.

  That is, in the normal game, a ball is entered into each of the start winning ports 26 to 28 to open the movable piece 190a, and the ball reaches the upper surface of the opened movable piece 190a to enter the movable entry ball device 190. Therefore, a suitable range for the player to launch the ball is widespread between the pair of movable pieces 190a, and the player needs to use nerves to adjust the firing strength of the ball. No.

  If a sphere is fired in the range between the movable pieces 190a in such a direction that the sphere collides with the center frame 86, the sphere flows down in the vicinity of the movable piece 190a in the process of flowing down, and further below each of the start winning ports 26 to 28. Since the player can enter the ball, there is no significant difference in the profits that the player can obtain, and the player does not need to adjust the firing strength precisely, and the game is played loosely.

  On the other hand, the top opening 8512, which is the entrance to the pre-winning descending device 8500, has an opening size that allows two spheres to be lined up on the left and right, and has a remarkably narrow range compared to the range between the pair of movable pieces 190a. Become. Therefore, in order to repeatedly enter the sphere into the top opening 8512, precise adjustment of the launch intensity is indispensable. Such precise adjustment can be performed for a short period of time, but if it is performed over a long period of time, the player accumulates fatigue, which hinders long-term gaming.

  Therefore, in the period in which the continuous ball formed by the internal flow path INR8 is allowed to enter the movable ball accessory device 190, the above-described notification is performed, and the top opening 8512 is aimed only when the notification is being performed. The player can be encouraged to play a game (a game with high fatigue level). As a result, the player launches a ball, aiming at formation of a continuous ball when necessary, and performing a game (a game with low fatigue) that launches a ball between the pair of movable pieces 190a at other times. The mode can be switched intentionally (due to the difference in profits obtained).

  If the variation time of the first special symbol is 0.5 seconds, the timing of entering the ball P1 is before the winning to the left starting winning port 26 or the right starting winning port 27. It is difficult to reliably open the movable piece 190a at the timing when the above-described notification is performed at the ball timing and the ball P1 reaches the movable piece 190a.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol is 0.5 seconds, the ball entering each start winning opening 26 to 28 is the same as the ball P4 entry timing (at the time of 5.5 seconds of the rotation period (Fig. 158)), there remains a period during which a continuous ball can be formed by entering the pre-winning flow-down device 8500 for 0.5 seconds until the entry timing of the ball P5.

  Therefore, in this 0.5 second, the above-mentioned notification is performed, and the formation of a continuous ball can be promoted by prompting the ball to enter the internal flow path INR8. On the other hand, since the period from when the ball is launched to when the ball enters the internal flow path INR is at least 1 second, even if the ball is launched after the notification is made, it is not in time to form a continuous ball. In other words, the above-described notification is an effective notification that improves the interest of the player by allowing the ball already flowing down the game area to enter the internal flow path INR8 while the above-described notification is being made. It has implications.

  Next, differences from FIG. 164 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a time chart illustrating the flow from winning the middle start winning opening 28 to the end of the small hit game in the first control example described above. It is a time chart explaining the flow until the occurrence of the jackpot game. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later. In the time chart shown in FIG. 165, the first transmission member 8610 is controlled in the first operation pattern (see FIGS. 156 and 158).

  Based on the winning of the game ball in the middle start winning opening 28, the main controller 110 controls the variation of the second special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the main control device 110 starts the small hit control 2 (also referred to as the small hit game 2), the large opening solenoid 209a for operating the movable piece 190a is turned on ( Open state). In this state, the player launches a game ball aiming at the big prize opening switch 190b of the movable entrance ball apparatus 190, and when a game ball enters the movable entrance hall device 190, The game ball passes through the fixed region hole 340 or the slipping hole 350 and flows down to the back of the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, in the small hit control 2, the entire time is set to 10 seconds, the set time t4 is set to 2 seconds, the set time t5 is set to about 0.5 seconds, and the set time t6 is set to 2 seconds. The set time t7 is set at about 0.5 seconds, and the set time t8 is set at 5 seconds.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 165, the start time of the set time t7 and the time when the angle of the first transmission member 8610 becomes 0 degrees due to the timing of the ball entering the middle start winning opening 28 and the variation time. Is equal to the timing at which the ball P1 completely flows down the internal flow path INR8 and reaches the movable piece 190a (the flow time of the internal flow path INR8 is 3 seconds + the time it is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 and reaches the movable piece 190a). Time 1 second = the timing 4 seconds after the ball P1 enters the internal flow path INR8) and the timing at which the movable piece 190a changes to the open state coincide with each other. That is, the continuous ball that can be formed by the above-described balls P1 to P5 can reach the movable piece 190a when the movable piece 190a is in an open state.

  If the relationship shown in FIG. 165 is established, the possibility that a continuous ball will enter the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 increases dramatically, so a notification such as “Keep the ball in the upper pocket!” By performing by voice or liquid crystal display, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a period in which it is easy to make a continuous ball enter the movable ball accessory device 190, and to prevent the player from playing casually.

  Note that in FIG. 165, the ball P1 entry timing is later than the winning to the middle start winning opening 28, so the above-described notification is given at the ball P1 entry timing, and the ball P1 reaches the movable piece 190a. The movable piece 190a can be reliably opened at the timing.

  When the variation time of the first special symbol is 0.5 seconds, the ball is launched at the timing when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 28 (at the timing of the rotation cycle of 3.0 seconds (see FIG. 158)). Can enter the internal flow path INR8 after 1 second (can enter the internal flow path INR8 as a sphere P1).

  In the state shown in FIG. 165, the above-described notification is controlled for about 2 to 3 seconds after the ball enters the middle start winning opening 28. Thereby, a ball launched during the notification or a ball that has already started to flow down the game area enters the pre-winning flow-down device 8500, thereby forming a continuous ball in the internal flow path INR8. The formed continuous ball can be made to enter the pre-winning flow-down device 8500.

  In this case, even after the player confirms the notification and starts launching toward the top opening 8512, the player can enter the ball into the internal flow path INR8 within a period in which a continuous ball can be formed. And as above-mentioned, the movable ball | bowl accessory apparatus 190 of this embodiment is comprised so that the probability that it may be a big hit when a several ball | bowl enters will increase dramatically. Therefore, since this notification has not only a stylistic meaning but also a meaning that affects the profits obtained by the player, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the notification.

  According to this embodiment, the small hit game 1 and the small hit game 2 have a great difference except that the number of opening operations of the movable piece 190a is different.

  Here, if the number of opening operations of the movable piece 190a is different, the possibility of entering the movable ball accessory device 190 is different. However, the difference (difference in possibility) is the addition of the possibility that the player enters the ball in one opening operation. Therefore, the expected value of the expected profit (the possibility of winning a big hit by entering the ball) is that the small hit game 2 is twice that of the small hit game 1.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the small hit game 1, it is not possible to form a continuous ball by balls that have been launched after confirming the above-described notification and entered the internal flow path INR8. In 2, a ball can be formed by balls that are fired after entering the internal flow path INR <b> 8 after confirming the notification described above.

  Therefore, when the above-described notification occurs in the small hit game 2, after confirming the notification, a plurality of balls are launched toward the top opening 8512 and are intentionally entered into the internal flow path INR8. A continuous ball can be formed, and the continuous ball can be made to enter the movable incoming ball accessory device 190. That is, by letting a plurality of balls enter the top opening 8512, the player recognizes the period in which the jackpot can be obtained with a high probability by the above-mentioned notification, and then the balls launched during that period are By making a plurality of balls enter the opening 8512, a big hit can be obtained.

  In this case, if a plurality of balls can be entered into the top opening 8512 in accordance with the notification, it is possible to obtain a big jackpot. Therefore, if the above-described notification occurs, the expected value of the small hit game 2 is small. It is significantly larger than the hit game 1. Therefore, the attention of the small hit game 2 (the ball entering the middle start winning opening 28) (the attention to the notification generated in the small hit game 2) can be dramatically improved.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 170. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the second transmission member 8620 with respect to the arrangement of the transmission protrusion 8613 of the first transmission member 8610 is determined in a single way has been described. However, the second transmission member 9620 in the ninth embodiment transmits A plurality of arrangements of the second transmission member 8620 with respect to the arrangement of the protrusion 8613 can be realized. The configuration of the pre-winning flow down device in the ninth embodiment is the same except that the second transmission member 9620 is used instead of the second transmission member 8620 in the eighth embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 166 (a) is a front view of the second transmission member 9620 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 166 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second transmission member 9620 along the CLXVIb-CLXVIb line in FIG. 166 (a). is there. In FIG. 166, the second transmission member 9620 on the left side when viewed from the front is illustrated in the pair of left and right symmetrical second transmission members 9620 arranged in a pair of left and right.

  As shown in FIGS. 166 (a) and 166 (b), the second transmission member 9620 includes a main body plate portion 8621, an arcuate bulge portion 8622, and the same as the second transmission member 9620 of the eighth embodiment. In addition to providing the guide arm portion 8623 and the lower notch 8624, the imperfect arc formed wide by shifting the upper side surface of the imperfect arc hole 8625 of the eighth embodiment outward in the arc diameter. Fastened to the main body plate portion 8621 in such a manner as to close the hole 9625, the end hole 8626 extending linearly in the left-right direction from the left and right outer ends of the incomplete arc hole 9625, and a part of the incomplete arc hole 9625. A switching plate 9627 that is fixed and switches the passage route of the transmission protrusion 8613 (see FIG. 167), and a one-way valve 9628 that is disposed in front of the main body plate part 8621 and functions as a one-way valve for the transmission protrusion 8613. To prepare for.

  The switching plate 9627 is overlapped and fastened to the front side of the main body plate portion 8621 in the assembled state, and covers the upper half of the incomplete arc hole 9625 in a front view, and a covering plate portion 9627a having a fan shape in front view. And a partition plate portion 9627b extending in a curved plate shape from the inner peripheral portion of the plate portion 9627a toward the back side.

  The partition plate portion 9627 b is disposed at approximately the center position in the width direction of the incomplete arc hole 9625 and is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the central axis of the incomplete arc hole 9625. The incomplete arc hole 9625 is formed with a width that allows the transmission protrusion 8613 to be inserted on both the upper side and the lower side of the partition plate part 9627b. That is, the width of the incomplete arc hole 9625 is slightly longer than the sum of the thickness of the partition plate portion 9627b and twice the diameter of the transmission protrusion 9613. Thereby, the transmission protrusion 8613 can pass through the upper side of the partition plate portion 9627b, or can pass through the lower side of the partition plate portion 9627b.

  The one-way valve 9628 has a recessed support portion 9628a that is recessed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction at the upper portion of the end hole 8626 on the right side when viewed from the front, and is accommodated in the recessed support portion 9628a and is slidable in the left-right direction. It mainly includes a slide member 9628b to be supported and a spring member 9628c that generates a biasing force that moves the slide member 9628b toward the incomplete arc hole 9625.

  The recessed support portion 9628a joins the incomplete arc hole 9625 at the left end. Therefore, the slide member 9628b protrudes into the incomplete arc hole 9625 by the biasing force of the spring member 9628c.

  The slide member 9628b has a lower surface that extends along the left-right direction, and an upper surface that rises and slopes toward the spring member 9628c side (toward the right side of the front view). Therefore, the action generated in the slide member 9628b varies depending on the direction in which the transmission protrusion 8613 contacts the slide member 9628b.

  For example, when the transmission protrusion 8613 abuts on the slide member 9628b from above, a load is generated that pushes the slide member 9628b to the right at the contact point. Therefore, the slide member 9628b is pushed in, and the transmission protrusion 8613 is in contact with the slide member 9628b. Can pass through the position where is placed.

  On the other hand, for example, when the transmission protrusion 8613 contacts the slide member 9628b from below, there is no load for pushing the slide member 9628b to the right at the contact point, so the slide member 9628b protrudes by the biasing force of the spring member 9628c. This state is maintained, and the transmission protrusion 8613 cannot pass the position where the slide member 9628b is disposed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 167, an aspect of transmission of driving force between the transmission device 9600 and the second transmission rod 8550 will be described. As described above, since the second transmission rod 8550 operates integrally with the transmission rod 8530, the operation of the second transmission rod 8550 illustrated in FIG. 167 may be recognized as the operation of the transmission rod 8530. .

  FIG. 167 (a) to FIG. 167 (f) are front views of the transmission device 9600 and the second transmission rod 8550 for explaining the operation of the transmission device 9600 in time series. In order to facilitate understanding, the first transmission member 8610 is illustrated with an imaginary line and the upper portion of the second transmission rod 8550 is omitted. FIG. 167 shows an operation in the case where the first transmission member 8610 rotates clockwise after being rotated counterclockwise. In FIG. 167, the second transmission rods 8550 are also referred to as second transmission rods 8550A, 8550B, and 8550C in order from the right side of the front view of FIG. 167 (from the side where the sphere enters).

  FIG. 167 (a) shows a state after the transmission protrusion 8613 has entered the incomplete arc hole 9625 from the end hole 8626. FIG. In this state, the second transmission member 9620 is disposed at the upper end position, and each second transmission rod 8550 contacts the upper surface of the second transmission member 9620. Since the movement of the second transmission member 9620 until it is arranged at the upper end position is a vertical movement, each of the second transmission rods 8550 is simultaneously lifted as the second transmission member 9620 is lifted.

  FIG. 167 (b) shows a state in which the first transmission member 8610 has rotated counterclockwise from FIG. 167 (a) and the transmission projection 8613 has moved to the end position of the incomplete arc hole 9625. In this state, since the transmission protrusion 8613 moves only along the extending direction of the incomplete arc hole 9625 inside the incomplete arc hole 9625, the second transmission member 9620 moves from the upper end position shown in FIG. 167 (a). Without staying in the upper end position.

  FIG. 167 (c) shows a state in which the first transmission member 8610 rotates counterclockwise from FIG. 167 (b) and the transmission projection 8613 moves from the incomplete arc hole 9625 to the end hole 8626. In this state, as the transmission protrusion 8613 moves downward, the second transmission member 9620 also moves downward, but the outermost of the second transmission rod 8550 and the main body plate portion 8611 of the first transmission member 8610. Since the radial surface (outer peripheral surface) abuts, the second transmission rod 8550 is restricted from being lowered by the main body plate portion 8611 and remains in the position illustrated in FIG. 167 (b).

  FIG. 167 (d) shows a state in which the first transmission member 8610 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise in front view) from FIG. 167 (c) and the reduced diameter portion 8614 is disposed to face the second transmission rod 8550C. The In this state, since the transmission projection 8613 passes above the partition plate portion 9627b, the vertical position of the second transmission member 9620 is greatly changed while the arrangement of the transmission projection 8613 is substantially the same as that in FIG. 167 (b). be able to.

  In this state, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 167 (c), the second transmission rod 8550C is lowered by the difference between the reduced diameter portion 8614 and the main body plate portion 8611. On the other hand, the remaining second transmission rods 8550A and 8550B remain in the positions shown in FIG. 167 (c).

  FIG. 167 (e) shows a state in which the first transmission member 8610 is rotated clockwise from the front in FIG. 167 (d) and the reduced diameter portion 8614 is disposed to face the second transmission rod 8550B. In this state, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 167 (d), the second transmission rod 8550B moves downward by the difference between the reduced diameter portion 8614 and the main body plate portion 8611. On the other hand, the remaining second transmission rod 8550A remains in the position shown in FIG. 167 (d).

  FIG. 167 (f) shows a state in which the first transmission member 8610 is rotated clockwise from the front in FIG. 167 (e) and the reduced diameter portion 8614 is disposed to face the second transmission rod 8550A. In this state, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 167 (e), the second transmission rod 8550A moves down by the difference between the reduced diameter portion 8614 and the main body plate portion 8611.

  From the state shown in FIG. 167 (e), by further rotating the first transmission member 8610 clockwise in front view, the transmission protrusion 8613 applies a load to the slide member 9628b from above, and pushes it to the right. The portion 8613 moves below the partition plate portion 9627b.

  When the first transmission member 8610 is reversed and rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the transmission projection 8613 moves below the partition plate portion 9627b while avoiding the slide member 9628b. Since it returns to the state shown, each of the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C rises all at once.

  Accordingly, when the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C are moved up by the transmission device 8600, the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C are simultaneously moved up and moved down. 8550A to 8550C can be moved downward in order. That is, the operation mode (operation order) can be switched in accordance with the operation direction of the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C.

  Further, from the state shown in FIG. 167 (a), the second transmission member 9620 can be moved up and down similarly to FIG. 147 by continuously rotating the first transmission member 8610 counterclockwise.

  In the present embodiment, an elastic spring (not shown) that applies an upward biasing force to the second transmission member 9620 from the lower side in the operation direction of the second transmission member 9620 is disposed as a configuration that facilitates realizing this. The The method of disposing the elastic spring is not particularly limited. For example, the elastic spring may be disposed such that one end side is supported by the support plate portion 8545b and the other end side is in contact with the second transmission member 9620.

  Due to the urging force of the elastic spring, the second transmission member 9620 is urged by gravity without receiving the urging force of the elastic spring at the intermediate position in the operation direction shown in FIG. 167 (c). In the lower part of the intermediate position, the elastic spring is biased against gravity. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 167, the second transmission member 9620 is not given the biasing force of the elastic spring, and only biased by gravity occurs.

  Here, when the first transmission member 8610 further rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 167 (c), the urging force of the elastic spring is applied to the second transmission member 9620 as the second transmission member 9620 moves downward. Is generated in a manner of moving upward. Accordingly, the transmission protrusion 8613 of the first transmission member 8610 moves while contacting the lower surface of the imperfect arc hole 9625, and the transmission protrusion 8613 is located below the partition plate part 9627b inside the imperfect arc hole 9625. Go through the side.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission protrusion 8613 from passing above the partition plate portion 9627b inside the imperfect arc hole 9625, so that when the first transmission member 8610 continues to rotate counterclockwise, FIG. It is possible to prevent going through the state shown in e). Therefore, the operation mode described in FIG. 147 can be realized by using the configuration in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the operation mode of the second transmission rod 8550 can be switched by sequentially switching the operation mode shown in FIG. 167 and the operation mode described above with reference to FIG. Next, the operation of the retracting member 8520 that protrudes and retracts in the internal flow path INR8 when the first transmission member 8610 operates in the pattern described in FIG. 167 and the flow-down mode of the sphere that has entered the internal flow path INR8 will be described.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the operation of the protruding and retracting member 8520 of the fifth operation pattern in the present embodiment and the length of time required for the sphere to pass through the internal flow path INR8 that changes accordingly will be described.

  FIG. 168 (a) is a diagram showing a time change in the rotation direction of the first transmission member 8610 in the fifth operation pattern, and FIG. 168 (b) is a time change in the retracting member 8520A in the fifth operation pattern. FIG. 168 (c) is a diagram showing a time change of the retracting member 8520B in the fifth operation pattern, and FIG. 168 (d) is an illustration of the retracting member 8520C in the fifth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change.

  In the drawings from FIG. 168 (a) to FIG. 168 (d), the horizontal axis is shown as the phase change of the first transmission member 8610. In other words, the angular position when rotated counterclockwise (indicated as positive rotation in FIG. 168 (a)) is 0 degree when rotated about 5 degrees counterclockwise from FIG. 167 (a). 168 (a) to 168 (d) correspond to numerical values on the horizontal axis. In this embodiment, since the first transmission member 8610 is controlled by the drive motor KM1 at a speed of 45 degrees in one second except during a stop, the horizontal direction from FIG. 168 (a) to FIG. 168 (d) is performed. A numerical value obtained by dividing the actual rotation angle calculated from the numerical value of the axis by the corresponding angle (45 degrees) represents the number of seconds required for the state change.

  The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can control the operation of the retractable member 8520 even in a mode in which a fifth operation pattern described below is inserted between the first operation patterns described above as a constant operation from power-on. The That is, the first operation pattern, the second operation pattern, the third operation pattern, the fourth operation pattern, or the fifth operation pattern are sequentially selected in a preset order, and the operation control proceeds. Hereinafter, operation control of the retracting member 8520 performed after the power is turned on will be described.

<When operating in the fifth operation pattern>
As shown in FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (d), each of the projecting members 8520A to 8520C is stretched until the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 becomes 0 to 180 degrees (4 seconds). Keep out.

  As shown in FIG. 168 (a), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 150 degrees, the first transmission member 8610 is in the reverse direction (the first transmission member 8610 on the left side when viewed from the front is clockwise when viewed from the front). The rotation is started, and the rotation direction is reversed again after a slight passage of 7 seconds from the start of rotation from 0 degrees.

  With this rotation operation, when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 75 degrees, the retracting member 8520C changes from the extended state to the retracted state (see FIG. 168 (d)).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (c), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 20 degrees, the retracting member 8520B changes its state from the extended state to the retracted state. Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 25 degrees in the reverse direction, the retracting member 8520A changes from the overhanging state to the retracted state.

  Next, immediately before 8 seconds from the start of rotation from 0 degrees, the projecting members 8520A to 8520C change from the retracted state to the extended state. The in / out member 8520 repeats the above-described state change in a cycle of 8 seconds.

  Here, the difference between the fifth operation pattern and the first operation pattern will be described. Comparing FIG. 156 with FIG. 168, it is the same that the projecting members 8520A to 8520C are in the projecting state all at once, and the period until the projecting member 8520 is in the retracted state first is also equal. The For this reason, it is difficult for the player to predict whether to operate according to the first operation pattern or the fifth operation pattern when the in / out members 8520 are in the extended state all at once. it can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game by predicting the operation mode of the in / out member 8520, firing a ball at the same timing, and forming a continuous ball, so that the pachinko machine 10 can capture (for example, a movable ball accessory device). It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will be entered into 190 with a high probability.

  In addition, since the rotation speed of the drive motor KM1 and the timing of drive stop are the same in the first operation pattern and the fifth operation pattern, the difference in the operation pattern from the drive sound and vibration of the drive motor KM1. Can be difficult to grasp.

  Note that, in the fifth operation pattern, the driving direction is reversed unlike the first operation pattern. Therefore, the difference in the operation pattern may be grasped by a change in driving sound or vibration generated at the time of reversal. On the other hand, in the first operation pattern, when the rotation direction of the drive motor KM1 of the fifth operation pattern is reversed, the drive direction is intentionally rotated twice to return the rotation direction to the same direction. It is possible to continue the operation in the first operation pattern while causing a change in driving sound and vibration generated in the operation. This makes it difficult to distinguish the first operation pattern and the fifth operation pattern from the drive sound and vibration of the drive motor KM1.

  FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the relationship between the ball entry timing of the sphere into the internal flow path INR8 and the length of time required to pass through the internal flow path INR8 in the fifth operation pattern. In FIG. 169, the horizontal axis is shown as the phase change of the first transmission member 8610. That is, as in FIG. 168, the rotation angle when rotating about 5 degrees counterclockwise from FIG. 167 (a) is set to 0 and the counterclockwise rotation is positive from there. Corresponds to the number of. In the present embodiment, since the first transmission member 8610 is controlled by the drive motor KM1 at a speed of 45 degrees per second, the actual rotation angle calculated from the values on the horizontal axis in FIG. The numerical value divided by (45 degrees) represents the number of seconds required for the state change.

  In FIG. 169, the vertical axis indicates the time until the ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 at the timing of each horizontal axis is discharged from the internal flow path INR8, with a numerical value of 22.5 degrees on the horizontal axis. For example, a ball that enters the internal flow path INR8 when the horizontal axis is 0 ° to 90 ° (2 seconds from the start of rotation) has the protruding / exiting member 8520 in an extended state when it flows down (FIG. 156). 3) required for the internal flow path INR8 to flow down through the second route RS is the numerical value on the vertical axis.

  On the other hand, for example, a ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 between 2 seconds after the start of rotation and 8 seconds after the start of rotation is not only in the region where the protruding and retracting member 8520 is in an overhanging state when it flows down, but is retracted. It also has an area that is in a state. In that region, since the sphere flows down on the first route RF, the time required is reduced compared to the case where the sphere flows down on the second route RS.

  Specifically, a sphere that has entered the internal flow path INR8 at a value of 112.5 degrees on the horizontal axis (2.5 seconds after the start of rotation from 0 degrees) is allowed to flow down the internal flow path INR8 for 2.75 seconds. From the horizontal value of 135 degrees (3.0 seconds after starting rotation from 0 degrees) to the horizontal value of 120 degrees (4.0 seconds after starting rotation from 0 degrees) It takes 2.5 seconds for the ball that entered the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8, and the horizontal axis value is 97.5 degrees (4.5 seconds after the start of rotation from 0 degrees). It takes 2.25 seconds for the ball that entered the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8, and the horizontal axis from the horizontal value of 75 degrees (5.0 seconds after the start of rotation from 0 degrees) The ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 before the value minus 25 degrees (7.0 seconds after the start of rotation from 0 degrees) is the internal flow path INR8. It takes 2.0 seconds to flow down, and the ball that entered the internal flow path INR8 at a value of minus 22.5 degrees on the horizontal axis (7.5 seconds after the start of rotation from 0 degrees) is the internal flow path INR8. It takes 2.5 seconds to flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 169, depending on when the sphere enters the internal flow path INR8, the time required for the sphere to flow down the internal flow path INR8 can be changed, and the degree of change can be reduced for a short time ( In this embodiment, it can be continuously changed in 6 seconds), and the ease of formation of a continuous ball when a ball is formed by balls that have entered the internal flow path INR8 at different timings. It can be changed by timing.

  In this operation pattern, the degree of shortening of the time required for the sphere to flow down the internal flow path INR8 (the inclination of the portion inclined downward as it goes to the right side of the line graph in FIG. 169) is small compared to the pitch of the balls. After the first ball enters, the time interval in which continuous ball formation is permitted by allowing the ball to enter the internal flow path INR8 is short.

  For example, when the first ball enters the internal flow path INR8 after 2 seconds from the start of rotation of the first transmission member 8610 from 0 degrees, it takes 3 seconds thereafter for the ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8. Time is gradually reduced. However, when the second ball enters after one second, the interval between the first and second balls is 0.5 seconds (boundary for forming a continuous ball). It is necessary to make the second ball enter the internal flow path INR8 within one second from the first ball. Accordingly, it is possible to limit the interval between the balls entering the internal flow path INR8 that can form a continuous ball.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 169, the time required for the ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8 from 2 seconds to 5 seconds after the start of rotation of the first transmission member 8610 from 0 degrees is the initial Tokh (start of rotation). 2 seconds to 3 seconds) and end-time Tokb (from 4 seconds to 5 seconds after the start of rotation), while being gradually shortened, it is constant in the medium period Tnom (from 3 seconds to 4 seconds after the start of rotation) Maintained. Therefore, for example, even when two spheres enter the internal flow path INR8 at intervals of 0.5 seconds, depending on when the spheres enter the internal flow path INR8, Whether or not it can be formed can be changed.

  For example, if two spheres enter the internal flow path INR8 at 0.5 second intervals in the initial Tokh or end stage Tokb, the time required for the previous sphere to flow down the internal flow path INR8 is compared. Since the time required for the subsequent sphere to flow down the internal flow path INR8 is shortened by 0.25 seconds, the interval between the two spheres is 0.25 seconds. A ball can be formed.

  On the other hand, if the two spheres enter the internal flow path INR8 at 0.5 second intervals in the middle Tnom, the time required for the previous sphere to flow down the internal flow path INR8 and the subsequent sphere Since the time required to flow down the internal flow path INR8 is the same, the interval between the two spheres remains unchanged for 0.5 seconds. Therefore, a continuous ball cannot be formed when discharging from the internal flow path INR8.

  In this operation pattern, the middle period Tnom that cannot form a continuous ball even if a ball enters at intervals of 0.5 seconds, the initial Tokh and the final period Tokb that can form a continuous ball if the balls enter at intervals of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, whether or not a continuous ball can be formed can be changed every short time (for example, 1 second, which is the time of the medium period Tnom). Thereby, it is possible to improve attention to the timing at which the sphere enters the internal flow path INR8.

  Here, by confirming the operation mode of the in / out member 8520, the player can grasp the launch timing at which it is easy to form a continuous ball, and thereby the player can select the launch mode of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to form a continuous ball using the pre-winning flow-down device 8520 to the retracting member 8520.

  On the other hand, in this operation pattern and the first operation pattern, the operation mode of the in / out member 8520 is very similar except that the order in which the in / out members 8520A to 8520C are in the retracted state is opposite, and the in / out member It is difficult to figure out which operation pattern the 8520 is operating in. In addition, since the timing at which a ball is easily formed by entering a ball into the internal flow path INR8 is at least partially different between the present operation pattern and the first operation pattern, the state of the retracting member 8520 is a mark. As a result, it is possible to make difficult a gaming method that makes it easy to form a continuous ball by adjusting the firing timing of the ball. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is captured (for example, a ball is inserted into the movable ball accessory device 190 with a high probability).

  In addition, in this operation pattern and the first operation pattern, in common, a period during which a continuous ball is easily formed is between 4 seconds and 5 seconds after the first transmission member 8610 starts rotating from 0 degrees. It is formed. Therefore, regardless of whether it operates in this operation pattern or the first operation pattern, the internal flow path INR8 enters the internal flow path INR8 between 4 seconds and 5 seconds after the first transmission member 8610 starts rotating from 0 degrees. By striking a ball so as to allow a plurality of balls to enter, the player can form a continuous ball with a high probability.

  Accordingly, as a gaming method capable of forming a continuous ball with a high probability, it is urged to perform a game of concentrating and launching a ball within 4 to 5 seconds after the first transmission member 8610 starts rotating from 0 degrees. be able to.

  With reference to FIG. 170, the difference of each operation pattern mentioned above is demonstrated. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between an operation pattern and each parameter in forming a continuous ball.

  In FIG. 170, the maximum number of connected balls Nmax as the maximum number of balls that can be taken together (can be moved into the moving-ball-injection accessory device 190 by opening the movable piece 190 a once) as each parameter in forming the connected balls. And a maximum permissible period Tmax as the maximum deviation of the timing of entering the two spheres forming the continuous ball, and entering the 0.5 second interval while the first transmission member 8610 performs one cycle operation. A continuous continuous ball formation period Tcha as a period during which a continuous ball can be formed is illustrated. A case where balls can enter the internal flow path INR8 at intervals of a minimum of 0.5 seconds and the interval between the spheres is shortened to an interval of 0.5 seconds or less will be described as a case where continuous balls are formed. .

  Specifically, when the operation is controlled with the first operation pattern, the maximum number of continuous balls Nmax that can be expected is 4, the maximum allowable period Tmax is 1.5 seconds, and the continuous continuous ball formation period Tcha is 2.0. Seconds.

  When the operation is controlled with the second operation pattern, the maximum number of continuous balls Nmax that can be expected is 3, the maximum allowable period Tmax is 1.5 seconds, and the continuous continuous ball formation period Tcha is 0.5 seconds.

  In the second operation pattern, unlike the first operation pattern, there is a period in which a continuous ball is not formed even if a ball is introduced at intervals of 0.5 seconds during the maximum allowable period Tmax.

  That is, when the ball P1 enters the internal flow path INR8 as the first ball, even if the ball P2 (at intervals of 0.5 seconds from the ball P1) enters, a continuous ball is not formed (see FIG. 159). On the other hand, when the sphere P1 enters the internal flow path INR8 as the first sphere, the sphere P2 (the interval between the sphere P1 and 1.0 second) enters the sphere P2 or the sphere P2 Regardless of whether or not there is an incoming ball, the incoming ball P4 (with the interval of 1.5 seconds from the ball P1) or the like, a continuous ball of the balls P1 and P3 or the balls P1 and P4 is formed.

  Therefore, when the sphere P1 enters the internal flow path INR8 as the first sphere, the sphere P3 or the sphere P4 enters at an interval rather than the immediately following sphere P2 enters. The profit that a player can obtain in terms of formation of a continuous ball increases.

  On the other hand, when the ball P3 enters the internal flow path INR8 as the first ball, a continuous ball is formed only when the ball P4 (at intervals of 0.5 seconds from the ball P3) enters. For this reason, when the ball P3 enters the internal flow path INR8 as the first ball, the ball P4 immediately after entering the ball is referred to as formation of a continuous ball compared to the case where another ball enters. In terms of benefits, the player's profits will increase.

  As described above, in the second operation pattern, the time difference until the second ball enters the internal flow path INR8 depends on whether the first ball is the ball P1 or the ball P3. The best value at varies. Since the difference in the timing of entering the ball P1 and the ball P3 is only 1 second, whether the ball entered the internal flow path INR8 at the timing of the ball P1 during the game or entered the internal flow path INR8 at the timing of the ball P3. Since it is difficult to recognize whether or not the ball has entered, if a ball that subsequently enters the ball enters immediately after (a ball P4 with respect to the ball P3), a continuous ball is formed, or a ball is inserted at an interval. It may be difficult for the player to recognize whether a continuous ball is formed in the case (the ball P4 with respect to the ball P1).

  Thereby, when a plurality of balls enter the internal flow path INR8, it is difficult to grasp whether or not a continuous ball is formed until the ball is actually discharged from the internal flow path INR8. It is possible to improve the attention to the sphere flowing down the INR8.

  When the operation is controlled by the third operation pattern, the maximum number of consecutive balls Nmax that can be expected is 3, the maximum allowable period Tmax is 1.0 seconds, and the continuous ball formation period Tcha is 2.5 seconds.

  That is, in the third operation pattern, compared to the first operation pattern, there is a period in which the second ball enters the internal flow path INR8 and then the second ball enters to form a continuous ball. On the other hand, the period during which the sphere enters the ball immediately after the first ball enters the internal flow path INR8 (0.5 second interval) and can form a continuous ball is widened. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of forming a continuous ball when entering the top opening 8512 in succession.

  When the operation is controlled with the fourth operation pattern, the maximum number of continuous balls Nmax that can be expected is 2, the maximum allowable period Tmax is 0.5 seconds, and the continuous continuous ball formation period Tcha is 2.0 seconds.

  That is, in the fourth operation pattern, compared to the first operation pattern, there is a period in which the second ball enters the internal flow path INR8 and then the second ball enters to form a continuous ball. It is narrowed. Therefore, when a ball enters the internal flow path INR8 at a ball entry timing (for example, at intervals of 1 second) where a ball can be formed in the first operation pattern, no ball is formed in this operation pattern. Can be.

  When the operation is controlled with the fifth operation pattern, the maximum possible number of continuous balls Nmax is 2, the maximum allowable period Tmax is 0.5 seconds, and the continuous continuous ball formation period Tcha is 2.0 seconds (divided 1.0 seconds + 1.0 seconds).

  That is, in the fifth operation pattern, compared to the first operation pattern, a period in which the second ball enters the internal flow path INR8 and then the second ball enters can form a continuous ball. In addition to being narrowed to 0.5 seconds, when two spheres enter the ball, the period for forming a continuous ball is divided into two every second. That is, a period in which a ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 at intervals of 0.5 seconds can form a continuous ball, and a period in which a ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 at intervals of 0.5 seconds cannot form a continuous ball Therefore, the switching interval between the period in which the continuous sphere can be formed and the period in which the continuous sphere cannot be formed can be shortened.

  In this case, the ball can be prevented from being formed when the timing at which the two balls enter the internal flow path INR8 is delayed by one second from the timing at which the ball is formed or is advanced by one second. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the timing at which two balls enter the internal flow path INR8.

  Thus, each operation pattern has its own characteristics. By sequentially switching each of these operation patterns and controlling the operation, for example, when the intruding member 8520 is in the same state, even if the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 at the same interval, Since it can cause a case where it is not formed, it is possible to prevent tiredness when playing for a long period of time, and the pachinko machine 10 captures (for example, a ball with a high probability of joining a ball to the movable ball accessory device 190) ) Can be reduced.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 174. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the flow mode of the sphere flowing down the internal flow path INR8 is switched by the change of the state of the in / out member 8520 has been described. However, the pre-winning downflow device 10500 in the tenth embodiment includes the in / out member 8520 Is provided with a removal device 10560 that projects into the internal flow path INR8 in a different mode of operation and acts on the sphere. The configuration of the pre-winning flow-down device 10500 in the tenth embodiment is the same as that of the pre-winning flow-down device 8500 in the eighth embodiment, except that the removal device 10560 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  171 and 172 are partial cross-sectional views of the pre-winning flow-down device 10500 in the tenth embodiment on the line corresponding to the CLII-CLII line of FIG. 148, and FIG. 173 is before the winning line on the CLXXIII-CLXXIII line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of flow down device 10500. In FIG. 171, the retracted state of the removing device 10560 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the extended state of the removing device 10560 is illustrated.

  The removal device 10560 is disposed in the interior space of the ceiling plate portion 8542 of the back side device 8540 and is movable in the vertical direction on the lower surface of the ceiling plate portion 8542, and the main body plate portion 10561 A plurality of projecting portions 10562 projecting downward from a lower surface at a position corresponding to the projecting member 8520, a spring member 10563 for generating a biasing force that moves the main body plate portion 10561 to a retracted position, and the spring member 10563 And a solenoid 10564 that generates a driving force that pushes the main body plate portion 10561 down to the position of the extended state against the urging force.

  The projecting portion 10562 has a range in which the projecting member 8520 projects to the internal flow path INR8 when the projecting member 8520 is in the projecting state when the main body plate unit 10561 is viewed in the moving direction (viewed in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 173) In addition, the removal device 10560 protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the sphere in the overhanging state (a position half the diameter in the height direction of the sphere (vertical direction in FIG. 172)).

  One end of the spring member 10563 is supported by the ceiling plate portion 8542, and the other end supports the main body plate portion 10561. The side surface of the main body plate portion 10561 facing the solenoid 10564 is inclined upward as the distance from the solenoid 10564 increases.

  Thus, as the solenoid 10564 expands and contracts in the horizontal direction, the main body plate portion 10561 moves up and down by the amount of change in the vertical direction of the contact position between the main body plate portion 10561 and the solenoid 10564 due to the inclination of the main body plate portion 10561. . That is, from the retracted state shown in FIG. 171, the solenoid 10564 is excited and expands and contracts to change to the extended state shown in FIGS. 172 and 173. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 10564 is released, the main body plate portion 10561 is raised by the urging force of the spring member 10563 and changes to a retracted state.

  Here, the operation of the protruding and retracting member 8520 is an operation in the front-rear direction, while the operation of the protruding portion 10562 is an operation in the up-down direction (operation in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction), and the operation range of each other does not interfere. The protruding portion 10562 can be operated regardless of the operation mode of the protruding and retracting member 8520. Thereby, the freedom degree of operation control can be improved.

  In the overhanging state, as shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the protruding portion 10562 protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the sphere (a position half the diameter in the height direction of the sphere (vertical direction in FIG. 172)). Therefore, regardless of whether the in / out member 8520 is in the retracted state or the overhanging state, the sphere flowing down the internal flow path INR8 contacts the protruding portion 10562 and flows down through the second path RS.

  Therefore, by setting the removal device 10560 in the overhanging state, the time required for the ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8 can be made constant regardless of the operation pattern of the retracting member 8520, and the formation of the continuous ball can be made. Can be suppressed.

  In other words, when the removing device 10560 is in the retracted state, there is a possibility that a ball can be formed by the operation mode of the retracting member 8520, while the removing device 10560 is in the overhanging state. Regardless of how the in / out member 8520 operates, formation of a continuous ball can be suppressed. That is, the removal device 10560 can eliminate the continuous ball forming action of the intruding member 8520.

  Hereinafter, examples of the operation pattern in the present embodiment (sixth operation pattern, seventh operation pattern) will be described.

  FIG. 174 (a) is a time chart for explaining the flow of state change of the removal device 10560 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 174 (b) is the flow of state change of the removal device 10560 in the seventh operation pattern. It is a time chart explaining. In the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern, the intruding member 8520 is controlled so as to be operable in any of the above-described operation patterns (first operation pattern to fifth operation pattern).

  First, the sixth operation pattern will be described. The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can control the removal device 10560 with a sixth operation pattern described below as an operation triggered by the opening operation of the movable piece 190a. Hereinafter, operation control of the removing device 10560 will be described.

<When operating in the sixth operation pattern>
As shown in FIG. 174 (a), in the sixth operation pattern, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the removal device 10560 is in the retracted state, while the gaming state is In the case of the jackpot gaming state, the removing device 10560 is set in the overhanging state.

  Thus, in the sixth operation pattern, in the normal game state or the small hit game state, the action of the in / out member 8520 changes the flow-down mode of the sphere flowing down the internal flow path INR8 and maintains the action of forming a continuous ball. On the other hand, in the big hit gaming state, formation of a ball of spheres flowing down the internal flow path INR8 can be suppressed.

  Therefore, according to this operation pattern, until the big hit game state is entered, the possibility of winning a big hit is increased while increasing the possibility of winning a big hit by increasing the possibility of the balls entering the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 in a row. In the state, by suppressing the formation of a continuous ball, a ball more than the prescribed number of rounds (the so-called count number) wins by entering the continuous ball entering the movable ball accessory device 190 just before the end of the round game. (So-called over-winning) can be suppressed.

  Further, the internal flow path INR8 can be a flow path that has different effects on the flowing down ball in the normal gaming state or the small hit gaming state and in the big hit gaming state. Thereby, compared with the case where the flow path of the sphere is changed by changing the flow path of the sphere in the normal game state or the small hit game state and in the case of the big hit game state, the flow path is arranged. Space can be reduced, and the flow-down mode of the sphere can be changed efficiently in a game area where the area is limited.

  Next, the seventh operation pattern will be described. The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can control the removal device 10560 with a seventh operation pattern described below as an operation triggered by the opening operation of the movable piece 190a. Hereinafter, operation control of the removing device 10560 will be described.

<When operating in the seventh operation pattern>
As shown in FIG. 174 (b), in the seventh operation pattern, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the removing device 10560 is in the retracted state, while the gaming state is In the case of the jackpot game state, the removal device 10560 is set in an overhanging state simultaneously with the start of the round game of each round, and is evacuated within a specified time of the round game (for example, 10 seconds after the start of the round game). Can be switched to.

  As a result, in the seventh operation pattern, in the normal game state or the small hit game state, the action of the in / out member 8520 changes the flow-down mode of the sphere flowing down the internal flow path INR8 and maintains the action of forming a continuous ball. On the other hand, in the jackpot game state, the formation of a ball of spheres flowing down the internal flow path INR8 is suppressed for a predetermined period from the start of the round game of each round, and the internal flow is performed according to the interval entered into the internal flow path INR8. On the other hand, in the sphere that flows down the internal flow path INR8 after a predetermined period has passed, the ball INR8 is discharged from the path INR8 (the sphere interval is maintained). To rise.

  Therefore, according to this operation pattern, until the jackpot gaming state is entered, the possibility of winning the jackpot can be increased by increasing the possibility that the balls enter the movable pitching tool device 190 in a row. In the jackpot game state, the number of winnings can be easily managed by allowing the big winning opening switch 190b to win at an interval before the predetermined period elapses after the start of the round game of each round. And a game method in which the consecutive ball is awarded to the big winning opening switch 190b can be easily performed.

  As a result, it is highly probable to stop winning the ball by winning until the specified number of round games (maintaining immediately before the end of the round game), and then letting the consecutive ball win the big winning opening switch 190b. This can be realized, and the possibility of over winning is raised.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the game ball that has entered the second branch area 420 of the second flow down device 400 falls immediately after reaching the first delay preparation hole 423, but is not necessarily limited thereto. Absent. For example, a blocking member that protrudes inward of the first delay preparation hole 423 by a driving force of a driving device such as a solenoid to prevent the game ball from dropping is provided, and the blocking member causes the third branch region 430 to act. The fall of the game ball may be stopped until another game ball that has faced passes through the specific area hole 440. In this case, the length of the second delay guide flow path R6 can be shortened, and the space occupied by the flow path formed by the second flow down device 400 can be saved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the allocating body 322 is separated from the driving unit has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a locking member that protrudes toward the sorting body 322 every predetermined period may be provided, and the sorting body 322 may be fixed every predetermined period by the action of the locking member. In this case, when only one game ball reaches and contacts the distribution body 322 when the distribution body 322 is fixed in an equilibrium state, the distribution body 322 is not rotated, and the game ball enters the special route hole 323. Flow down. In other words, even when only one game ball enters the first flow-down device 300 every predetermined period, a period during which the game ball enters the special route hole 323 can be generated.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the allocating body 322 rotates has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the allocating body 322 may slide to the left and right.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the frictional resistance generated between the shaft support bar 322f of the distributing body 322 and the resistance extending portion 322d changes according to the rotation angle, but is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, while rotating on the same axis as the allocating body 322, the allocating body 322 is not engaged until it changes from the equilibrium state to the first angle state, and until the allocating body 322 changes from the first angle state to the second angle state. May be provided with an engaging member that engages and rotates in synchronization with the distributing body 322. In this case, only the rotational resistance of the distributing body 322 is applied from the equilibrium state to the first angle state, while the engaging member is added to the rotational resistance of the distributing body 322 from the first angle state to the second angle state. Since the resistance of the engaging member due to the weight of the engaging member is applied to the distributing body 322, the ease of rotation of the distributing body 322 can be changed. The mode of engagement is not particularly limited. For example, the engagement may be performed from the inside of the fan-shaped portion 322a, or may be performed from the outside of the fan-shaped portion 322a.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed region hole 340, which specific region switch 441a to 443a a game ball that passes through the specific region later passes is determined by which previous game ball Although the case where it selected at random irrespective of whether it passes through specific area switch 441a-443a was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the later game ball may pass through the specific area switches 442a and 443a that are more profitable to the player than the specific area switches 441a to 443a through which the previous game ball has passed. In this case, the interest can be continuously improved while the player watches the flow-down mode of the game ball.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the big prize opening switch 190b is normally closed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the big prize opening switch 190b may be always open. In this case, since it is always in a state where the jackpot acquisition can be aimed, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the determination values of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 are all set as the same small hit determination value, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, different small hit determination values may be set. In this case, for example, half of the determination values may correspond to a determination value with a short time after jackpot, and the remaining determination values may correspond to a determination value without a short time after jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to sort whether or not the time is set after the big hit without requiring the time setting switch 209d.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the corresponding driving device (for example, the staying solenoid 413) operates only for a predetermined period after passing through the fixed region switch 340a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be configured to perform a certain operation on the basis of the operation timing of the movable piece 190a of the movable ball accessory device 190. In this case, the drive maintaining period of the drive device (for example, the staying solenoid 413) is set to be longer than the longest period required for the game ball to pass through the first flow-down device 300 and reach the flow-off prevention plate 412.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where each protruding and retracting member 8520 is driven by the single drive motor KM1 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, each of the in / out members 8520A to 8520C may be operated by a driving force of a separate driving device (for example, a solenoid). In this case, the projecting members 8520A and 8520C at both ends can be in a common state, and only the intermediate projecting member 8520B can be easily changed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front and rear wall surfaces of the internal flow path INR8 are parallel to each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a rail-shaped curved wall surface that is a member that guides a sphere that flows down in the second route RS at a bending position of the second route RS and that extends in a curved manner between the left and right extending and retracting members 8520 is arranged. May be installed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a ball clogging caused by a collision between a sphere that rebounds in the front-rear direction and the sphere that has come later in the front-rear direction between the projecting members 8520. On the other hand, it is possible to make it easier to form continuous balls due to clogging.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which each of the in / out members 8520 appears in the horizontal direction. For example, it may appear and appear in a manner that protrudes upward from the bottom surface of the internal flow path INR8. In this case, the flow path of the sphere flowing down the internal flow path INR8 can be switched between a linear path extending in the left-right direction and a bent path bending in the vertical direction, thereby suppressing the width in the front-rear direction of the internal flow path INR8. can do. Thereby, the ball flowing down the internal flow path INR8 can always be arranged at a position (front side) where the player can easily see.

  Further, the floor itself on which the sphere rolls may perform an operation of changing the vertical inclination angle thereof. In this case, the sphere does not decelerate due to contact with the member, but the flow speed of the rolling sphere can be adjusted according to the inclination angle, so that the sphere can flow smoothly.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the in / out member 8520 moves in translation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the protruding / exiting member 8520 may be projected by rotating the shaft.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the retracting member 8520 is maintained in the overhanging state even after the second transmission rod 8550 is lowered, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by providing an elastic member that urges the in / out member 8520 toward the retracted position, the in / out member 8520 may be changed to the retracted state when the second transmission rod 8550 is lowered. In this case, since the state of the in / out member 8520 and the state of the second transmission rod 8550 correspond one-to-one, the operation mode of the transmission device 8600 can be accurately predicted from the state of the in / out member 8520.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the intruding member 8520 is moved into and out of the internal flow path INR8, and the sphere and the intruding member 8520 are brought into contact with each other to change the flow-down mode of the sphere. It is not something that can be done. For example, a magnet may be moved closer to and away from the outside of the internal flow path INR8 instead of the second transmission rod 8550, and the sphere may be decelerated by the action of magnetic force. In this case, it is possible to change the flow mode of the sphere (flow speed change mode) according to the flow timing while the flow path of the sphere is the same.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the internal flow path INR8 in which the protruding and retracting member 8520 protrudes and retracts is disposed on the upstream side of the movable piece 190a of the movable ball accessory device 190 is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the projecting / retracting member 8510 may be projected and retracted in the introduction passage 310 disposed on the downstream side of the movable piece 190a. In this case, the positional shift between the balls that have entered the movable incoming ball accessory device 190 at different timings can be changed by the action of the retracting member 8520, so when entering the movable incoming ball accessory device 190. With respect to the timing shift, the timing shift when entering the route sorting unit 320 can be changed. Thereby, even when the timing of entering a plurality of balls into the movable ball accessory device 190 is the same, it is possible to cause a change in the flow mode of the spheres after the introduction passage 310, and to change the flow mode of the spheres. Can be diversified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the switching of the operation order according to the operation direction of the second transmission rod 8550 has been described using the first transmission member 8610 that rotates and the second transmission member 8620 that performs translation. It is not limited. For example, the operation order of the second transmission rod 8550 is switched by a cylindrical music box member that rotates around an axis (rotation axis) intersecting the translational direction axis of the second transmission rod 8550 and whose outer peripheral surface abuts on the second transmission rod 8550. May be performed.

  That is, the cylindrical music box member has a bulge that bulges out in a circular arc shape around the rotational axis by a predetermined angle on a plane perpendicular to the rotational axis and including the translational direction axis of the second transmission rod 8550. A part. When the bulging portion faces the second transmission rod 8550, the second transmission rod 8550 moves upward by the amount corresponding to the bulging portion, and when the bulging portion does not face the second transmission rod 8550, the second transmission rod 8550 is moved upward. The bar 8550 is disposed at the lower end position of the movement range.

  Cylindrical music box members are formed by causing the bulging portion to cause the desired operation of the second transmission rod 8550 in the circumferential direction at positions corresponding to the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C. As a result of the rotation, the operation order of the second transmission rod 8550 can be switched by transmitting a driving force similar to a music box. Thereby, the operation sequence of the second transmission expansion 8550 can be switched by a single cylindrical music box member.

  Note that the bulging portion may change the degree of diameter expansion in a plurality of stages as it moves in the circumferential direction. In this case, the operation width of the in / out member 8520 can be changed in a plurality of stages, and it is difficult to aim the firing timing from the state of the in / out member 8520.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a ball that has entered the top opening 8512 is distributed to the left and right by the sorting device 8543, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it moves in and out on the downstream side of the top opening 8512 and the upstream side of the sorting device 8543, and the ball is allowed to flow down to the sorting device 8543 in the sinked state, and the ball is restricted from moving toward the sorting device 8543 in the protruding state. However, it is also possible to provide electric guide means for making a ball enter the left or right internal flow path INR8. In this case, when the electric guide means is in the out state, the balls that have entered the top opening 8512 can be flowed down exclusively to one internal flow path INR8 without being distributed. As a result, even when a plurality of spheres enter the top opening 8512, the spheres can be distributed to a plurality of flow paths, and the length of the group of spheres can be reduced. It is possible to cause a change from the case where the length of the sphere group is increased.

  In addition, as a mode of the appearance operation | movement of an electrically-driven guidance means, the fixed operation mode performed from the time of power activation, the fixed operation mode performed on the basis of the timing at which the movable piece 190a was opened in the big hit gaming state, etc. Illustrated. For example, in the normal state, when the electric guide means is in the sunk state, and in the big hit gaming state, the electric guide means is in the extended state, in the normal state, four balls are connected by a single opening operation of the movable piece 190a. While it is possible to enter as a sphere (possible to enter from the left and right movable pieces 190a), in the big hit game state, since the group of balls is long, let's enter four balls as a continuous ball in a single opening action In addition, it is possible to cause a change such that it is not in time for the open period (about three is the limit). As a result, the number of consecutive balls formed can be changed while the operation mode of the retractable member 8520 is the same.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, except that one drive motor KM2 is stopped, the group of the pair of left and right protruding and retracting members 8520 performs a symmetrical operation, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the groups of left and right protruding / disconnecting members 8520 may operate simultaneously with different operation patterns, or control may be performed so that the operation start timings of the groups of left and right protruding / contracting members 8520 are shifted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, it has been described that it is difficult to grasp the load applied by the in / out member 8520 to the sphere from the appearance of the in / out member 8520 by making it difficult to visually recognize the transmission rods 8520 and 8550 from the front side. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is difficult to visually recognize the state of the internal flow path INR8 by moving it away from the glass surface, to make it difficult to visually recognize the illumination around the internal flow path INR8, or to arrange it on the front side of the liquid crystal device. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the state of the internal flow path INR8 by dimming with a light emission effect by a light guide plate or the like provided.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which when the movable piece 190a is operated immediately after a ball is won at each start winning opening 26 to 28, notification is made that the ball is continuously inserted into the top opening 8512. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, each start winning opening 26 to 28 is formed so as to be able to store (hold) the number of wins, and the sphere can be moved in relation to the subsequent opening operation (held opening operation) instead of the most recent opening operation. The above-described notification may be performed when it is possible to enter the entrance combination device 190. In this case, as compared to the case where the movable piece 190a is opened immediately after winning a prize, the period until the movable piece 190a operates can be made longer, so that the period during which the notification can be performed can be made longer. it can. Therefore, the freedom degree of an alerting | reporting aspect can be raised. For example, it is possible to notify the aspect of counting down toward the best firing timing in terms of formation of a continuous ball.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where various notifications are mainly performed by voice / lamp has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, various notifications may be performed using a known liquid crystal device. In this case, since the player's attention can be gathered in the liquid crystal device at the time of notification, the player's line of sight can be diverted from the flow-down mode of the ball.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the pair of guide rails 3321 on which the game ball rolls is formed in a downwardly convex curved shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a pair of guide rails 3321 are each formed from a linear shape intersecting at one point, and a large special route hole 3323 configured to be able to drop a game ball is formed outside the intersecting position. When the game balls that flow down collide at the crossing position, the game balls are blown outward by the collision, reach the special route hole 3323, and fall, but if they do not collide, the end of the guide rail 3321 The game ball may fall to the normal route hole 3324 disposed near the end of the guide rail 3321. In this case, since the game ball falls into the special route hole 3323 at the point where the game ball is blown outward due to the collision of the game ball, the game ball can be dropped into the special route hole 3323 without waiting for the deceleration of the game ball. it can. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball when the game ball falls into the special route hole 3323 can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the central rail portion 3321a is shared by the pair of guide rails 3321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the central rail portion 3321a may be provided individually for each pair of guide rails 3321, and the distance between the central rail portions 3321a may be a distance at which rolling game balls interfere with each other. In this case, for example, one central rail portion 3321a is formed from a meandering rail shape, and the other central rail portion 3321a is formed from a linear rail shape. The degree of interference between the game balls (projected areas in the direction of travel of the game balls) is different, and the flow-down mode of the game balls after the collision can be changed.

  Thereby, the period until it falls into the special route hole 3323 after the collision can be changed for each collision position (after the game ball enters the movable accessory device 90, the game ball enters the second flow down device 400. It is possible to change the period until the ball is entered), and it is possible to suppress the timing at which the game ball is fired by looking at the state of the movable plate 421a automatically operated by the second flow down device 400.

  In the sixth embodiment, the inlet opening 6440i of the specific region hole 6440 is configured with a shape corresponding to the three specific region holes 6441 to 6443, and the profit increasing device 6450 is configured with two rotating members. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specific area hole is composed of four holes with different profits (for example, the specific area holes having different numbers of rounds of 16 rounds, 12 rounds, 7 rounds, and 3 rounds), and the inlet opening 6440i corresponds thereto. It is composed of a shape (four-pronged hole shape), and the profit increasing device 6450 is composed of three rotating members arranged at the inlets of three specific area holes excluding the specific area hole of maximum profit. Also good. In this case, the game characteristics when a plurality of game balls flow into the timed branch region 6410 can be made more complicated.

  Here, each of the three rotating members can enter a game ball into a specific area hole, which is less profitable than the specific area hole directly below (position where the game ball that rotates the rotating member flows down as it is), It is configured so as to be closed according to the state after the operation. In this case, for example, if four or more game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 under the assumption that only one game ball is accommodated in each specific area hole, the game balls are all in the specific area. Since the game ball has passed through a specific area hole that can obtain the maximum profit because it passes through the hole, the player can obtain the maximum profit, but four or more game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 It is difficult to make it.

  Here, for example, when two game balls are connected and flow into the timed branch area 6410, the previous game ball is guided to the specific area hole that gives the second highest profit (below the maximum profit). Since the guide device is arranged on the upstream side of the specific area hole, the specific area hole that gives the third and fourth profits is closed by the rotating member operated by the action of the previous game ball. The game ball can be guided to a specific area hole that gives the maximum benefit.

  Also, for example, when two game balls are linked and flow into the timed branch area 6410, the previous game ball flows into the specific area hole that gives the third highest profit (two lower than the maximum profit). In this case, the slide delay device allows the game ball that has been extended for a short time to flow down to the specific area hole that gives the second highest profit (below the maximum profit) to the specific area hole side with higher profit. You may make it provide. In this case, on the assumption that two game balls flow into the timed branch region 6410 and the previous game ball flows into the specific region hole that gives the third highest profit, the previous game ball is in the specific region hole. In the case where the later game ball flows down the specific area hole that gives the second highest profit within a short period of time, the slide delay device acts on the later game ball, It is possible to flow down to the specific area hole side with the highest profit.

  For example, when a game ball flows into a specific area hole that gives the fourth highest profit, the slide delay device performs an extension operation only for a short time, and gives the second highest profit (below the maximum profit). A game ball that has flowed down to a specific area hole or a specific area hole that gives the third highest profit (two lower than the maximum profit) may flow down to the specific area hole side having higher profit. In this case, if the previous game ball flows into the specific area hole that gives the fourth highest profit, and the subsequent game ball reaches the entrance opening of the specific area hole within a short time, the slide delay Due to the action of the device, it is possible to cause a later game ball to flow down to a specific area side with higher profit.

  In addition, when three game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410, the profit that can be obtained by entering the third area hole where the profit for obtaining the first game ball is the third highest and operating the rotating member is obtained. Since the lowest specific area hole is closed, either one of the remaining two game balls will pass through the specific area hole where the profit to be obtained is maximized.

  Therefore, for example, when three game balls are connected to the timed branch area 6410, the previous game ball is guided to the specific area hole that gives the third highest profit (two lower than the maximum profit). By arranging the guide device on the upstream side of the specific area hole, it is possible to guide either one of the later game balls to the specific area hole that gives the maximum benefit.

  The same applies to the case where two game balls flow into the timed branch region 6410. This is also true when the number of holes in the specific area is 5 or more. That is, when the specific area hole 6440 is composed of n (n is a natural number) holes that give different benefits, and m (m is a natural number, m <n) game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410, If the first game ball flows down to the specific area hole that gives the m-th highest profit from the top, the subsequent game ball is prevented from flowing into the specific area hole that gives the lower profit. Any one of the game balls will flow down the specific area hole with the highest profit. Therefore, the player can obtain the maximum profit (16 round jackpot).

  Therefore, the number (m) of game balls flowing into the timed branch region 6410 and the profit order (n1) of the specific region hole in which the first game ball is accommodated are detected, and they are in a predetermined relationship (m ≧ When n1) is satisfied, any of the later game balls will pass through a specific area hole where the maximum profit is given, so when the relationship is satisfied, the effect of acquiring the maximum profit is performed. Also good. Thereby, the player can watch the game ball flowing down the timed branch area 6410 with peace of mind.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the screw member 7453 is always driven has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a driving mode in which the driving is stopped for several seconds (for example, 1 second) every time it is driven for several seconds (for example, 10 seconds) may be employed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the timing of launching the game ball by checking the posture of the screw member 7453.

  Although the case where the pre-winning flow-down device 8500 moves close in the front-rear direction when assembled is described in the eighth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in a configuration in which the assembly is moved close to each other in the up-down direction and assembled, the assembly may be fitted into the opening 8013a and fastened to the game board 8013 after assembling in the previous process. In this case, since the front-side device 8510 or the back-side device 8540 can be replaced only after the assembly is removed, the process up to the replacement can be lengthened. Can do.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the angle formed between the facing surface in contact with the ball of the collision portion 8521 and the front and rear wall surfaces of the internal flow path INR8 is greater than 45 degrees, but is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the angle may be smaller than 45 degrees. In this case, when the ball and the collision part 8521 collide, the component in the moving direction of the load member 8520 applied from the ball to the bump member 8520 becomes large. Therefore, when the bump member 8520 is moved by the load of the ball, The load required for the movement can be reduced. Therefore, even if the momentum of the sphere becomes weak, the intruding member 8520 can be moved with a load from the sphere.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the in / out member 8520 operates with constant operation control from the time of turning on the power, and the removal device 10560 is controlled on the basis of the opening operation of the movable piece 190a in the big hit gaming state. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the removing device 10560 may be operated with a constant operation control from the time of power-on, and the retracting member 8520 may be controlled with reference to the opening operation of the movable piece 190a in the big hit gaming state.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the in / out member 8520 operates with constant operation control from the time of turning on the power, and the removal device 10560 is controlled on the basis of the opening operation of the movable piece 190a in the big hit gaming state. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the in / out member 8520 or the removal device 10560 may operate in response to the ball entering the start winning prize ports 26 to 28. In this case, for example, since the operation mode of the in / out member 8520 can be changed depending on the difference in the small hit type acquired by winning a prize, the formation mode of the continuous ball can be changed for each opening operation of the movable piece 190a. Therefore, with respect to a pair of different cases at the time of occurrence in which the timing at which a plurality of spheres enter the internal flow path INR8 is equivalent with reference to the opening timing of the movable piece 190a, at one time, a continuous ball is formed, and at other times Can cause changes such as inability to form a continuous ball. This can prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the in / out member 8520 operates with constant operation control from the time of turning on the power, and the removal device 10560 is controlled on the basis of the opening operation of the movable piece 190a in the big hit gaming state. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the in / out member 8520 or the removal device 10560 may be controlled so as to start the operation based on the fact that the number of winnings to the big winning opening switch 190b in the round game of each round in the big hit gaming state has reached a predetermined number. .

  For example, similarly to the seventh operation pattern described above, the removing device 10560 is in an overhanging state at the start of the round game of each round, and unlike the seventh operation pattern, the number of winnings to the first prize opening switch 190b is a predetermined number (for example, 9 It may be in the evacuation state based on the fact that the count / count number 10C) is reached. In this case, it is possible to increase the possibility of forming a continuous ball just before the end of the round game of each round. This change in possibility occurs regardless of the manner in which the ball is fired (whether to stop or whether to shift the timing of the start of firing), so it is possible to prevent changes in the ball due to differences in experience. .

  Also, for example, contrary to the above-described aspect, the removal device 10560 is in a retracted state at the start of the round game of each round, and the number of winnings to the first winning port switch 190b reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces / count number 10C). It may be overhanging based on what has been done. In this case, since it is possible to reduce the possibility of forming a continuous ball just before the end of the round game of each round, it is possible to form a continuous ball other than just before the end of the round game of each round while suppressing over winning. It is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of separating and winning the balls one by one.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the removing device 10560 operates for a predetermined period from the start of the round game in each round in the jackpot game state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, different periods until the operation of the removal device 10560 may be set in advance for each jackpot type. In this case, since the operation timing of the removal device 10560 is different for each jackpot type, it is possible to prevent the timing at which a ball is easily formed from being the same in each jackpot game. Thereby, since the player can be made to think about the timing of ball launch during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from playing casually.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case has been described in which a ball that is formed by the pre-winning flow down device 10500 performs a notification that suggests the timing at which it is possible to enter the movable ball accessory device 190. It is not limited. For example, in consideration of the state after the second flow-down device 400, even if a notification regarding a change in profit that can be acquired corresponding to the number of balls entered is made, such as “If 2 balls can be entered, 16R is confirmed”. good. Thereby, a player's interest can be improved and attention to making a ball enter the flow-down apparatus 10500 before winning can be improved.

  The notification method is not particularly limited. For example, notification by voice or lamp, notification by a 7-segment display, or notification by a liquid crystal device may be used. As an example of production, three balloons with numbers “3”, “7”, and “16” indicating the number of rounds to be distributed are displayed on the LCD screen and detected at the top opening 8512 A sensor may be provided, and notification may be made in a manner in which the balloon is broken each time a ball entering the pre-winning flow-down device 10500 is detected by the detection sensor. That is, when the first ball enters the pre-winning flow down device 10500, “7” is broken, and the balloons with the numbers “3” and “16” remain, so that the first ball can form a continuous ball. Notification may be made in such a manner that “3” is broken and a balloon with a number “16” is left as the second ball enters the pre-winning flow-down device 10500 at the timing. Thereby, it is possible to produce an effect that raises the player's expectation while concealing the number of rounds that can be acquired to the second half.

  In the tenth embodiment, in the round game of each round in the jackpot game state, the case has been described in which the removal device 10560 is in the overhang state for a predetermined period from the start of the round game, and is in the evacuation state after the predetermined period has elapsed. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, conversely, the removal device 10560 may be in a retracted state for a predetermined period from the start of the round game, but may be in an overhanging state after the predetermined period has elapsed.

  In this case, since it becomes easy to form a continuous ball by a ball flowing down the internal flow path INR8 for a predetermined period from the start of the round game (while the removal device 10560 is in the retracted state), the round game of each round is about to end (prescribed It is easy to cause the consecutive balls to reach the movable piece 190a (just before the number of winnings are completed) and to make more than a prescribed number (so-called count number) of balls enter the big winning opening switch 190b (so-called over winning). it can.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined period has elapsed and the removal device 10560 is in the overhanging state, the balls that have entered the internal flow path INR8 are discharged at the same interval as the entrance interval (no continuous ball is formed). Further, it is possible to constitute a game property in which the profit that can be given to the player is increased by ending the round game of each round before the removal device 10560 enters the overhanging state (before the predetermined period elapses).

  Accordingly, a game in which the player finishes the round game of each round by a predetermined period (wins as many balls as possible) (after the start of the round game of each round, the specified number of switches are set in the large winning opening switch 190b as soon as possible. (Game to win the ball).

  In addition, for example, by setting a plurality of types of the predetermined period for each round game for each jackpot type, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing when the removal device 10560 is in an overhanging state. In addition, it is possible to improve attention to the operation of the removal device 10560 and attention to the internal flow path INR8 in which the removal device 10560 moves in and out, and to increase the tension of the player who performs the round game of each round. it can.

  This is different from the tension that the player feels during the round distribution notification effect after winning the jackpot, and the tension that occurs in the current progressive form during the round game of each round. is there. That is, according to the present embodiment, after the result of the round distribution is notified to the player, each round is used as a sense of tension that is directly related to a change in profits obtained by the player (change in possibility of over winning). During the round game, attention can be paid to the flow-down mode of the sphere flowing down the internal flow path INR8 (the ball that can form a continuous ball) and the winning mode of the ball to the big winning opening switch 190b. Thereby, even after the result of the jackpot distribution is notified, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and prevent a random game from being played.

  For example, as a round distribution, even if the same 7 round jackpot is won, the round game of a certain round is a jackpot game where the predetermined period is very short and over-winning is not expected. In this case, the round game of the round can be a jackpot game where the predetermined period is sufficiently long and an over winning can be expected. In this case, whether or not the round game of each round of the jackpot game currently being performed can be expected to win over or not even after the result of the round distribution is notified. It is not possible to understand, and the round game of each round can be progressed while making the player pay attention to the state of the removing device 10560. Thereby, the tension of the player in the jackpot game can be increased, and the interest of the player can be increased.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Points that go to an advantageous route when two balls enter the sorting means>
Movable entrance means that constitutes an open state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening, and a game ball that has entered the winning opening of the movable entrance means passes through a specific area provided in the movable entrance means A game machine including a sorting unit that sorts whether or not to discharge without passing through the specific area, and a game that has entered the movable pitching unit at an interval shorter than a predetermined interval A gaming machine A1 comprising a multi-sphere guiding means configured to easily guide all balls to a specific area.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a trigger is generated, the movable ball entering device changes to an open state over a predetermined opening time, and the game ball that has entered the movable ball entering device in the opened state passes through a specific area. There is a gaming machine that is a big hit by doing (see, for example, JP-A-2014-61177). In this gaming machine, the predetermined opening time is set short (approximately 0.5 seconds), so that in most cases where a game ball enters the movable ball entering device during the game, it is accommodated in the movable ball entering device. The number of game balls to be played is one, but in rare cases, two game balls may be accommodated in the movable pitching device. Because of the low occurrence frequency, when two game balls are accommodated in the movable ball entry device, the player's sense of expectation is greatly improved. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the route through which a game ball can pass when one game ball flows down to the movable ball entry device, and the game ball passes when two game balls flow down to the movable ball entry device. Since the route to obtain is the same, even if two game balls flow down to the movable pitching device, the game balls flow down to the movable pitching device one by one at different times. In comparison, the probability that a game ball passes through a specific area was not improved. In this case, compared to the degree of improvement of the player's sense of expectation, there is a problem that the actual game result is not accompanied and the player is discouraged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the multi-ball guiding means configured in such a manner that it is easy to guide all the game balls that have entered the movable ball entering means at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval to the specific area, When a plurality of game balls flow down to the entrance means, the probability that the game balls pass through the specific area can be significantly improved as compared to the case where the game balls are accommodated one by one in the movable entrance means. . Thereby, the improvement degree of a player's sense of expectation and the actual game result can be balanced, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the compound ball guiding means is configured such that a moving means that performs an operation that affects the progress of the game ball by contacting the game ball, and a game ball that contacts the moving means can flow down. A plurality of distribution channels, and the plurality of distribution channels include an advantageous side channel for guiding a game ball to the specific region, and a game ball in the specific region as compared to the advantageous side channel. A disadvantageous flow path having a low probability of passing, and the advantageous flow path is configured as a flow path through which a game ball is sent when the movable means is in a ball-feeding state that can be configured by operation. The gaming machine A2 is configured such that the ball-sending state is configured when another game ball is in contact with the movable unit while one game ball is in contact with the movable unit.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, when a plurality of gaming balls simultaneously come into contact with the movable means of the compound ball guiding means, the movable means constitutes a ball-sending state by operation, A game ball can be sent to the advantageous flow path. For this reason, it is not necessary to dispose the driving means to distribute the case where the game ball passes through the advantage side flow path and the case where the game ball passes through the disadvantage side flow path, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A2, the operation mode of the movable means is constituted by a reciprocating operation. One game ball abuts the movable means from one direction of the reciprocating operation direction, and the other game ball reciprocates. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the movable means constitutes the ball-sending state by coming into contact with the movable means from another direction of operation.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A2, the game ball applies a load to the movable means from both directions of the reciprocating motion direction of the movable means, and the load balances the movable means so that the movable means constitutes the ball-sending state. Thus, it is possible to prevent a malfunction in which the movable means is in a ball feeding state in a state where only one game ball is in contact with the movable means.

  In addition, the aspect of the reciprocating motion of the movable means is not limited. For example, a rotating operation or a sliding operation may be used.

  In the gaming machine A3, the movable means constitutes the ball-sending state in an initial state where the game ball is not in contact and balances the force, and the game ball is movable from one direction of the reciprocating motion in the initial state. After the contact with the means, the first state and the second state in which the movement resistance is different from the first state are configured in order until the game ball leaves the movable means. The game machine A4 is characterized in that the movement resistance is increased compared to the first state, and the movable means constitutes the ball-sending state when the game ball abuts against the movable means in the second state. .

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the ball-sending state can be configured as an initial state in which the force applied to the movable means is balanced, while the game ball starts to contact the movable means. Since the first state is lower in resistance than the second state, when one game ball comes into contact with the movable unit in the initial state, the movable unit is moved immediately, so that the game ball is erroneously moved to the advantageous side flow path. Can be prevented from being thrown into the ball, and thereafter, the movable means changes to the second state having a higher resistance than the first state, thereby gaining a period until the second game ball contacts the movable means. Can do. Thereby, even when two game balls arrive at the movable means at an interval, it is easy to configure a state in which the second game ball contacts the movable means in the second state of the movable means, Since the second game ball abuts on the movable means, the movable means constitutes a ball-sending state, so that the game ball can be sent to the advantageous flow path.

  The gaming machine A3 or A4 includes a bridging means that operates as the movable means operates, and the bridging means is configured such that one game ball hits the movable means from one direction of the reciprocating operation direction. The gaming machine A5 is configured in such a manner that another game ball that comes into contact with the movable means after coming into contact is caused to flow down to a position where the movable means comes into contact with the movable means from another direction.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the bridging means, other gaming balls that contact the movable means after one game ball contacts the movable means from one direction, Since the moving means is caused to flow down to a position where the moving means abuts from another direction, even if one game ball and another game ball flow down from the same direction toward the moving means, one game ball and another game Rather than bringing the spheres to one side, the spheres can be directed in both directions in the reciprocating direction of the movable means.

  In the gaming machine A1, the compound ball guiding means is configured such that a moving means that performs an operation that affects the progress of the game ball by contacting the game ball, and a game ball that contacts the moving means can flow down. A plurality of distribution channels, and when the previous game ball and the subsequent game ball are in contact with the movable unit, the movable unit is configured to flow after the contacted previous game ball flows into the distribution channel. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the movable means constitutes the ball-sending state when a later game ball abuts the movable means within a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A1, after the previous gaming ball flows into the distribution channel, the subsequent gaming ball comes into contact with the movable means within a predetermined period, so that the movable means Since the pitching state is configured, not only the case where a plurality of balls are in contact with the movable means together, but the movable means can be set to the pitching state, and in that case, only the subsequent game balls are allowed to flow into the advantageous flow path. be able to.

  Thus, for example, when the movable ball entering means is opened twice by one operation trigger, each time the game ball is opened, one game ball enters the movable ball entry means, resulting in the movable ball entering. When two game balls are accommodated in the means (when the timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the movable means becomes longer) and when the movable entrance means is released once, two game balls are in the movable entry means. In the case where two game balls are accommodated in the movable ball entry means by individually entering, it is possible to change the number of game balls flowing into the advantageous side flow path, and to adjust the profit obtained by the player. Can be planned.

  In the gaming machine A1, the compound ball guiding means includes a driving means having an operation part for performing an operation of giving a driving force to the game ball and performing injection, a stopping means for retaining the game ball in front of the operation direction of the operation part, and a drive A plurality of distribution channels configured to allow the game balls ejected by the driving force applied by the means to flow down, and the plurality of distribution channels are advantageous side flows for guiding the game balls to the specific region. And a disadvantageous flow path having a low probability of passing a game ball in the specific area as compared to the advantageous side flow path. The advantageous side flow path includes a plurality of game balls fixed to the stopping means. And the disadvantageous flow path is configured as a flow path through which a game ball is sent when one game ball is secured to the stopping means. Characteristic gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, it is applied to the operating part depending on whether one game ball or a plurality of game balls held by the stopping means is injected by the operation of the operating part of the driving means. By making use of the fact that the resistances are different, it is possible to change whether the game ball flows down the advantageous side flow path or the disadvantageous side flow path while causing the operation unit of the driving means to perform the same operation.

  In addition, the aspect of a drive means is not limited to a specific aspect. For example, it may be configured by a solenoid member that electromagnetically operates when energized, or may be configured by a spring member that applies a driving force by a return operation after elastic deformation.

  In the gaming machine A7, the operation of the operating unit by the driving means is performed after waiting for the game ball that has entered the movable entering means to reach the stopping means.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A7, the operation of the operating unit of the driving unit is performed after waiting for the gaming ball that has entered the movable ball entering means to reach the stopping means. In the state where two game balls have entered the movable entrance means, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game balls ejected by the driving force of the drive means collide with the game balls on the way to the stopping means.

  Thus, when there are two game balls that have entered the movable ball entry means, the mode in which these two game balls are ejected by the drive means is the same as the operation part of the drive means. The present invention can be limited to one mode of injecting in a state of being arranged on the front side.

  Therefore, the operation mode of the game ball when two game balls enter the movable entrance means can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine A1, the compound ball guiding means includes a plurality of distribution channels configured to allow the game balls to flow down, and the plurality of distribution channels are advantageous side channels for guiding the game balls to the specific area. And a disadvantageous flow path having a low probability of passing the game ball through the specific area as compared to the advantageous flow path, and a plurality of game balls accommodated in the movable ball entry means collide with each other. The gaming machine A9 is configured in such a manner that the game ball easily passes through the advantageous side flow path.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, whether or not the game ball easily passes through the advantageous side channel depends on whether or not the game ball collides in the distribution channel. Even after a game ball enters the ball entry means, the player's attention can be continuously collected in the game ball. In addition, the probability that the game ball will pass through the advantageous flow path is changed by utilizing the change in the flow mode due to the collision between the game balls, and the game ball is operated by contact with the game ball. Since no movable body is required, the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A9, the compound ball guiding means includes a guiding region that guides a gaming ball to each of the plurality of distribution channels, and the guiding region is formed in a shape in which a bottom plate tapers downward, A game ball is guided to the distribution flow path through an opening provided in a bottom plate, and an advantageous side opening for guiding the game ball to the advantageous side flow path is configured to guide the game ball to the disadvantageous flow path. A gaming machine A10, which is arranged at a lower position than the disadvantageous opening to be guided.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the advantageous side opening for guiding the game ball from the guidance area to the advantageous side flow path is positioned lower than the disadvantageous side opening for guiding to the disadvantageous flow path. Therefore, it is possible to easily introduce the game ball whose speed is reduced by the collision into the advantageous flow path.

<If you enter two in V, draw at least one of the better ones. >
A movable ball entry means that changes from a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter a winning opening to an open state in which a game ball can enter a winning opening when an operation trigger occurs during a game; A plurality of fixed areas for determining that the game balls that have entered the winning opening of the movable ball entry means are guided to a specific area provided in the movable ball entry means; A first specific area that gives a player a predetermined profit by passing a game ball in the specific area, and a profit that is given to a player by passing the game ball through the first specific area In a gaming machine comprising a second specific area having a small profit given to the player by passing the game ball, when the plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, By a game ball passing through a specific area Benefits the gaming machine characterized by comprising a first means for easily obtained as compared to the benefits caused by the second specific area is a game ball passes B1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a trigger is generated, the movable ball entering device changes to an open state over a predetermined opening time, and the game ball that has entered the movable ball entering device in the opened state passes through a specific area. There is a gaming machine in which a player can make a profit by doing so (see, for example, JP-A-2014-61177). In this gaming machine, the predetermined opening time is set short (approximately 0.5 seconds), so that in most cases where a game ball enters the movable ball entering device during the game, the ball enters the movable ball entering device. The number of game balls is one, but in rare cases, two game balls may enter the movable ball entry device. Because of the low occurrence frequency, when two game balls enter the movable entrance device, the player's sense of expectation is greatly improved. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when two game balls enter the movable ball entering apparatus and both of the two game balls pass through the fixed area, any one of the game balls is in the second specific area. If the game ball passes through the first specific area after that, the player cannot obtain the benefit of passing the game ball through the first specific area. In this case, compared to the degree of improvement of the player's sense of expectation, there is a problem that the actual game result is not accompanied and the player is discouraged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the plurality of game balls pass through the fixed region within a predetermined period, the first means obtains the benefit of the game ball passing through the first specific region. 2 Since it is easier for the player to obtain compared to the benefit of passing the game ball through the specific area, the degree of improvement of the player's expectation when a plurality of game balls pass through the predetermined area within a predetermined period; Balance with actual game results. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first means includes a first passage channel that allows a game ball to pass between the fixed area and the first specific area, and the fixed area and the second specific area. A second passage channel that allows game balls to pass therethrough, and a period during which the game balls pass through the second passage channel is compared with a period during which the game balls pass through the first passage channel The gaming machine B2 is configured to be long.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the period during which the game ball passes through the first passage channel is shortened compared to the period during which the game ball passes through the second passage channel, When a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed region at the same time, and the plurality of game balls are scattered between the first passage channel and the second passage channel, the game ball passes through the first specific channel preferentially. It is possible to give the player a profit by doing.

  In addition, the method in which the period when a game ball passes a 1st passage flow path, and the period when a game ball passes a 2nd passage flow path is not specifically limited. For example, the length of the second passage channel is changed to the first passage channel so that the flow velocity of the game ball is the same when passing through the first passage channel and when flowing down the second passage channel. In comparison, the length of the first passage and the second passage may be the same, and the speed at which the game ball flows down the first passage is less than the second passage. It may be larger than the flow-down speed (for example, the descending inclination angle of the first passage passage is made larger than the descending inclination angle of the second passage passage), or the second passage passage. The game ball may be stopped inside the second passage for a predetermined period of time by providing a passage prevention means for preventing the game ball from passing by protruding inside for a predetermined period of time.

  In the gaming machine B2, the first passage channel and the second passage channel are configured from the same channel in a predetermined section from the determined region, and the first passage channel or the second passage channel. The flow path is branched by bending at least one of the predetermined branch areas, and the branch area is configured to decelerate the game balls that have arrived, and the first means collects a plurality of game balls in the branch areas. The game machine B3 is provided with a contact inflow means for causing at least one game ball to flow into the first passage channel by reaching the first game passage.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B2, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area, the previous game ball and the previous game ball are decelerated in the branch area by decelerating the previous game ball. Can be made to reach the branch region, and in that case, the abutment inflow means causes at least one game ball to flow into the first passage, so that the advantage of passing the game ball through the first specific region Can be easily obtained by the player.

  In addition, the aspect of a contact | flow inflow means is not specifically limited. For example, it may be configured as a wall portion that can block the progress of the game ball, or may be configured as an operation portion that operates when the game ball reaches the branch region, You may comprise as an electrically-driven part electrically operated by the operation | movement aspect.

  In the gaming machine B3, the specific area includes an advantageous specific area that is more profitable to the player than the first specific area, and the first means moves from the second passage to the first passage. A bridging flow path that enables bridging, and a flow path that is connected to the advantageous specific area and is configured to be able to flow in a game ball that passes through the first passage flow path and is connected to the advantageous specific area An advantageous passage channel, and a game ball that has passed through the bridge passage and a game ball that has passed through the first passage channel join together to facilitate the flow of the game ball into the advantageous passage channel. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being configured in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B3, the gaming ball that has flowed into the bridging channel from the second passage channel joins the gaming ball flowing down the first passage channel, so that the gaming ball Is more likely to flow into the advantageous passage channel connected to the advantageous specific region, so that after the plurality of game balls pass through the fixed region, the game ball faces the first passage channel and the second passage channel, respectively. In this case, it is possible to leave a possibility that the game ball flowing down the second passage passage assists the game ball passing through the first passage passage toward the advantageous passage passage. The presence of the inflowing game ball can be increased.

  The method for facilitating the flow of the game ball flowing down the first passage channel to the advantageous side channel is not particularly limited. For example, it may be performed by changing the direction in which the game balls flow down by abutting the game balls, or when a plurality of game balls reach (stay) at the entrance of the advantageous passage channel, You may carry out by arrange | positioning the introduction means which makes it easy to introduce | transduce a sphere.

  In the gaming machine B4, the first means includes a flow mode changing means that affects the flow mode of the game ball that passes depending on the operating state, and the flow mode change means has an effect on the flow mode of the game ball that passes. The game ball is configured to change in a state every predetermined period between a reduced pass state and a resistance state in which the influence on the flow-down mode of the game ball passing through the pass state is increased. A gaming machine B5 that changes whether or not a game ball easily flows into the advantageous passage flow path according to the state of the flow-down mode changing means when passing through the changing means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the flow mode changing means changes state between the passing state and the resistance state every predetermined period, and at which timing the flow mode changing means passes through the flow mode changing means. Since whether or not the game ball is likely to flow into the advantageous passage channel changes, another game ball flows from the bridge channel to the first passage channel in a state where the game ball flows down the first passage channel A plurality of patterns to be generated can be generated, and a player can play a fresh game every time.

  In the gaming machines B3 to B5, the contact inflow means is configured to be able to change state between a normal state and a special state different from the normal state, and a plurality of game balls that have reached the branch area in the normal state Among them, one game ball is caused to flow into the first passage channel, and in the special state, all of the plurality of game balls that have reached the branch region are caused to flow into the first passage channel. Game machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B3 to B5, the profit obtained by the player can be changed depending on the state of the contact inflow means, and the attention of the contact inflow means can be improved. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the first means extends at least inward of the second passage channel and stops the game ball flowing down the second passage channel, and the second state Passing prevention means comprising an immersion state sunk outward of the passage channel, and the overhanging state is maintained at least when a game ball flowing down the movable entrance ball means reaches the passage prevention means. A gaming machine B7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B2 to B6, the passage preventing means maintains the overhanging state at least when the gaming ball reaches the passage preventing means and stops the gaming ball. The period until the game ball passing through the two passages reaches the second specific area can be lengthened by the period during which the passage preventing means maintains the overhanging state.

  In addition, as an operation mode of the passage preventing means, for example, a predetermined period (a period sufficiently longer than the period required for the game ball to reach the passage preventing means after the operation trigger to open the movable ball entering means is generated) ) An operation mode in which the passage preventing means is maintained in the overhanging state and then changed to the immersive state is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the game machine B2 or B3 includes a blocking member that is movably disposed at the inflow portion of the second specific area so as to constitute a state in which the game ball cannot flow, and the game ball flows into the inflow of the second specific area The position that can flow down to the part is moved, and the blocking member prevents at least one of the plurality of game balls from flowing down to the second specific area. Game machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the gaming ball is arranged at a position where it can flow down to the second specific area, by taking a configuration that prevents the flow down by the blocking member, Since the game balls are in a predetermined arrangement, it is possible to eliminate the premise that the game balls are determined to flow into the second specific area, and the player's attention to the game balls can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B8, the blocking member constitutes a first state in which a load is applied to the game ball to affect the flow-down mode and a second state in which the game ball is not flow-down. Whether the game ball is allowed to flow down to the first specific area or the player is more profitable than the first specific area depending on whether the first state or the second state is reached A gaming machine B9 characterized in that the probability that a game ball will flow down into an advantageous specific area or which will be changed.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B8, after the gaming ball has passed the blocking member, the flow mode of the gaming ball can be made different between the first state and the second state, Differences can be linked to the profits a player can expect. Therefore, the attention of the game ball can be improved even after passing through the blocking member.

<If you enter two in V, the subsequent game ball rounds will be more than the previous game ball>
A first specific area that allows a game ball to pass and gives a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the game ball; and a first specific area that allows the game ball to pass and passes the game ball to the player. A second specific area that provides a profit less than the profit obtained by passing, a composite specific area having a plurality of specific areas, and a confirmation area that is determined to guide the game ball to the composite specific area In a gaming machine, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, the benefit given to the player by passing a later game ball through the composite specific area is A gaming machine C1 comprising a second means for obtaining a profit equal to or more than a profit given to a player when the composite specific area is passed alone.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a trigger is generated, the movable ball entering device changes to an open state over a predetermined opening time, and the game ball that has entered the movable ball entering device in the opened state passes through a specific area. There is a gaming machine in which a player can make a profit by doing so (see, for example, JP-A-2014-61177). In this gaming machine, the predetermined opening time is set short (approximately 0.5 seconds), so that in most cases where a game ball enters the movable ball entering device during the game, the ball enters the movable ball entering device. The number of game balls is one, but in rare cases, two game balls may enter the movable ball entry device. Because of the low occurrence frequency, when two game balls enter the movable entrance device, the player's sense of expectation is greatly improved. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when two game balls enter the movable ball entering device and both of the two game balls pass through the fixed area, each game ball passes through a specific area. There is a problem in that it is left to randomness, and it cannot be said that the interest of the player can be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when a plurality of game balls pass through a fixed area within a predetermined period, a benefit given to the player by passing a specific area of the subsequent game ball is provided. Since the second means is set to be more than the benefit given to the player by the game ball that has passed through another specific area first, the previous ball passes when the state that the game ball passes through the specific area is seen. Profits greater than those obtained by specific areas are promised. Therefore, attention can be continued until a subsequent ball passes, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect of the profit given to the player when the subsequent game ball passes through the composite specific area is not particularly limited, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a benefit given to a player when a subsequent game ball passes a specific area, or a specific area through which a previous game ball passes as a result of the subsequent game ball passing through the specific area It may be a benefit given to a player when a change (increased profit) from the second specific area to the first specific area and the previous game ball passed through the first specific area (after change).

  In the gaming machine C1, the second means includes a movable means that is operated by a game ball, and a benefit that is given when the game ball that operates the movable means passes through the specific area by the operation of the movable means. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it is impossible to pass the game ball to another specific area that gives less profit.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the specific area through which the game ball passes is limited by the movable means that operates by the game ball, so the shape of the flow path through which the game ball flows down is special. Without particular, the specific area through which the game ball passes can be limited.

  In addition, the aspect which makes the passage of the game ball to a specific area impossible is not specifically limited, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, the flow path through which the game ball flows down toward the specific area may be blocked, or the opening through which the game ball is guided to the specific area may be closed.

  Moreover, the aspect of operating with a game ball is not particularly limited, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a means that operates by an actuator that operates when a game ball passes a detection sensor may be used, or a means that operates by being pushed by a game ball when the game ball comes into contact therewith.

  In the gaming machine C2, the movable means operates after the specific area through which the previous gaming ball passes is determined.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C2, after the state in which the specific area through which the game ball passes can be changed (after the specific area through which the game ball passes is determined, that is, in the specific area Since the movable means operates after passing through a state where there is a possibility of bouncing off from the opening, it is possible to prevent inadvertently limiting the specific area through which the game ball passes, and the profit obtained by the player is disturbed This can be prevented.

  For example, assuming that the movable means operates before the specific area to be passed is determined, the game ball itself rebounds from the specific area after the movement of the movable means, gains the profit of the movable means, A situation of passing occurs. In this case, the profit of the movable means can be obtained even when there is one game ball, and the profit given to the player may be too large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C2, the movable means is operated after the specific area through which the game ball passes is determined, so that two gaming balls have reached the specific area. As a condition, the playability of the movable means can be ensured.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the movable means operates in such a manner that a game ball narrows an entrance opening arranged in the vicinity of each specific area and in the vicinity of each specific area so that the game ball cannot pass therethrough. Characteristic gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the movable means is arranged in the vicinity of each specific area and operates in a manner that narrows the entrance opening that is the entrance to each specific area. The moving means can be easily operated before the later game ball enters the specific area.

  As a result, even when the distance between the previous game ball and the subsequent game ball is narrow, the movable means can be easily operated before the subsequent game ball enters the specific area. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the flow path through which the game ball flows down.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the movable means is configured to be able to flow down a game ball along one surface in a state after the operation, and the game ball is transmitted along one surface of the movable means to the other specified A gaming machine C5, which is configured in such a manner as to be directed to an area.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, in the state after the operation of the movable means, the game ball is configured in a mode that travels along one surface of the movable means toward the other entrance opening. In addition to the role of preventing the passage of the game ball to the specific area, it is possible to have a role of preventing the subsequent retention of the game ball.

  In addition, the aspect in which a game ball is made to go to an entrance opening is not specifically limited, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, it is configured in such a manner that a game ball is guided in a predetermined direction by a board projecting from one surface of the flow path and the surface of the board facing the game ball being inclined with respect to the extending direction of the flow path The movable member operates in such a manner as to close the hole with respect to the inlet opening that is the entrance to the specific area and the opening in the vertical direction, and is movable by forming the upper surface thereof to be inclined. The game ball riding on the upper surface of the member may be configured to flow along an inclination.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the movable means narrows the entrance of the specific area where the game ball is determined to pass by operation to make it impossible to pass the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the movable means is configured in such a manner that only one gaming ball before passing through the specific area can pass, so that the predetermined period When two balls pass through the fixed area, the respective game balls can be passed through different specific areas, and the second means can be easily operated.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C6, each entrance opening that is an entrance to each of the specific areas and is arranged in the vicinity of each of the specific areas, and a stage in which the previous game ball starts to enter the first entrance opening And a delay movable means for extending a period of time required for a subsequent game ball to enter the other entrance opening in a state after the operation.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the delay movable means is operated at the stage where the previous game ball begins to enter the entrance opening of 1, and in the state after the operation, Since the period required for the game ball to enter the other entrance opening is extended, it is possible to prevent the later game ball from passing through the entrance opening at an early stage by the operation of the delay movable means.

  As a result, when the previous game ball and the subsequent game ball reach the respective entrance openings at short intervals, even if the subsequent game balls are likely to pass through a specific area with less profit, they enter the other entrance openings. It is possible to extend the period during which the specific area through which the subsequent game ball passes can be easily changed (increased) by the movable means.

<If two pieces enter V, the round distribution of the later game balls will be more than the previous game balls. Part 2>
A first specific area for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the game ball; and a second specific area for giving a profit less than the profit obtained by passing the first specific area to the player by passing the game ball; In a gaming machine comprising a composite specific area having a plurality of specific areas including, and a fixed area for determining that a game ball is guided to the composite specific area, the game ball that has passed through the fixed area passes through A flow path, a first allocating portion that distributes whether or not to guide the game ball to the first specific area, and the second specific position. A second allocating unit that distributes whether or not to guide the area, and the first allocating unit and the second allocating unit reach the first allocating unit when the game balls that have passed through the determined region Configured to reach the second distribution unit before When a plurality of game balls pass through the determined area within the period, the advantage that the player can obtain by the subsequent game ball is greater than the advantage that the player can obtain by the previous game ball due to the action of the previous game ball. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a trigger is generated, the movable ball entering device changes to an open state over a predetermined opening time, and the game ball that has entered the movable ball entering device in the opened state passes through a specific area. There is a gaming machine in which a player can make a profit by doing so (see, for example, JP-A-2014-61177). In this gaming machine, the predetermined opening time is set short (approximately 0.5 seconds), so that in most cases where a game ball enters the movable ball entering device during the game, the ball enters the movable ball entering device. The number of game balls is one, but in rare cases, two game balls may enter the movable ball entry device. Because of the low occurrence frequency, when two game balls enter the movable entrance device, the player's sense of expectation is greatly improved. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when two game balls enter the movable ball entering device and both of the two game balls pass through the fixed area, each game ball passes through a specific area. There is a problem in that it is left to randomness, and it cannot be said that the interest of the player can be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the game ball that has passed through the fixed area is guided in the passage and is configured to pass through the first sorting unit after passing through the second sorting unit. Therefore, before allocating high profits, low profits will be distributed, and the player's interest can continue to increase, and when multiple game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period of time Since the profit obtained by the player with the subsequent game ball is greater than the profit obtained by the player with the previous game ball due to the action of the previous game ball, the attention to the subsequent game ball must be maintained. Can continue to increase the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine D1, the game balls distributed to the second specific area side by the second distribution unit narrow the distribution path of the second distribution unit to the second specific area side, thereby The game machine D2 is characterized by guiding another game ball that has reached the second distribution portion to the opposite side of the second specific area side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1, as a preventive means for preventing the gaming ball itself distributed to the second specific area side from flowing down to the second specific area side Since it functions, compared with the case where the distribution means represented by the movable member is arrange | positioned in the 2nd distribution part, member cost can be reduced.

  Here, the reverse side does not mean the opposite side as the flow direction of the game ball, but means the other direction relative to one direction when the game balls are distributed in two directions. That is, the opposite side to the second specific area side means a side that includes all of the directions that are not directed to the second specific area side and to which the game balls are distributed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second allocating unit and the first allocating unit are connected, and the game balls distributed to the opposite side of the second specific area side are guided in the second allocating unit. And a displacer that displaces when a game ball is disposed in the connective flow path, and the other game balls that have reached the second distribution part by the displacement of the displacer Is guided to the opposite side of the second specific area side.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the previous gaming ball is arranged in the connection flow path, so that the subsequent gaming ball is moved to the second specific area side by the second distribution unit. Sorting can be prevented, and later game balls can also be guided to the connection channel. In this way, before determining which specific area the previous game ball passes through, the subsequent game ball is guided to a specific area with less profit than the specific area where the previous game ball may pass. Can be prevented.

  The gaming machine D3 includes flow-down means for flowing down the game ball at a constant speed, and the flow-down means is configured such that when the previous game ball is arranged in the connection flow path, the subsequent game ball is moved to the second distribution. A gaming machine D4, wherein the gaming ball is caused to flow down at a speed at which the previous gaming ball reaches the first sorting unit after passing through the unit.

  Here, when the game ball flows down by its own weight, the game ball flows down at an individual flow speed due to the randomness of the flow of the game ball. Therefore, for example, if the flow speed of the previous game ball is high and the flow speed of the subsequent game ball is slow, the previous game ball is arranged in the connection flow path and has passed through the first distribution part. In some cases, the later game ball may reach the second distribution unit. In this case, the displacement of the displacement means is returned when the subsequent game ball reaches the second allocating portion, and it is not possible to prevent the subsequent game ball from flowing down to the second specific area side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the flow rate of the game ball can be controlled by the flow-down means, and the previous game ball arranged in the connection channel is Since the game ball can flow down in a manner in which the subsequent game ball passes through the second distribution unit before passing through the dividing portion, the displacement of the displacement means can be used effectively.

  In the gaming machine D4, the flow-down means is configured to prevent the previous game ball and the subsequent game ball from flowing in continuously with at least one of the first distribution unit or the second distribution unit. A gaming machine D5, characterized by causing a game ball and a subsequent game ball to flow down.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the flow-down means prevents the previous game ball and the subsequent game ball from continuously flowing into at least one of the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit. An empty period can be configured between the time when the game ball distribution is confirmed and the time when the subsequent game ball distribution starts, and the player who pays attention to the flow-down mode of the game ball is an emotional transfer. It is possible to secure a period to do. Thereby, the interest of a player can be improved. Note that “flowing down in a row” means a state of flowing down as close as a plurality of game balls come into contact.

<Continuous sphere formation: Change in ease of formation of continuous sphere by entering timing>
A game area in which a game ball can flow down, a winning opening that is arranged in the gaming area and allows a game ball to win, and a ball that is arranged upstream of the winning opening and that can guide the gaming ball to the winning opening In a gaming machine comprising a flow-down means, the ball flow-down means includes a receiving port that receives a game ball from the gaming area, and a discharge port that discharges the game ball that has entered the receiving port toward the winning port, A connection flow path that connects the reception port and the discharge port so that a game ball can flow down, and a first period required until the ball that has entered the reception port at the first time point is discharged from the discharge port. Forming a specified shortening period, which is a period of time longer than a second period required until a ball that has entered the receiving port is discharged from the outlet at a second time point after the first time point. A gaming machine E1 characterized by

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a entrance where a gaming ball is guided to an advantageous route with a high profit that may be given to the player when the gaming balls enter in succession ( For example, refer to JP 2014-161397 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the incoming game balls are generated when the balls that have been bounced down by the nail and gathered by chance (completely incidental), so that There was a problem that it was difficult to make.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, in the designated shortening period, the first time until the game ball that has entered the previous first time point is discharged from the discharge port by repeatedly entering the ball into the receiving port. Since the period is equal to or longer than the second period until the game ball entered at the second time point after the first time point is discharged from the discharge port, the previous game ball and the subsequent game ball in the connection channel Can be shortened.

  In this case, it is possible to intentionally form a state in which a plurality of game balls are connected in a designated shortening period. In a gaming machine in which the profit that can be obtained by the player when the ball is discharged can be improved, the profit that can be obtained by the player can be improved.

  Note that the means for causing the action of the ball flow-down means is not limited in any way. For example, the aspect which decelerates the game ball which entered first may be sufficient, and the aspect which accelerates the game ball which entered later may be sufficient. In addition, for example, the aspect of the connection flow path in which the game ball that has previously entered flows down is meandering, while the aspect of the connection flow path in which the game ball that has entered later flows down is the shortest path (straight path). It is also possible to switch to

  In addition, the aspect of a ball flow down means is not limited at all. For example, a game ball may be guided by a nail planted on the game board surface, or a game ball may be guided by rolling an upper surface of a long plate extending from the game board surface.

  In the gaming machine E1, the connection flow path is configured such that a game ball that has entered the receiving port at the second time point is arranged upstream of a game ball that has entered the receiving port at the first time point. A gaming machine E2 that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, it is possible to prevent a subsequent gaming ball from overtaking the previous gaming ball, so that it is easy to intentionally form a state in which a plurality of gaming balls are connected. can do.

  That is, for example, when the flow path in which the previous game ball flows down and the flow path in which the subsequent game ball flows branch and branch, depending on the relationship between the first period and the second period, There is a possibility that the game ball may be overtaken, and there is a possibility that the period during which a plurality of game balls can be connected is shortened.

  On the other hand, when the subsequent game ball is arranged upstream of the previous game ball, after the subsequent game ball catches up with the previous game ball, they are connected to each other (the subsequent game ball is In a state where the game ball is blocked by the game ball), the subsequent game ball does not overtake the previous game ball. Therefore, a plurality of game balls can be easily connected.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the connection flow path is configured so that at the same time, the velocity component toward the discharge port of the game ball that has entered the reception port at the first time point is the reception port at the second time point. The gaming machine E3 is formed in a mode in which the gaming ball entering the ball has a velocity component or less directed toward the discharge port.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to prevent the interval between game balls flowing down in the connection flow path from extending with time. Thereby, the space | interval of the game ball which flows down through a connection flow path shrinks, and the expectation that a continuous ball will be formed can always be maintained.

  Therefore, even if the ball can always enter the entrance, there is no case where the interval between the game balls is extended. For example, the state where the game ball can enter the entrance and the state where the ball can enter the entrance are not possible. It is possible to eliminate the need for a switching valve for switching between and.

  Note that this gaming machine does not prevent the later game ball from reaching the discharge port for a longer period than the previous game ball, and does not flow down the connection flow path at the same point. The game balls are limited to the comparison between the game balls.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the ball flow down means includes an operation means that operates in a constant operation mode and applies a load to the game ball flowing down the connection flow path, and the constant operation mode of the operation means The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the length of the designated shortening period varies depending on which point in time is the first time point.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the first gaming ball is made to enter the receiving port at the timing at which the first gaming ball enters the receiving port. After that, it is possible to change the period during which the game balls are connected by further entering the game balls at the entrance, so that the player determines the timing of game ball launching as ease of formation of the ball. Can be selected by criteria. In addition, since the launch timing of the game ball is related to the operation mode of the operation means disposed in the ball flow down means, the attention of the operation means can be improved.

  In addition, according to this, it is possible to suppress a gaming method in which a game ball is repeatedly fired toward the receiving port until a timing at which a continuous ball is not formed. That is, by making it possible to grasp the timing at which a continuous ball is easily formed, it is possible to switch between the timing of repeatedly firing a sphere toward the entrance and the timing of firing freely by aiming at a location other than the entrance. Yes, the game can be moderated.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress unnecessary useless balls (useless balls caused by repeated firing without forming a continuous ball), and partly dissatisfaction of the player.

  On the other hand, it is possible to encourage the player to fire the game ball repeatedly by creating a timing that suggests that the profit given to the player may increase by repeatedly entering the entrance. The number of digested balls (the number of game balls to be fired) can be increased. Thereby, by adopting a game method in which a player launches a game ball in a single shot, the dissatisfaction with the game hall that the time efficiency of the game ball digestion becomes poor can be partially solved.

  In the gaming machine E4, by reversing the operation mode of the operation means forward and backward, the period until the game ball that has entered the receiving port when the operation means is in an equivalent state is discharged from the discharge port. A gaming machine E5 that is configured to be changeable.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E4, the gaming ball flowing down the inside of the ball flowing-down means and the outside of the ball flowing-down means are compared with the case where the degree of deceleration is completely defined in a fixed pattern. It is possible to make the game difficult by using a lot of driving timings when playing the game balls that flow down together into the winning opening. In other words, it is limited to the effect of facilitating the connection of game balls that have entered the entrance, and intentional creation of a joint ball of the game ball that has entered the entrance and a game ball that has spilled from the entrance is suppressed. can do.

  In the gaming machine E4, the gaming machine E6 is configured such that the correspondence between the operating means and the designated shortening period can be changed by reversing the operating mode of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E4, with the action of the operating means as a landmark, the launch of the game is made to a player who plays a game in which a game ball that has entered the entrance is made up of two balls. Timing can be shifted. Thereby, even if the technique of launching using the operation of the operation means as a mark is enhanced, it is possible to give a gameability that is not necessarily profitable.

  In any one of the gaming machines E4 to E6, the operating means is configured to switch the game viewed from the outlet by switching between a first state in which a load is applied to the game ball and a second state in which no load is applied to the game ball. A gaming machine E7, characterized by switching the flow direction of the ball.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E4 to E6, the speed component toward the discharge port is changed by switching the state of the operating means without reducing the flow-down speed of the gaming ball. be able to.

  In the gaming machine E7, the connection flow path includes a concave groove extending along a direction from the receiving port to the discharge port at the bottom, and when no load is applied from the operating means, A gaming machine E8, wherein a flow of a game ball is restricted by the recessed groove.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E7, the flow-down mode of the gaming ball when no load is applied from the operating means can be made uniform by the recessed grooves.

  In the gaming machine E7 or E8, the operating means includes a plurality of protruding and retracting members that protrude and retract in the connection flow path, and the plurality of protruding and retracting members are disposed along an extending direction of the connection flow path. The in / out members of the gaming machine E9 are characterized in that switching from the second state to the first state occurs simultaneously, and switching from the first state to the second state occurs sequentially from the receiving port side.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E7 or E8, the state where the velocity component toward the outlet of the game ball flowing down is smaller on the outlet side than on the inlet side. Can be generated.

  In the gaming machine E9, the switching operation of the retractable member from the first state to the second state is performed in a period equivalent to the time required for the game ball to fully pass after starting to collide with the retractable member. A gaming machine E10 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E9, among the pair of gaming balls that sequentially enter the receiving port, the previous gaming ball continues to receive the action from the first state retracting member and enters immediately after. It is possible to easily form a situation in which the game ball that has been balled is not affected by the in / out member. Thereby, it is possible to easily add a speed difference between the game balls flowing down the connection channel.

<Ballball formation: Initial operation is the same, switching to a different ball formation mode>
A game area in which a game ball can flow down, a winning opening that is arranged in the gaming area and allows a game ball to win, and a ball that is arranged upstream of the winning opening and that can guide the gaming ball to the winning opening In a gaming machine comprising a flow-down means, the ball flow-down means includes a receiving port that receives a game ball from the gaming area, and a discharge port that discharges the game ball that has entered the receiving port toward the winning port, An operation that forms a switching channel that can switch in multiple modes a connection channel that allows the game ball to flow down the receiving port and the discharge port, and a deceleration effect that occurs in the game ball that flows down the corresponding position of the connection channel. A gaming machine F1 comprising switching means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a entrance where a gaming ball is guided to an advantageous route with a high profit that may be given to the player when the gaming balls enter in succession ( For example, refer to JP 2014-161397 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the attention to the subsequent flow-down mode of the game ball that has entered the entrance is reduced from the sense of security that the game ball only needs to enter the entrance at predetermined intervals. There was a problem that there was a fear of letting.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the action switching means can switch the deceleration action generated in the game ball flowing down the corresponding position of the connection channel in the switching period in a plurality of modes. Even if a game ball enters continuously with an interval, in one case, it is continuously discharged from the discharge port, while in other cases, it is still discharged without interval. You can create a situation that is discharged from the exit. Accordingly, it is possible to maintain the attention of the game ball that has entered the receiving port with respect to the subsequent flow-down mode.

  Note that the method of distinguishing between the first case and the other cases is not limited at all. For example, in two types of gaming machines, the case where the wing member that switches whether or not the game ball can be won at the winning opening is opened once in a single case, and the case where the wing member is opened twice in succession is another case. It may be a case. Further, for example, while the number of opening of the wing member is the same, the case of one may be distinguished from the case of the other depending on the difference in the small hit type acquired when winning the start winning opening. For example, when the action switching unit includes an operation member, one case may be distinguished from the other case in correspondence with the operation mode of the action switching unit.

  The mode of the deceleration action is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the distance between the previous game ball and the subsequent game ball may be shortened, a mode in which the distance between the previous game ball and the subsequent game ball is maintained, or the previous game ball and the subsequent game ball may be maintained. The mode which extends the space | interval may be sufficient, and the mode by which they are switched along a time series may be sufficient.

  In the gaming machine F1, the action switching unit includes an operation unit that operates in a certain operation mode and applies a load to the game ball flowing down the connection channel, and the switching is performed immediately after the operation unit performs the same operation. A gaming machine F2 in which a period is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F1, the player can cause the game ball to flow down in a desired flow-down manner by adjusting the launch timing of the game ball with the action of the operating means as a mark. Can be difficult. That is, since the deceleration action that occurs in the game ball can be switched after the predetermined identical operation, for example, the game ball that is launched at the timing of entering the connection channel immediately after the predetermined identical operation is It is possible to form a case of flowing down in an intended manner and a case of flowing down in a different manner. Thereby, the attention to the game ball flowing down the downflow path can be improved as compared with the attention to the operation mode of the operation means.

  In the gaming machine F2, the driving means for driving the operating means is formed from a single driving device and switches the deceleration action while maintaining the same operating speed in the switching period. .

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F2, the operating means is driven by a single driving device and the deceleration operation is switched while maintaining the same operating speed. In addition, the product cost can be reduced, and the player can be prevented from detecting that the decelerating action has been switched by the operation sound or vibration of the driving means.

  In the gaming machine F3, the operation means includes a first drive state in which the operation direction of the drive means is maintained in the forward direction immediately after the same operation, and an operation direction of the drive means in the reverse direction immediately after the same operation. A gaming machine F4 that is operable in the second driving state that is reversed and that stops the driving means immediately after the same operation in the first driving state and the second driving state.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the driving means stops immediately after the same operation in both the first driving state and the second driving state, so that the player can hear the operation sound of the driving means. Thus, it is possible to prevent the driving state from being grasped by clues and vibrations. Thereby, attention to the game ball flowing down the connection channel can be maintained.

  In the gaming machine F3, the operating means shifts from the same operation to the switching period while maintaining the operating mode of the driving means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F3, the transition from the same operation of the operation means as a landmark to the switching period is performed while maintaining the operation mode of the drive means. The material for grasping | ascertaining (predicting) the operation | movement aspect of the operation | movement means after performing can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the flow-down mode of the game ball flowing down inside the ball flow-down unit based on the operation mode of the operation unit.

  In addition, for example, even if the operation modes of the operation means in the switching period are different because each of the plurality of operation means includes individual driving means, the driving sound and the driving are performed when the operation is changed from the same operation to the switching period. It is possible to prevent the vibration from changing.

  In the gaming machine F4, depending on whether the operating means is in the first driving state or the second driving state, a game to the receiving port necessary for discharging game balls from the discharging port in a row A gaming machine F6 characterized in that the ball entry mode changes.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F4, the manner in which the game ball enters the entrance for forming a continuous ball changes depending on the operation mode of the operating means. Since it can be difficult to grasp that the continuous ball is discharged from the outlet at the timing of entering the ball, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball flowing down toward the outlet.

<Continuous ball formation: The maximum number of continuous balls is changed by the operation of the retracting member>
A game area in which a game ball can flow down, a winning opening that is arranged in the gaming area and allows a game ball to win, and a ball that is arranged upstream of the winning opening and that can guide the gaming ball to the winning opening In a gaming machine comprising a flow-down means, the ball flow-down means comprises a change means capable of changing a maximum number of consecutive balls, which is the maximum number of game balls that can be guided to the winning opening during a predetermined period. A gaming machine G1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that maintains a space between balls flowing down by ribs arranged in a flow path when game balls enter in succession (for example, JP-A-2015-181923). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the period until the game balls are discharged from the flow path (a period during which the game balls can be visually recognized) can be increased, while the interval between the game balls discharged from the flow path is between Is the same as the distance between the game balls when entering the flow path, the interval may be reduced when a plurality of game balls that were separated at the time of entry may be discharged, and may be discharged together (for example, Compared to the case where the game ball flows down while colliding with a group of nails), there is a problem that attention to the game ball discharged from the flow path cannot be maintained.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the maximum number of consecutive balls, which is the maximum value of the number of game balls that can be guided to the winning award for a predetermined period by the changing means, can be changed. After three game balls have entered at the same interval, in one case, one ball is discharged every predetermined period, and in the other case, three balls are discharged together in a predetermined period be able to. As a result, it is difficult to grasp the mode when the game ball is discharged from the ball flow down means when the game ball enters the ball flow down means. Attention can be maintained.

  In a mode in which the changing means guides only one ball at a time to the winning opening in a predetermined period, a player intentionally changes the firing strength of two game balls that are continuously fired (so-called a so-called ball). , “Twisting”), the ball can be divided into balls. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who performs twisting from receiving extra profits, so that the profit difference between a beginner (a player who does not perform twisting) and an experienced person (a player who performs twisting) is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the changing means changes the intervals of the plurality of gaming balls in the process of flowing down while continuing to flow down the gaming balls in the ball flowing down means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, unlike the case where the gaming ball flowing down in the ball flow down means stops, the game ball enters the ball flowing down means too much and the ball flowing down means is full. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to always maintain a state in which a game ball can enter the ball flow down means.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the changing means includes a flow path for causing the game ball to flow down, and an operation means configured to be capable of applying a load to the game ball that appears and disappears in the flow path and flows down the flow path. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the maximum value of the number of game balls that can be guided to the winning award is changed during the predetermined period by switching the operation mode of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the maximum value of the number of gaming balls that can be guided to the winning opening during a predetermined period can be switched by the operation mode of the operating means. The maximum value of the game balls that can be guided to the winning opening can be electrically controlled.

  In the gaming machine G3, the flow-down path is formed of a plurality of crotch flow paths, and the operation means is disposed in each of the flow paths branched into the plurality of crotches, and the combination of the operation modes of the operation means is different. The gaming machine G4, wherein a maximum value of the number of game balls that can be guided to the winning award changes during a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G3, the maximum number of gaming balls that can be guided to a winning opening in a predetermined period by a plurality of operating means arranged in a combination of operating modes of each operating means. Therefore, as compared with the case where the operation means are arranged at one place, by grasping the operation mode of each operation means, it is aimed at the maximum number of game balls to be guided to the winning opening during a predetermined period. It is possible to make it difficult to fire a game ball.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent a game that obtains an unexpected profit by using the change in the maximum value of the number of game balls that can be guided to the winning opening during a predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine G4, the flow-down path includes a distribution unit that distributes game balls to the plurality of crotch channels, and the distribution unit distributes the game balls to a plurality of channels in the plurality of crotch channels. It is possible to switch between a first state in which the game balls are distributed to a first state and a second state in which the game balls are distributed to a single channel among the plurality of crotch channels.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G4, how the game balls are distributed to the plurality of crotch channels is changed by the distributing means. Since the direction changes, it is possible to change the number of game balls that can be guided to the winning opening during a predetermined period.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the changing means sets the maximum number of consecutive balls in the normal gaming state, which is a state before the transition to the special gaming state, to be equal to or greater than the maximum number of consecutive balls in the special gaming state. A gaming machine G6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the frequency of shifting from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state can be increased, and there is a benefit that the player can obtain in the special gaming state. Fluctuation can be suppressed (the ball can be made uniform). As a result, the accuracy in calculating the profits that the player can obtain from the number of special game states can be increased, so that the game store can easily manage the game and transition to the special game state. Therefore, the feeling of fatigue given to the player when the normal gaming state is long can be reduced. Therefore, it can be a gaming machine that is beneficial to both the player and the game store.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the changing means is configured to compare the maximum number of consecutive balls from the start of the round game of each round in the special gaming state after the predetermined period has elapsed. The gaming machine G7 is characterized by increasing the maximum number of consecutive balls.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, it is possible to easily manage the number of game balls to be awarded at the winning opening before the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of each round game. It is possible to increase the probability that a game ball wins in a winning slot after a predetermined period from the start of the round game of each round. As a result, while making it easy to temporarily stop winning at the winning opening just before the end of the round game of each round, it is possible to make it easy to make the consecutive ball enter the winning opening in that state, and as a result, the probability that over winning will occur. Can be raised.

  Conversely, the number of consecutive balls after the lapse of a predetermined period may be made smaller than the number of consecutive balls before the lapse of a predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to increase the sense of tension of the game during the predetermined period, and to prevent the player from playing the game casually. In other words, after the start of the round game of each round, it is more profitable for the player to play the game so that the specified number (count) of balls is put into the winning opening (large winning opening) as soon as possible. You can concentrate on the game from the beginning.

<Ball formation: Recognize whether it is possible to form a ball or not>
A game area in which a game ball can flow down, a winning opening that is arranged in the gaming area and allows a game ball to win, and a ball that is arranged upstream of the winning opening and that can guide the gaming ball to the winning opening In a gaming machine comprising a flow-down means, the ball flow-down means is configured to allow a load to be applied to a flow path for flowing down the game ball and a game ball that appears and disappears in the flow path and flows down the flow path. The game machine H1 is characterized in that the operating means can switch the magnitude of the load applied to the game ball when a business trip is made on the flow path.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a entrance where a gaming ball is guided to an advantageous route with a high profit that may be given to the player when the gaming balls enter in succession ( For example, refer to JP 2014-161397 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game ball is guided to the advantageous route when the game balls are continuously entered into the entrance from the posture of the movable accessory arranged in the path along which the game balls flow down. Since the player can grasp whether or not it is the timing to be played, it is assumed that when the game ball is guided to the advantageous route when the game ball is entered to the entrance, There was a problem that there was a risk of giving outside profits to the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, it is not possible to grasp the magnitude of the load applied to the game ball by the operating means only by grasping that the operating means is traveling on the downstream path. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the degree to which the game ball flowing down is decelerated. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game mode in which the placement and posture of the operating means are aimed at, and to equalize profits.

  Further, by notifying the timing of formation of a continuous ball by notification by lighting or sound, not only the game ball but also the corresponding lighting and sound can be directed to the player.

  In the gaming machine H1, the operating means makes a business trip by colliding with a game ball when traveling on the flow path, and a fixed state in which the state is maintained after colliding with the game ball when traveling on the flow path. A game machine H2 that can be switched between a released state and a lower state than the previous position.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the state can be maintained by the collision with the game ball flowing down the flow path and the game ball can be sufficiently decelerated, or the game ball can be sunk by the collision with the game ball. It is difficult to grasp the ball in a state where the ball cannot be sufficiently slowed down or the game ball is not allowed to flow down (the operation means alone). As a result, it is possible to prevent a game mode in which the placement and posture of the operating means are aimed at, and to equalize profits. Further, when the game ball flows down, it is possible to visually recognize whether or not the game ball is decelerated by the operating means, so that attention to the game ball flowing down can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the gaming machine H3 is characterized in that a moving direction of the operating means is a first direction along a direction perpendicular to a board surface of the gaming board constituting the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the appearance and movement of the operating means from the player's line of sight. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the operation even if the operating means moves in and out when the game ball passes through the flow path. In addition, since the outer position of the operation means does not change before and after the operation, it is possible to prevent the position where the player blocks the game ball from being changed before and after the operation, thereby preventing the player from losing sight of the game ball flowing down. can do.

  That is, it is possible to achieve both seemingly contradictory effects of the effect that it is difficult for the player to grasp the manner of the appearance and appearance of the operating means and the effect that the game ball can be easily seen by the player.

  In any one of the game boards H1 to H3, the operating means includes a retracting member that collides with the game ball, a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the retracting member, and a contact from the driving means to the retracting member. A gaming machine H4, characterized in that the operating direction of the retracting member is a direction along a horizontal direction.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the degree of being biased in the movement direction by gravity is small, so even without holding the retractable member separately along the movement direction, The arrangement of the in / out member can be maintained by static friction with the member that guides the movement of the in / out member.

  The operation mode of the in / out member is visible to the player, and the transmission means is shielded from the player so that the invisible member is invisible, so that the player can recognize when the in / out member is on a business trip, while it is in a fixed state or a released state. It can be difficult to grasp.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the operating means includes a plurality of in / out members that collide with the game ball, and in each of the in / out members, the plurality of in / out members play a game when they travel on the flow-down path. It is possible to individually switch between a fixed state in which the state is maintained after colliding with the ball and a released state in which the business ball is collided with the game ball and then sunk from the position on which the business trip has occurred. A gaming machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, it is difficult to identify which in / out member is in a fixed state and which in / out member is in a released state from the appearance of the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball that flows down the flow path in which the operation means is disposed.

  In the gaming machine H4 or H5, an angle between the facing surface facing the flow direction of the game ball and the flow path is equal to or less than an angle formed by the facing surface and the direction of the retracting member. A gaming machine H6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4 or the gaming machine H5, the direction component of the protruding and retracting member of the load applied from the game ball on the opposite surface is changed to the direction component along the extending direction of the flow path. Since the size can be increased in comparison, the retracting member can be easily retracted when the operating means is in the released state.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the flow-down path includes a recessed groove extending as a recessed groove along the extending direction at the bottom, and the recessed groove is a game ball that rolls on the upper part. When the travel means travels to the flow path, the operating means is formed so as to be able to collide with the game ball flowing down regulated by the recessed groove, and when the business travels to the flow path The operation means can be switched between a fixed state that maintains a state after colliding with a game ball and a release state that sinks from a business trip position by colliding with the game ball when a business trip is made on the flow path. Is provided with auxiliary operation means that acts to separate the game ball from the recessed groove in the fixed state, and does not act on the game ball separated from the recessed groove in the released state. H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the load applied to the retracting member is reduced by the active operation means when the game ball is actively separated from the recessed groove in the fixed state. On the other hand, in the released state, by making it easier to maintain the regulation of the game ball by the recessed groove, it is possible to reduce the load that the game ball leaves from the recessed groove before the retractable member sinks and is applied to the retractable member. Can be suppressed.

  In other words, if it is not desired to move with the load of the game ball, it can be assisted, whereas if it is desired to move with the load of the game ball, it can be assisted, which can achieve both seemingly contradictory effects. . Thereby, operation | movement of the intruding member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine H7, the auxiliary operation means is configured in such a manner that when the retracting member is sunk, it comes into contact with a game ball away from the recessed groove and directs the flow direction of the game ball toward the recessed groove side. A gaming machine H8 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the gaming ball can be returned to the recessed groove by the auxiliary operation means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the flow-down path while being away from the recessed groove when the projecting member is sunk without adding a member.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C7, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a slot machine, A gaming machine Z1 to play. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C7, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C7, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H8, the gaming machine has a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
190 Movable pitching equipment (movable pitching means)
190b Large prize exit switch (winner entrance)
320, 3320, 4320 Route distribution part (part of distribution means)
322b Plate-shaped part (bridge means)
330 Distributing slope (part of sorting means)
322 Allotment body (part of compound ball guiding means, movable means)
325 Special route guideway (part of distribution flow path, advantageous flow path)
326, 3326 Normal route guideway (part of the distribution channel, disadvantageous channel)
340 Fixed area hole (part of fixed area)
410, 5410 First branch region (branch region)
411 Contact wall (part of the first means, contact inflow means)
421a Movable plate (flowing state changing means)
431 Sorting protrusion (part of the first means)
441 1st specific area hole (part of advantageous passage flow path)
441a, 2441a 1st specific area switch (a part of 1st specific area, a part of advantageous specific area, a part of 1st passage flow path)
442a, 2442a Second specific area switch (a part of the first specific area, a part of the second specific area, a part of the first passage flow path, a part of the second passage flow path)
443a, 2443a Third specific area switch (part of second specific area, part of second passage)
2411 Time blocking plate (part of passage prevention means)
2420 Electromagnetic solenoid (part of first means, part of passage prevention means)
3321 Guide rail (part of compound ball guidance means, part of guidance area)
3323 Special Route Hole (Advantageous Opening)
3324 Hole for normal route (open on disadvantaged side)
4322 Residence channel (part of compound ball guiding means, stopping means)
4323 Injection solenoid (part of compound ball guiding means, driving means)
5411 Operation wall (part of first means, contact inflow means)
6440 Specific area hole (part of composite specific area)
6440i Entrance opening (inlet opening)
6450 Profit increasing device (part of second means)
6451 First rotating member (part of movable means)
6452 2nd rotation member (a part of movable means)
6460 Slide delay device (part of delay movable means)
7411h Overhang member (part of displacement means)
7412 Tilt floor (part of displacement means, part of passage channel, connection channel)
7413 Inclined channel (part of passage channel)
7421 1st ring member (1st distribution part, a part of passage channel)
7422 2nd ring member (2nd distribution part, a part of passage channel)
7420 Rotational distribution device (part of first means, part of blocking member)
7422 Second annular member (part of blocking member)
7440 Specific area hole (part of specific area)
7441 1st specific area hole (part of advantageous specific area)
7442 2nd specific area hole (a part of 1st specific area)
7443 3rd specific area hole (a part of 2nd specific area)
7453 Screw member (part of contact inflow means, part of flow down means)
8500 Flow down device before winning a prize (ball flow down means)
8512 Top opening (reception entrance)
8520 In / out member (part of operating means, part of action switching means, part of changing means)
8543 Sorting device (part of sorting means)
8544b Recessed groove 8544c Long hole (discharge port)
8544e Overhang member (auxiliary operation means)
8600, 9600 Transmission device (part of operation means, part of action switching means, part of change means, part of transmission means)
10560 Removal device (part of changing means)
INR8 internal channel (part of connecting channel, part of flow path)
KM1, KM2 Drive motor (drive means)
Nmax Maximum number of connected balls (maximum number of connected balls)
R1 1st branch induction channel (a part of the 1st passage channel, a part of the 2nd passage channel, a part of the passage channel)
R2 Second branch guiding channel (a part of the first passing channel, a part of the second passing channel)
R3 Third branch guiding channel (a part of the first passing channel, a part of the second passing channel)
R4 special induction channel (part of first passage, part of second passage, bridge passage)
R5 first delay guide channel (part of first pass channel, part of second pass channel)
R6 Second delay guiding channel (part of second passing channel)
RS1 Arc side (one side where game balls are transmitted)
RS2 Arc side surface (one side where game balls are transmitted)

Claims (3)

A game area in which a game ball can flow down, a winning opening that is arranged in the gaming area and allows a game ball to win, and a ball that is arranged upstream of the winning opening and that can guide the gaming ball to the winning opening A gaming machine comprising flow-down means,
The ball flow down means includes a receiving port for receiving a game ball from the game area,
A discharge port for discharging the game ball that has entered the entrance to the winning port;
A connection channel that connects the receiving port and the discharge port so that a game ball can flow down, and
A first period required until a ball that has entered the receiving port at the first time point is discharged from the discharge port,
A designated shortening period is formed, which is a period of time equal to or longer than a second period required until the ball that has entered the receiving port at the second time point after the first time point is discharged from the discharge port. A gaming machine.   The connection flow path is formed in such a manner that a game ball that has entered the receiving port at the second time point is disposed upstream of a game ball that has entered the receiving port at the first time point. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that:   At the same time, the connecting flow path has a velocity component toward the discharge port of the game ball that has entered the receiving port at the first time point. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is formed in a mode in which the speed component is directed to the discharge port or less.

Images